The Guidebook Guide Series – The Life of a Guidebook Writer on the Road​ Transcript

Download (PDF, 269KB)

This week, we are gonna continue our series about guidebooks. And this week, we’re looking at the life of a guidebook writer. Now, I’m gonna touch a little bit on the writing side. But we’ve got a whole webinar dedicated to how to do that writing, what the writing looks like both in format as well as content. And we’ll talk a little bit about the content management systems that that goes into and how you set up your book. All of that is happening next week. So this is more the lifestyle, the schedule, the workload, the demands, is what we’re gonna be talking about this week.

How many of you guys were on the webinar last week where we talked about the basic fundamentals of guidebooks, the different companies, the differences between those companies? Let me know in the chat box if you joined us last week. If you were not with us last week, I talked about the differences between companies like Lonely Planet, and Rough Guides, and Eye Witness, and Frommer’s, and photos, and all of those things. So we’ve already got a whole hour on that. So I’m not gonna spend this hour going back into that because, last week, I very specifically didn’t talk about the life of the guidebook writer, so I’m gonna keep those separate. So if you missed that, make sure to pick that up.

So specifically what we’re gonna focus on today is four things. So we’ve got two disclaimers. One is the same disclaimer that I gave you last week that I’m gonna give you again. And you’ll hear that in a minute. And the second disclaimer is around a bit of the grumbles and the frumpiness around the work of guidebook writing, and why that exists, and why it shouldn’t necessarily phase you, but you should know about it.

And the next thing I’m gonna go into, there’s a small typo in there, I apologize, is the five pillars of the life of the guidebook writer that you should keep in mind as you go into any engagement. And you should keep this in mind both in terms of whether you even decide to go off for one in the first place, whether you wanna do a contract before you move into doing a full book, and also how you negotiate those things in your contract, like, how much money you have for expenses versus pay, if that’s all gonna be one lump sum, the deadline that you have on your book, they all really depend on these bits about how you will get your work done. So I’m gonna give you five things there to consider to keep in mind both if this is for you, and to set the terms if you do go ahead and do it.

And I just found out somebody who’s new in the coaching program, we’ve got spots in our coaching program open this month, is actually doing a guidebook that I thought of applying for. So, guys, there’s tons of guidebook work out there. It really turns over quickly in terms of the assignments these days, and you can get it even if you don’t feel like you have a lot of background, and it will give you a financial cushion. She’s basically set for, like, the next six or eight months of full-time income just from doing this guidebook alone. So that’s why we talked about last week was more than income side of it. So if you wanna hear more about that income side, I recommend checking out the past webinar.

And then the last thing that we’re gonna talk about is the pitfalls of poor preparation. And you could say that there’s pitfalls of poor preparation in any type of travel. But I’m gonna look at five aspects or facets, if you will, of ways that it can go wrong in guidebook writing specifically. And they’re all different dimensions of the preparation. So you might totally excel at one and forget to do another, and that can make your life pretty hellish. So that’s what I’m gonna talk to you about, all five of those different dimensions.

So I was just talking about magazines. Magazines are my background, vlogs, travel blogs, content marketing for clients is also my background, but something that is not in my background, and this is disclaimer number one of our webinar today, is guidebook writing. There was a guidebook I was thinking of applying for. I got busy doing the boot camp that we do at our retreat house where we’ve got travel writers that come up for a week, and we go out every afternoon on tours, and they practice their interviewing skills and idea generation, and then come back, and recap, and debrief. I got busy with that. And then someone who’s now a coaching student of mine applied and got that guidebook.

So I have not written a guidebook yet. I’ve written a book, but I know a lot of people who not just have written guidebooks but whose entire career, if not currently but for many years, was built around writing for guidebooks. So the information that I’m bringing to you, guys, this week, it’s gonna be different than how I often have examples for you guys from my own experience, but also my coaching, and people I’ve heard from conferences. This will be more the experience of others that I’m sharing with you. But because of that, I’m gonna bring you a lot of different perspectives, people who have written for different guidebooks companies, people who have written specialized books like biking in the Pyrenees versus a whole country book, all sorts of different things like that. So we’re gonna look at it from that angle. So I just wanna have that out there. I have not written for guidebooks myself, but I have a lot of folks that I’ve talked to about this, including somebody I just caught up with the other day for this phone call about how that works.

So the second big disclaimer, and this comes with gold stars for whoever figures out where this quote came from, is how guidebook writing works and what you may have heard about it. So if anybody has spotted the source of this quote, like I said, gold star, the quote is, “Get with it girl, you are never getting off this train.” So in this scene, which is from a popular movie based on a very popular book, somebody said, “Well, oh, I just have to do it now. I just have to convince them for now. Like, I just have to do it.” And then her mentor, clue right there, says, “No, this is your life now.”

So this is from Hunger Games, by the way. I believe the last Hunger Games movie or the second-to-last Hunger Games movie, part one of two. This quote is about the moment in which somebody realizes what they’ve signed up for, right? We can think about it that way. You often get into things, whether it’s a whole career, or just an assignment, or working with a specific client. Without being fully cognizant of everything it entails. In fact, I would say it’s next to impossible to get into something new without being completely cognizant of what it entails because you’ve never done it before. How would you know?

So I’ve got another quote here for you guys. Oh, we’re gonna go to the quote right away and I’ll come back. Oh no, it’s too far away. Okay, hold on, let’s still go here.

So this quote is from somebody who has written a number of guidebooks, become known, in fact, for writing about writing guidebooks. This is my friend Leif Pettersen. He has a blog called Killing Batteries and a book about following Dracula through Eastern Europe, that’s his nonfiction narrative book that he put out self-published. But he’s also written a number of guidebooks. And he has been interviewed about writing guidebooks, and he has multiple posts on his Killing Batteries blog that you can Google about the work of the guidebook writer. And I pulled this quote for you guys because it really encapsulates that moment where you realize that you’re not getting off this train, and all of the things that you are unhappy about. So he says, “Guidebook research means enduring long hours (sometimes 10 to 12 hours a day, 7 days a week while on the road, less ideally but not necessarily, during write-up), extravagant jet lag and sleep debt, often undignified travel and sleeping conditions, and in many cases, resolve-testing solitude and loneliness both on the road and during write-up.”

Now, I know some of you who are on the call today, but not all of you. And for those of you who are on the call and have been travel writing for a while, you might find that you could just take out the noun there in guidebook research and instead write “travel writing”, and this whole paragraph would still make sense. Let me know in the chat box if you know what I’m talking about.

In fact, for instance, right now I’m here in the Netherlands for the UK’s biggest travel blogging conference. And I have had a series of flight issues the last couple weeks. Today I arrived, and my Airbnb was completely sketchy so I had to get a last-minute reservation at a hotel. I have been on buses that I had to take in the middle of the night for no apparent reason because they were scheduled earlier and I don’t know what happened. All of these things just in the last couple days. So extravagant jet lag and sleep debt, often undignified travel and sleeping conditions. So many of these things also happen to leisure travelers, enduring long hours working also on the weekends. Especially those of you who have full-time jobs and you do your travel on the side, this is gonna look like you because you’re putting in those hours on your blog or your other travel writing in the evening after your full-time job. So in so many ways, the things that strike people, that people complain about, that they get up in arms about, about guidebook writing are really tenants of travel writing period. They are tenants of what your life as a travel writer looks like when you are on the road as opposed to at home writing.

So I was talking to somebody recently about how, as travel writers, we really have two modes, unless we are location-dependent and live in the places that we’re writing about all the time for long periods of time that are very comfortable. Our two modes are travel and normal, or, you know, life or home, or whatever you wanna call it. And when we are traveling, because we are either traveling on our own dime, or the dime of somebody who is trying also to stretch it as far as possible like a tours company, a hotel, a PR company, a casino, maybe an airline, that’s so common these days, that happens, a tour company, whether it’s us or them, whoever is paying for that trip, the goal is to get as much research, to see as many things as possible, or it’s not work, it’s leisure travel. So you can combine those things. I’m not gonna say that we, travel writers, are the masters of leisure because I hate that word, but you can combine those things where you are on a trip perhaps with friends and family, and you’re doing work for your writing, or you can slow travel writing travel, which is still not as slow as slow travel.

But the inherent aspect of traveling as a travel writer is that you are cramming and seeing as many things as you can in that place. And I doubt that even if you aren’t working on a guidebook, you aren’t doing something, whether you’re on your laptop physically or you’re out exploring, that goes in the realm of your travel writing hours, when you wake up in the morning until you go to sleep at night. Most people aren’t watching tons of TV on their couch when they’re out traveling, most people aren’t, you know, sitting in a cafe just reading a book unless it’s specifically designed to soak up the ambiance or because they need a break or whatever it is. We are out there for those 10 to 12 hours a day. We are walking a lot. I used to clock, like, 14 or 15 miles a day often. We are sometimes jet-lagged, but often exhausted, and part of that is from soaking up so much new information. And we are more than your average individual encountering all of these different, like, annoying, horrible, effed-up, unfair things about the world that come up when you travel. And so, something to realize about the life of a guidebook writer specifically within the realm of travel writing is that, in many ways, it’s not that different than other types of writing on the road. What it is different than is types of writing you do at home.

So I talked about these two dichotomies, there’s the writing that you do at home, which is travel writing, and then there’s the traveling that you do and you often need to be writing alongside of that. There was a press trip attached to the TBEX conference for travel bloggers specifically a few years ago where they picked the top, top, top bloggers in the whole industry, and stuck them all together in a house, kind of Real World style, except without the cameras. And they were in this house on an island that had sort of closed for the season. So a lot of the things they were supposed to be able to do weren’t possible. They really had to fend for themselves. They would show up for appointments and they would just be canceled It was really kind of one of these, like, all the things that can go wrong go wrong instances. And then you have a bunch of personalities that are in a house.

And a friend of mine who fortunately encountered this group during this period without having to be one of them told me that he was really struck by this couple. Their name is Deb and Dave from the Planet D. If you’re in the travel blogging world, you might be familiar with them and their hours. Their professionalism, yes, but their hours. And he told me that they would be out all day traveling, taking pictures, interviewing people, getting quotes, doing their social media while they were out. And then they would come home, and then they would work until about 11:00, maybe later, depending on when they came home from dinner, fulfilling their obligations for different clients. They had clients like American Express, they had big brand-name clients. And they would come home after being out doing the research, and they would sit their butts in the chair, and they would do more work. And they certainly weren’t only doing this on the weekdays.

So guidebook writing these days, to be honest, I think looks a lot like travel blogging. But there are easier types of writing out there. So what if you are doing travel copywriting? You don’t actually even need to travel for that. You can do copywriting based on your past experience, based on research that you come up with online. You don’t even really need to do interviews by phone. And even better, there’s a lot less checking in with your clients. If you have a blog, you might think of your clients as your readers. If you are a journalist or some other type of freelancer, you would obviously think of your clients as the people who are paying you. But there’s a lot less need to go back and forth on email, you have a lot more control of your own schedule.

Now, if you’re a travel journalist, you might be traveling, you might not. You might be doing most of your research via phone interviews. This is very, very easy and possible to do in this day and age, especially if you specialize in writing newsy pieces, or profiles, or other types of front of book pieces. And one of the great things about that is that you could just spend a great chunk of your day, or most of your day as many of your days, talking to people about what they’re passionate about, getting to have conversations with people who are excited about something. And even more than that, you have the rush of getting paid to learn about something that you’re interested in, that you had an idea about, and someone affirmed that that idea was interesting enough, that thousands or millions of people are wanting to read about it.

And then content marketing, so doing blogs, and social media, and things like that for companies, you get to exercise all sorts of different voices. It’s not like the blog where you have to be this idealized version of yourself all the time. And as you’re doing that, you’re getting paid so well that you probably only have to work half-time. I’ve gone to conference after conference these days where full-time people say, well, of course, they do content marketing because, you know, that pays great. So this is a pretty known thing now, that the pay is there for content marketing.

So what’s the pro about guidebook writing, that might be the next question. But it has elements of all of these. And that’s actually one of the coolest things about it if you ask me, besides the pay and the stability which we spoke at length about last week. So when you’re on the road, you get the journalism pros of getting to spend your day talking to people about what they’re passionate about. But then you also get that pro that you put together this outline of your book proposal of what was gonna go in there, and the editor said, “Yeah. Great. Let’s do that. Let’s cover that,” and you get to write about it. You’ve also got the copywriting pros, more when you go to the writing side, and I’ll talk more about that, like I said, next week, where you get to just sit down, hunker down with your notes, not have to email people, not even have to, like, shower, whatever you want, and you just sit and write all day in your own little cocoon. But then you also have the content marketing pro where you get paid handsomely. So a lot of these things roll into guidebook writing. So there’s so many pros that, in so many ways, whether you wanna say they outweigh those cons of what Leif was saying, about what the life of the…there’s a little pun there, Leif is the guy’s name, and life also is life, so what the life of the guidebook writer is like.

But the other thing is that…the idea of the nomadic travel blogger, right? This person who doesn’t necessarily have a home base, they’re here for two days, they go there to stay for a month, but they’re really taking weekend trips here, here and there. You also get to do that as a guidebook writer, especially if you’re doing a whole country. You will be on the road conceivably for four months maybe, researching this guidebook. So you also get to play at those lovely things of being the nomadic travel blogger without actually having to build up your own audience.

So these are some things about the lifestyle of the guidebook writer that are very appealing, that you might not necessarily have considered what goes into that, sort of, from that attractive standpoint outside of the idea that, you know, if you heard me last week, I said that the pay can be quite nice, but also that cachet of having the book credit to your name. The lifestyle also has a lot of attractive draws to it. And that’s why, even in this day and age when you don’t think, first and foremost, of, “Oh, I wanna be a travel writer. I wanna write guidebooks.” You think, “Oh, I wanna be an Instagram influencer because that looks easy,” right? Like, it’s not something that jumps to people’s mind, but it’s a really lovely way to have a life as a travel writer.

But there’s those five pillars that I talked about, right? So I wanna break each of those down piece by piece to really dive into what the lifestyle is like. So first of all, it depends a lot on your assignment. So a small recap from last week, we talked about how some companies, especially more established, larger travel writing companies, are more likely to assign newer-to-them writers to do a chapter in a larger book, especially as part of an update to a book that already exists. But there’s some companies that are really lovely, including Rough Guides actually, but Moon Guide, which is out of Avalon which is out of Hachette, it’s one of the big five publishing houses, they will assign you an entire book for you to do in your own voice with your own supervision over the whole book. Frommer’s works in a similar way, though they’re assigning many fewer books. Moon tends to have…I showed a slide with all the ones that they were looking for in the last webinar, but I think they’ve got about 20-odd titles right now that they’re looking for writers on. That’s huge, 20 titles. You go to Lonely Planet and that’s, like, get in the queue and wait to see if you hear about, like, one thing.

So if you are new to guidebook writing, and especially new to a particular company, you have to think for yourself, “Do I wanna do a chapter where my commitment is low, where I can dip my toe in this life,” especially if it’s an update chapter, someone else has already done a lot of the writing in the previous version, and you are going through and making sure that things are still there, that they’re still open, so you have a framework for your research, and you also have a basis for the writing about the region. Obviously, you’re going to freshen it up, including the things about the attractions. But there’s a lot less onus on you to be brilliant in front of your computer on a daily basis, and also to be brilliant in your research out there on a daily basis.

However, writing a book is gonna carry that cachet that just you wrote this whole guidebook. But it’s a lot more work, and it’s not just more work in terms of the writing, it’s a lot more work in terms of the organization. So I said that, at the end of the call, we were gonna talk about the poor planning or poor preparation pitfalls. And not just booking your travel, but booking your travel in a cohesive order, figuring out when you’re gonna file different chapters for your editor, what makes sense, what chapters will be easiest for you to write first, what chapters will be harder to write, what chapters you’ll really need good internet to do a lot of fact-checking as you’re writing those up, when your editor will be getting back to you with edits, and where in the world you will be, and if it will be easy for you to work on those edits, these are all the things that you have to consider when you’re working on an entire book.

So like I said, you might be just doing the research, forget about the book writing, for a whole book over the course of four or six months. There’s somebody that I’ve coached who is in South America, and she’s doing, a rather large South American country, their entire guidebook for Moon. And she’s in the position where she, at the same time, has two book chapters that she’s also doing for Rough Guides. So she’s got two different guidebook companies that she’s working on in the same span of time, about three different countries, and she’s got a mix of chapters and books. So as she was working on her chapters, one of the things that she said to me was that the writing part of that was so much easier. It was just so much easier because Rough Guides, as someone that assigns individual chapters out, needs to have a cohesive voice throughout the book. So you learn what the voice is and you copy it. Whereas for her guidebook, she was figuring that out as she went along, how historical was she gonna be, how much was she gonna dig into food, and how much was overkill. That was something that was gonna be unique to her book and her voice, and that was a lot harder for her. However, she’s not a veteran travel writer, she’s only been doing this for about a year. And somebody who is a veteran travel writer, perhaps with a journalism background, they might find that idea of using their own voice faster than moving into the voice of somebody else. So there’s a lot of different considerations here about how having a chapter or a book affects, like I said, your writing side, but also your research.

So in terms of how you plan your year, are you gonna fall down the rabbit hole of guidebook writing where you don’t see your family, and you don’t respond your emails for a month, or is that gonna be your day-to-day life for four or six months? What can you and your current life conditions support? You might say, “I have kids. There’s no way that I could do a book.” I have a friend who has written quite a few books for Lonely Planet. Well, he certainly did do more of them before he had kids. He also has been doing several since he had kids, particularly ones that are more niche such as biking in the Alps, or in the Pyrenees, or in the South of France, or something like that. Now, some of that is gonna be based on previous experience that he has, but he also has to get his butt over there and check for things, whether they’re still there or not, get that kind of information you can only get on the ground, and get that in his book. So the way that he has done that is, while he does have two school-aged kids, he will take a very concentrated trip. And he will go to France, or Spain, or wherever that it is, and he will be there just running his butt off, getting the research done, for as little time as he can. But what happens then is that your deadline is built to include your research and your writing. So that means when he gets home, he has a bit more time than other people might to get that writing done. So he can stretch it out when he gets home so that he’s swapping off childcare duties in a more equitable way with his wife.

So that’s one of the ways that you can still get a whole book done even if you’re not young and untethered, and able to essentially become nomadic for six months or a year while you’re working on a book and staying in the places that you’re writing about. You can really do books both ways. So there’s no right way, and there’s no saying, like, “Oh, I couldn’t do it because…” So some folks will even take their whole family with them. If you are in a situation, perhaps you already are a blogger and your family’s nomadic, or whatever that is, you can travel slower as you’re working on your guidebook and travel with your family, and split it up during the day when you’re on the ground. There’s some times when you go out together as a family to the attractions, and then you split up, and your partner will watch them for a while while you’re doing the really haphazard, fast running from place, to place, to place.

Now, the concept of the running I kind of keep mentioning, and Leif also alluded to this in what he was talking about, is the running. So I wanna talk about what that running really looks like. So first and foremost, if you were to guess, you may have heard me say this before or read it online, but I’d love to hear your guess. What do you… I’ll get to that question in one second, Artemis. What do you think… Let me know in the chat box. What do you think is a reasonable number of restaurants, hotels, and attractions to fit into one day as a travel writer out doing visits? You don’t have appointments so you don’t have a time table to keep, but you’re just going from one place, to place, to place, to place. So let me know in the chat box. What do you think is a reasonable number of hotels, restaurants, and attractions to visit in one day?

So as you guys were putting that in the chat box and the answer to Artemis’s question, she says, “Does it really pay enough that you could keep paying rent at home while you’re out traveling?” Now this, I think, is a highly personal question, because not everybody would want to keep their apartment empty. Candy, is that a combined number for all of the above? Not everyone would wanna keep their home empty anyway. People might be efficient and find that to be wasteful. So I would definitely say that you could look at, for instance, doing your research over the course of, say, two or three months, and then take another two or three, let’s say, three or four months to do your writing, and be looking at a contract for a full book that would be around, let’s say, $35,000. So that would be six months of income for $35,000. If you map that over to a year would be $70,000, but we’re not taking out expenses and taxes. But again, you know, for some people, that sounds great, but it depends on where you live and your cost of living, of course. And like I said, not everybody would want to have the kind of waste, so to say, of leaving their place empty if they were gonna be gone for that long in a stretch.

So a range of answers over here. Kay has got it very nicely split out once, I’m gonna look at her first. Three hotels, three meals plus a snack, two attractions in the a.m. and two in the p.m. We’ve got Robin with 8 to 12, Alicia is 10-plus, Lynne says 6. I hope this is not the Lynne who’s about to take on a guidebook because then we… Okay, you’re not the one that I know who’s about to take on a guidebook because I was gonna say, “No, we really need to talk.” Artemis says 10 to 20, Candy says 10. Great. So Kay has got it a bit right here with two attractions in the a.m. and two attractions in the p.m. I would say, you’d be looking at typically six to seven hotels, and probably at least that many restaurants that you would be stopping by.

So if you think about what a guidebook looks like on the page, and we’re gonna look at this a lot more next week, but if you think about what goes into a guidebook, there tend to be more meal options than accommodation options, just because people need one place to sleep, but they need, you know, three, six, nine, however many days are there, places to eat. And then attractions also tend to be fewer than even hotels. So I think it’s relatively reasonable to say you might visit four attractions in a day, but you would probably be looking at more like six to seven minimum both on the hotels and the meal side, because there’s also gonna be ones that you don’t include, right?

And then the one thing that I didn’t even ask in there, which a lot of us don’t even think about because us hard-working travel writers aren’t necessarily going places to go to clubs, and booze it up, and drink our vacation away or our travel away, but you also have to visit the nightlife. You should check out jazz clubs, bars, you know, dance clubs, outdoor dance clubs. You know, if it’s a Portland-style kind of craft beer bowling place, you also have to go and peek at those things.

So how does that make sense? How do you go to all these things? I’ve shown you guys in the past, in some of our webinars about press trips, some different, crazy kind of itineraries that I’ve seen pulled together. And one of the things that… I think I’m gonna pull one up for you, actually. I wasn’t planning to so this is gonna take me a minute. One of the things that I think surprises a lot of people when I show them this one particularly long itinerary is that it’s more or less just one day. And as a press trip itinerary, it looks absolutely batty. But on my own, if I were out traveling on my own, I would actually put way more stuff than is on this itinerary into my day, to be honest.

So let me hop over and show this to you. And I’m just gonna scroll up to kind of obscure who it’s from and all the contact information. All right. So this is a press trip that was associated with a conference. This is a really common way to get on press trips, for those of you who are looking to get on your first one, is to go to a conference that has press trips attached. In fact, the TBEX is in Europe this year, is in the Czech Republic, and has, like, dozens of stunning, outstanding, amazing press trips. And that’s another reason I go to TBEX, actually, is to explore places that I never would think about going and find the really amazing things that are going on there.

So in this conference, this is the first day. And the first day is not the crazy day. So we drive, we’ve got a museum, I’ve got another attraction with lunch, we’ve got an attraction, attraction, we have another attraction, we check into the hotel, another attraction, we eat, and then we’re supposed to go somewhere else. So this has got a good, you know, like, six or seven, just, attractions, and then a couple meals in there. And, you know, maybe some of those things that I said were attractions are actually hotels. So that’s got, like, eight or nine things in there. And like I said, that’s not the day that’s crazy.

Now, the next day, we’ve got a 20-minute tour of a theater with a 5-minute passing time to get to an aquarium that we’re supposed to spend 15 minutes in. Then we drive somewhere else, and then we have about 35 minutes at an inn where we’re also supposed to have breakfast. Then we leave, we’ve got 10 minutes to get to another place where we have a 10-minute stop in a cheese place. And then we have another 10 minutes to get to a fruit farm. And then we’ve got 15 minutes there before we go to visit a hotel. And then we’ve got 15 minutes there before we depart to visit another museum and explore downtown. So we’ve got 50 minutes to explore downtown, a sweet shop, and a museum, we’ve got a 20-minute passing period, and then we’ve got 10 points to hear about the ferry. Then we leave, we’ve got five minutes, it looks like…oh, no, sorry, we’ve got 15 minutes to visit another hotel. Then we’ve got 10 minutes to check out a dairy farm. Then we get a whole two hours for lunch. And then we get another 15 minutes to visit a photo gallery.

Now, as you may surmise, this tour did not work out as it was scheduled on here because one person could do this, but herding a set of 12 cats, and all of the people on the ground who wanna talk to them, by cats I mean journalists, of course, with their cameras who wander off, doesn’t happen. But with one person, I would absolutely do this and more. So this is a really good example of what it might look like to have your day as a travel writer who’s out in the country. Now if you’re in a city, these things happen much faster. I might have 10 minutes where I walk down one street and take notes on seven different restaurants on that one street. I might have an hour that I go to a strip of hotels that are all in one area and spends five to seven minutes at each one. I might have 15 minutes when I go to a museum. And I walk through that whole museum that they recommend a two to three-hour visit. I walk through that whole museum in 15 minutes.

Now, the question is, how does one do this? And particularly, I’m doing this as a journalist, right? I’m looking for ideas. I’m taking notes for later. How do you do this as a guidebook writer who needs to get a certain amount of information and get it down to write up into your book? So let me flip back to the slides for a second. How do you do this right? The question the pace on the one hand. What pace is comfortable for you? So I am able to do this pace, and get notes, and whatnot, in part because of experience, because I’ve been doing this for a while, and also because I’ve been on a lot of press trips where I got trained both by other journalists and by PR people who were good at moving guides along and moving us through a place, who were very polished at that.

But the other thing is that, you also have to decide what pace works for you to not crash. So for you, you might know that that whiplash of the separation between the writing life and the travel life is absolutely not for you, and it will send you into, like, a crazy bipolar spin of loneliness to be sitting there 14 hours a day writing a guidebook, oh my God. So you might know that that’s just not for you. And so in that case, you can set it up so that you’re doing your writing while you’re there, and half your day is research and half your day is writing, and you might, you know, let your house on an Airbnb, or find a long-term renter, or whatever that would be for you in order to accommodate that, or you might decide that this guidebook assignment is the thing that lets you finally become location-independent and give up where you live entirely.

But the other thing to keep in mind is, who is setting the pace? So I mentioned this earlier…and I will upload that file for you guys as well. I mentioned this earlier, that you need to make sure when you’re first setting up your guidebook contract that you think about these things, because if you’re not careful, you can get…just by virtue of the fact that everybody wants everything, you know, now, now, now, now, you might get a contract that is not feasible for you, and think that it’s the only option, okay? So with any editor, all the time… The file should be showing up now. It says “itinerary”. I think you guys should see it over there on the side.

With any editor, all the time, you should always ask, you should always ask for what you need. Whether that’s time, whether that’s resources, whether that’s money, you should always ask. And so the thing is that if you’re not careful, especially if you’re only doing a chapter, you can find yourself in a situation where your schedule feels really untenable. But you can also ask if you can have more time for an individual deadline. So perhaps the deadlines that your editor has given you between chapters 1 and 2 of your entire book seem really close, especially because you know you have to do a big bunch of research in the middle, and you won’t be able to sit down and write, or you could see that the entire timeline for your book isn’t great, you could see that you’d really like to have more time to turn in the revisions, because you know you’ll be traveling when you work on the revisions, whatever that is. So one of the keys to having a lifestyle as a guidebook writer, as opposed to being dragged along by being a guidebook writer, is to keep track of and keep control of the pace that you set.

But the other thing is… Actually, I’m gonna do the next slide first. The other thing is that you have to deal smartly with your research. So Lisa has got a question about itineraries that’s relevant to the last section that we’re going to talk about, which is planning pitfalls. I’m gonna hold off on that until then.

But Artemis had a good point that relates into this, which is talk-to-text. How do you deal with your research? Are you taking notes physically? That’s probably the slowest way that you can possibly go. I take and a lot of people take and are very familiar with this now, I heard it mentioned at a big journalism conference I was at, is that you should not take notes on details when you are working on this type of work. If you are writing the Great American nonfiction narrative travel book, be my guest, sit in a square in Florence and write down how the air feels, and how it smells, and the sounds of the children. But if you are writing a guidebook, you take a lot of pictures so that you can look at the pictures, and both see and remember, and fill in those details later.

So I take two types of pictures when I’m taking pictures. I take pictures that are set up, that are lit, that are meant to be used. And then I take pictures that are intentionally crap. I have them on a bit of an angle or the light is crap, something like that, as an indicator to an assistant or whoever I might task with separating out those photos when I need to have a big chunk of photos for an assignment, as an indicator about which photos are meant for notes versus which photos are real photos. So this is a trick that I use. It also helps you yourself if you’re just doing it yourself. But you take some that are just bad, that are clearly bad, that wouldn’t be considerable as photos, as a note to yourself that those are notes. So what you can do is when you get home from somewhere, you can just quickly go through and just click, click, click, click, click in the preview viewer all of those ones that are clearly notes and dump them in a file that says “Notes”.

So Artemis had the point about using talk-to-text, about using dictation. So this is a big thing that can become difficult in terms of notes and writing things up, is how do you get words successfully into text when you are traveling, especially in foreign countries when things are non-English, or where the names are unusual? Even if you’re in America, for instance, in the Northwest as well as the Northeast, a lot of things have Native American names. And I challenge you to say that into your phone and get what you expect to get out of it. So how to get information either from yourself verbally or if you’re recording your interviews becomes a big challenge when you are doing guidebook work.

So as a result of this, I have developed what somebody called recently “the flying thumbs”, which is that I basically, over the years of doing this… I did not used to do this before I had this job of being a travel writer. I type so fast, and I have a phone that is optimized specifically for this. I type so fast that I can simultaneously transcribe what the tour guide is saying. Now, this is not a skill I uniquely have. Like I said, I did not do this before I had this job. It was something I developed because I spent years working in Italy, going on trips where I would take notes in Italian either on my phone, or on paper, or whatever it is, and not be able to figure out what it was that I wanted to use later. Either I would be chasing the tour guide around, and my written notes would be illegible even for myself, or I would have notes that I had written, like, half in Italian and half English, and I could read them, but there was no way that I could hand them off to somebody else and have them make sense of it because I wasn’t translating what the guide was saying as I was writing it, but I was also writing my own notes in English, and it was just a mess.

So in order to affront, confront, successfully pursue the life of a guidebook writer, it is paramount that you are super on with how you will deal with your research, and we’re talking about notes but I’m gonna get to other research in a second in terms of things that you would be looking up online and in books and things like that, because if you go into your first assignment, and you go out and do the research, and you don’t have a good mechanism for that, what’s gonna happen is it’s gonna add almost twice as much of the time that you need to do your job just to go through those notes and figure out what it is, as well as transcriptions…or rather, recordings. So it’s become very common these days for people to just put their phone on a table or hold it up in the air when you’re on a tour. I’ve just been on so many retreats that we’ve had or tours that I’ve been on where phones are just shoved in people’s faces, where people just start recording a tour without asking. So one thing that you have to know any time you are doing this type of research, especially if you’re in other countries but even if you’re American and you’re in other states, is that the laws about recording people’s voices in terms of consent vary considerably. And you simply cannot, should not, absolutely especially not when traveling under the name of a company, a guidebook company, simply turn on your microphone like that without asking.

Now, the flip side of that, and the reason that a lot of people say, “Well, I just do that because, you know, people might be weird if they’re being recorded,” that’s the whole problem, is that they’ll be much weirder if they find out later that they were being recorded. And weirder can become much worse than weird, it can become other things. But it comes down to the fact that you are representing a company or traveling under their name, and you have to also be mindful of the legal ramifications for the company that you’re traveling under. So always, always check what are the laws regarding recording people where you’re gonna be you’re doing your research, if you want to go the path of recording people’s voices.

Now, what do you do with those recordings? If you are a guidebook writer who’s just walking around, and doing tours, and visiting hotels, you might get 10 hours of recordings every day. What do you do with those? Are you gonna do something with them? So there are some apps that you can use, and these are dependent on different phones, but I’ve heard several different ones by now. There are some apps that you can use, and I actually come more from brick-and-mortar companies that record their meetings where you can have your phone, your note-taking app, going while you’re recording. And when you make a note in your note-taking app, it attaches the timestamp of where you are in the recording. This sounds amazing, I know. I don’t use them so I don’t have the names for them in front of you…or in front of me, but there’s an increasing number that do this. So it’s something that… You wanna look for something that attaches a timestamp to your notes, that’s what these apps do. And like I said, they’re very different from phone to phone to phone, and they’re also different in terms of how they look.

And never forget, when you’re out researching out all day, they are different in terms of how they drain your battery life. This is really paramount if you’re gonna be doing a long day of research. You wanna be carrying at least two separate portable batteries for your phone. I also have a car charging battery for my laptop. There’s a lot of devices like this where, if you’re gonna be out researching on the road all day, you wanna invest in so that you don’t have problems trying to buy them in a third-world country or somewhere where you wouldn’t even know what kind of shop to go to to get these kind of things.

So I said I wanted to talk about one other sort of research, and I wanna make sure to circle back with that, which is the historical research. It’s the book research. It’s the primary source research into the culture, and especially political history of a place. This is a really important part of guidebook writing that I think a lot of travel writers forget. They think about, you know, collecting the destinations, and recommending restaurants and hotels, and writing about attractions. But you also have to write very factually, very honestly, and unfortunately, very succinctly about the entire history of a country when you put together a guidebook. So this is a place where I’ve seen people lose a lot of time on something that, in their guidebook, only takes up a handful of pages, which is that they start researching and they get overwhelmed by whether it’s a civil war, a genocide, something horrible like that, or just a sheer amount of history. They get overwhelmed by all of the different things that can go in there, and they lose the thread.

So when you are doing that type of historical research, especially if you are not a seasoned print journalist where you know for yourself what is the threshold of, “Where do I need to stop? How much research do I actually need to do,” I highly recommend that you do historical research well, well, well, well before you go out, before you go out on any of your travels. First of all, it will help you to ask the right questions when you’re touring, and going around, and doing your research on the ground. It will help frame the experiences that you’re having in a way that they need to be in order for you to properly collate what is a must-see for a visitor. But also the time lapse between having done that research, and then months passing, and then sitting down to write it, means that by the time that writing period rolls around, you won’t remember all the random details, and the diatribes, and the famous people, and this guy who, rather than make a statue of him, you know, they tried to do a mold, and it killed him, and he’s actually inside the statue. That’s totally made-up. But rather than all those interesting tangents and side stories, you will know the bones, you will know the thread, you will know the things that somebody really needs to understand to understand the place, because those are the things that you will remember from having been there.

So that brings me back to the slide that I skipped that I’m going to go back, which is “Writing on the Road (redux)”, because we’re gonna talk about writing at length next week. But first, a question. How many of you guys who are here live today have been out on the road, either as a blogger or as a person on a press trip, and had an assignment that you had to get done while you were there? Let me know in the chat box if you have been out traveling for work and also had an assignment, not necessarily related to the place where you physically were at that moment, that you had to get done during that period. Let us know.

Yeah, so mixed. So none versus, “I’ve had my own travel blog but no deadline,” “I’ve had assignments due while I was traveling.” This idea of can you handle writing about something that is not what you are currently doing and still keep present with the research you’re doing on the road is very tricky. And if you wanna get into guidebook writing and you have not… Oh, hi, McKenzie. If you wanna get into guidebook writing and you have not set yourself up yet with this challenge, I highly recommend you either get an assignment or you create a fictional assignment of some kind for yourself, and go try this when you’re traveling. It’s even better if you try it when you’re traveling with family because that’s a big pressure, and it’ll sort of replicate the pressure you might have on the road. But whether or not you can get the writing of the guidebook as opposed to writing up your notes, outlining, or something like that, but get actual chapters done when you’re travel writing or when you’re researching your guidebook, has a huge effect on your timeline, on your sanity, on how much stress you’re under.

So you can do the yo-yo where you are based somewhere perhaps in that country or not in that country, or the region that you’re covering, or that state, or what have you, and you go out and research for two weeks, and you come home and write for two weeks. And then you go out and research for two weeks, and you come home and write for two weeks. You can do the yo-yo. I’ve seen people do it. For some people it’s the only way, because in order to write something as comprehensive as a chapter, they simply would not be able to do that up against going out all day and seeing things, and experiencing them, and following the thread. So this is something that is very different for each person. And we’re gonna talk much more about this in the next webinar.

But we are getting to the end of our time, and I really wanna talk to you about these pitfalls. So I’ve talked to you as we’ve been going along through the five pillars about different things that can kind of trip you up. And I mentioned that Lisa had a question earlier that I wanted to circle back to which was related to these. And it’s a little bit down in the pillars…or in the pitfalls, but we’ll get to it now.

So she says, “How far in advance do you make itineraries? Do you need to work this out before going there, or do you maybe make these as you go along?” Now, for any of you guys, whether for a leisure trip or a work trip, if you have ever gotten somewhere, wanted to see it like a travel writer, wanted to really go out and do a lot of things and see interesting things, and not have done that research in advance, you probably know what I’m saying when I say that that means that you will spend a stressful two hours every night or every morning, early morning, figuring out what it is that you’re gonna do the next day, booking where you’re gonna stay in your next destination, figuring out what the trains or buses are that are gonna get you from point A to point B, or if you have a car, the driving directions and what places you wanna stop along the way. So we’re talking here about travel schedules in the middle of our pitfalls. And this is something that I have to say is one of the easiest to avoid and most fundamental ones that you wanna be on the lookout for.

Now, you might say, and be totally right to say, “Well, I don’t know what’s gonna be most interesting. I don’t know how much time I’m gonna wanna spend somewhere. I don’t know if it makes sense for me to do this, this, this, and this. What if I find out that I really need more time for Y?” All these questions are answered by your pre-research. Yes, there can be sirens, calls of different things on the ground, but you have a schedule that you have to follow to file your chapters. And you have a larger schedule for when you…how much time you think that you’re gonna take to write those off and when you need to be home from your trip, and you need to go in there and make some decisions and allocate things. Because if you do not do it beforehand, you will be sacrificing very important, both sleep, and writing, and note-taking, and research time doing that travel scheduling while you are there. So this is the number, number one thing. It’s super, super avoidable. And there’s a lot of reasons that you could think it might make sense to not do it in advance, but you gotta do it. You have to do it. So it’s a huge weight off of your head.

I don’t know about you guys, but I, for instance, know where I’m gonna be almost to the day, like, physically in the world, typically six, eight months out. And if I know I have a trip and I don’t know where I’m staying or, like, even, you know, what I’m doing there, but especially if I don’t know where I’m staying or things like that, it kind of just flicks in the back of my mind. It’s like a little bit of stress. Like, I don’t know where I will sleep. Like, I don’t know if I will have a nice place to sleep. I don’t know if I will spend too much money on that place to sleep. These things are kind of there all the time. And I will find myself absent-mindedly looking at neighborhoods, or looking at Airbnbs, or looking at hotels in certain areas.

And I have somebody else that I coach who told me…we were talking about overwhelm, and we were talking about assignments, and what helps her feel like she can get things done versus what just kind of makes her ball hit the size of the task. And she was saying, “If I’m planning a trip with my family, and we know we have a week and we wanna go somewhere, that could be anything. And my mind starts spiraling into all sorts of possibilities. We could go here. We could do this, we could do that. But if you tell me, ‘We’re gonna go skiing. We wanna go somewhere within two hours of Seattle,’ and, you know, so and so doesn’t wanna ski and they want to do something like this, then I can research those specifications.’”

So what happens is, if your brain is full of all of the things that you’re seeing in the day, all of these small decisions you have to make throughout the day of, “Do I spent 5 minutes here or 15? How important is this museum? How many notes do I need to take? Should I just take pictures or should I quickly interview the museum curator,” all of those small decisions that you need to make, you don’t wanna add to those decisions. You don’t want to add, “How many days should I spend somewhere?” You don’t wanna add, “How important is this place versus that place?” You need to make those decisions upfront. And some of those come from the first thing on this list, which is destination background.

So I spoke about this earlier in the context of the history of a place, especially the political history and cultural history…and especially the boundary changing, you know, for instance, Pakistan used to be part of India. Like, if you’re writing about India, that’s a crucial thing to understand that separation, as well as the British history, and as well as all the things that came before the Mongol Empire, and the Maharajas, and all of these things. So if you don’t know that, then there’s so many things about the interplay of different dishes, and different spices, and different colors, and different patterns in the clothes, that won’t make as much vivid sense to you. So that’s one type of thing to research in advance.

But you also, in advance, wanna be knowing what else has been written about these places in other guidebooks, what do other people focus on? Are they unanimous about that? Are there things that you would be remiss if you did not include? Are there things that there seem to be a lot of dissenting opinions on? And then you need to know that it’s your job to go and figure out, for your book, what that opinion is gonna be. You need to know what the difference between what visitors think and what locals think about different places. You find this out by reading different publications, different newspapers, local newspapers, which you can often find English-language local newspapers, as well as newspapers that have travel articles catering to foreigners. You wanna know what other people are covering there, as well as the deeper background that informs that place. Because if you go out somewhere, even if you know a place but you don’t know it from that standpoint of someone who is curating a book or a block of knowledge around it, if you don’t have that background about what other people find valid to say in here, then you are coming at a disadvantage that will hit you later when you are writing. When you come home and you sit down to write, then you’re gonna feel like you need to look at that. And now it’s wasted, because you’re having thoughts about places that you’ve now seen that you should have had before that would have influenced your travels when you were there and led you to deeper knowledge about the place.

Now, the next thing in here is the guide style. So this goes back to not just the writing, okay? We’re talking about research today. So this is what do your people care about. In the last webinar in the series, I looked at, sort of, user profiles, so to say, of the different guidebooks. And we looked at who’s really interested in history, who’s more interested in food, who’s upscale versus lowbrow backpacker, etc. You want to be hyper clear on the style of your guidebook company, and that means reading other guides. I’ve known people who work on guidebooks who didn’t do this until later, who didn’t do it until they wrote their first chapter and found it to be really a struggle, and they got a lot of edits back from their editor saying, “You know, I like this but let’s put it more in our voice. Let’s frame it more from our readers.” You wanna know how other writers, after they’ve been edited, after the company puts their stamp on approval, you wanna know other writers confront similar information. So you wanna read other guides for other books in your region.

Now, you might realize that what I’m saying is that you need to do a lot of reading, like, books and books worth of reading, before you do your guidebook. And that’s another reason to stay home for a bit, and not just get on the plane and go there and figure it out as you’re there, to stay home and work on your travel schedule and do this research.

Now the two other things to think about, and these are preparation that you do on a day by day basis, both of these, one is research objectives. So I’ve spoken in past webinars about how you should approach a conference with objectives, what do you wanna get out of this conference? Are you there just to meet people? Are you there to meet specific people? Are you there to meet people who are knowledgeable about a certain thing? Are you there just to learn about a certain thing? Are you there to find something like a sense of validation or camaraderie? There’s so many different objectives you can have going to a conference, but it’s the same way when you go out. Is this the day when you absolutely need to get everything done in this city, period? That’s your objective. Is this the day that, because it’s raining, you’re gonna get as many attractions in as possible, and hotels?

Now, a neat tip about hotels that I didn’t have a specifically great place in the webinar to say, but I really wanted to share with you from Pauline Frommer, is that various guidebook companies have different policies about this. I wanna say it’s the Lonely Planet author, but some of the companies, they’re the writer who writes the certain areas, know all of the hospitality folks and, when they come, they’re kind of like the little god traveling along with the retinue who caters to them. But you as a new writer won’t feel like that. And some companies really specifically wouldn’t want that. So you often find yourself in a situation where you need to see hotel rooms, not just pictures online but actual rooms. This happens a lot, that you need to see hotel rooms. So how do you do that? How do you get them to show you physical hotel rooms to personally evaluate with your own eyes how suitable they are for your readership, how much you wanna recommend them, what you want to say about them? You come up with funny, interesting situations.

So Pauline Frommer has this great one where she says that she has, like, a list for herself of, like, weird family situations that she goes and says… So she says, like, “Hey, like, you know, my family’s coming to visit and they wanna be in a hotel. But I need to see a couple different types of rooms to see if this is the right fit for them because, you know, my sister, like, she has this baby who, like, won’t sleep at night throughout the whole night by itself, but it will only fall asleep if it’s in some room. So can you show me the adjoining rooms? But then I’ve also got…,” and she goes on to list, like, seven different types of weird family situations that are completely made up in order to get the person at the front desk to show her a bunch of different room types without knowing that she’s a travel writer.

So you might have days where you don’t…you’re not a person who likes acting or lying. And so you put your kind of lying face on, and you’re like, “This is the day I’m gonna do the hotels. I’m gonna play my character, I’m gonna go out there and talk about my fake family. I’m gonna get it done.” So your research objective for the day is something that it’s gonna move, it’s gonna move based on what you get done the day before. It’s gonna move based on the weather. It’s gonna move based on how exhausted you are. It’s gonna move based on a lot of things. But it’s something you wanna make sure that you have every day so that you don’t end up dragged through a city and find that, at the end of the day, you only got two and you really should have gotten five attractions, but you didn’t do your math the night before to know how many attractions you needed to do that day.

Now, the next thing that I just wanted to touch on because I think people don’t always think about it is sourcing. So what I mean here by sourcing is people that you talk to, sources for interviews. And you might think of interview as kind of something that you would do with people at attractions. Like, I was just talking about hotels, you might interview someone about room types. But the way that you source insider tips, first-person local experiences when you’re on the ground, is very important. So I wanted to give you a couple of my favorite tips about sourcing. You may have heard cab drivers, that’s a really common one. But I find that cab drivers are really hard for guide books because the cab driver in a destination is typically not gonna be the person, socioeconomically, who would be traveling from whatever country your guidebook is published in to the country they’re living. So they’re not a good avatar for the type of person that you’re writing for. So you wanna seek out those people. You wanna seek out people who seem similar to the type of person that you’re writing for and ask them what they like to do. So I often say that I like to ask baristas in cafes, but not like a Starbucks, but like a third wave coffee company where they’re, you know, really into what they’re doing and all that stuff. You can also ask waiters, you can also ask hotel concierge.

But I really like to kind of sit somewhere and snoop. So it could be that you’re sitting in a hotel lobby. This is a trick that I really like, which is that in the evening, when I’m tired anyway…and if I were to go up to my room I would probably, you know, fall asleep, or more or less do, like, not useful things on the computer. I will instead sit in the hotel lobby. In fact, I’m gonna do it as soon as I get off the webinar with you guys, I’m gonna go do this. I will sit in the lounge and work there, because it’s not as comfortable as the bedroom, as the hotel room, and there are other people in there that I can eavesdrop on. So you will hear other travelers who have traveled to this destination talking, and especially if it’s a hotel bar. Sometimes you wanna go to a different hotel than where you’re staying, or you’re staying in an apartment that doesn’t have a hotel. You go to the hotel bar, and you just get a tea, and you work on your work, and you also listen to the locals who come to that hotel bar. And you chat them up, you tell them what you’re doing, you tell them that you’re a guidebook writer, and you ask them for their tips.

Now, just don’t do the thing… I’m gonna leave you with this because it’s kind of funny. Just don’t do the thing that somebody that I know did, which is have a really lovely conversation with somebody about all the things that they recommend, and then ask them what they’re doing in the destination and find out they are the competing guidebook writer for the competing guidebook company, also writing a guidebook that will be selling against your own.

So thank you guys so much for joining me. And I will see you guys next week to talk more about the writing part of guidebook writing.

The Guidebook Guide Series: The Players and The Game Transcript

Download (PDF, 274KB)

So let’s jump in. So this week we’re gonna talk about guidebooks. I’ve got a couple different webinars that we’re gonna look at the life of a guidebook writer both in terms of the writing and the research aspect. But before we get into that you need to know what guidebooks out there are looking for writers right now.

What it’s like to work with them as in how they’re different rather than me just telling you this is what writing for guidebooks is like. And then you hear from somebody else, “Oh, no like it’s actually da, da, da, da, da, da.” It really depends on the company. Like I was saying the reason that I’m not gonna talk to you yet about so much about what it’s like on the ground to do the work of being a guidebook writer, we’re gonna get more into that next week. I will talk about it a little bit this week in terms of how it varies from one guidebook company to another because this is a really important decision in factoring in whether this type of work is even worth it for you.

I’m gonna talk about some kind of bad press the travel guidebook writing has gotten over the years and whether that’s true or not and how it varies from company to company. So in order to do that we need to look at who are the companies that you can write for today because they’re not the same as in 2000 when a lot of press was happening around what it’s like to be a guidebook writer.

A lot of things in that space has changed but just like with magazines it’s not that they’ve died. And there still are a lot of opportunities out there, in fact, a lot more than you would think as I had mentioned in the blog post today about today’s webinar. So specifically the way that I’m gonna work through today’s call is that I want to talk first and foremost about why you should be paying attention to this. Why guidebooks are something that should be on your radar especially if you don’t have a ton of work on your plate right now or if you’re brand new. And then like I said we’re gonna look at the different companies but I’m gonna look at them through two lenses.

One is how do these companies set themselves apart for the consumer? What is their voice? What is their position in the marketplace? So some of these things you might already be familiar with, not just the companies but kind of their brand positioning. But it’s important to think about that because a lot of what goes into you factoring out if it’s gonna be worth your time or not to work on these guidebooks is how long it’s going to take you. And if a guidebook has a voice and an audience that’s very different than what you’re used to writing for even if the rate seems good, the work doesn’t seem too crazy. It’s gonna take you a long time because you’re not used to writing that voice, you’re not used to using your research eyes to look for the type of things on the road that are gonna be of interest to that audience. Somebody who I’ve done coaching with who’s pretty much exclusively a guidebook writer right now, that’s that’s all of her travel writing. She found she’s working with several different companies and we’ll talk later about whether you can do that and how that works.

And some of them come much easier to her than others and that’s in part because some of them need a much more erudite language on the history of a place. Or some of them need much more service-oriented information like how to versus this deep background. And so like I said we’re gonna talk more next week about that actual work and how that looks like. And I’ve got all sorts of information for you about you know, the daily life of the travel writer who is working on guidebooks and on the writing side as well as the research side.

And so then I’m gonna talk about how that different voice plays out in terms of the company culture. And sometimes as you’ve no doubt seen you know, in the press with things like Uber and things like that the companies that seem you know, the most exciting to consumers or that have a cool brand can sometimes be the ones that aren’t the best to work for.

And so we’ll talk a lot because I want you to know both so you can make these decisions and also so you can understand the marketplace. We’re gonna talk a lot about how these companies have shifted hands over time and how they have kept their business going through the downturn of guidebooks and now its renaissance. Because that helps you know if you are putting all of your eggs in one or maybe several baskets that are a little more likely to break out from under you than others. And then we’re gonna talk about what you need to break in. So as I go through talking about each company individually I’m gonna tell you specifically for the companies that we’re gonna look at what the process is for working with each of them, for getting into work with them for the first time, for applying. Okay, so I think that somebody had mentioned earlier on should we approach the editors with an LOI? And it’s actually it’s quite a bit more complicated than that so I’ve talked in the past about letters of introduction and that’s something that’s pretty quick and easy and you just kind of get out of the way.

In a way when you apply to write for a guidebook you will be sending a cover letter, you’ll also be sending your resume, you’ll be sending clips. So it can feel like a letter of introduction in some ways but it’s important to remember you’re applying to write a whole book. So this is very different than when you’re applying to write you know, a blog post once a month or once a week or even four times a week for a place. This is a big commitment for the company that they are putting into you and this is something that’s really useful to think about and I tell people this when they’re looking at doing books more generally. So when you are working with a traditional publisher to do a book what happens is, your pay is something right, and we all think about what our pay is. But their output of money on that book goes way, way beyond your pay.

They’re paying for that editor that’s working with you, they’re paying for the proofreaders. They’re paying for the marketing team. They’re paying for the designer that does the cover. They’re paying for the salesperson that’s working with the bookstores to make sure that your book gets placed. They’re paying for the strategist who figures out when in the cycle of book releases throughout the year your book should be released to get the best traction. They’re paying for the photographers that are going out and getting those photos. They’re paying for the fact checkers. So there’s a ton of money that’s being put in to support the work that you are doing. And because that’s such a big investment on behalf of the company you’re gonna get a lot more vetting doing a guidebook than you would with other types of writing. However, the really cool upside about that is that while you may be getting more vetting a lot fewer people are willing to jump through all those hoops.

And I’ll give you a really clear example of what this process looks like when we get to talking about the individual publishers. But a lot fewer people are willing to go through that multi-stage application process. So what happens is, you might find that you’re actually the only one that actually goes through and does all the steps. So even if you’re new to writing at all, to writing for guidebooks, to writing about travel, having the grit to go through that process just like I say with you know, pitching and repitching and following up with editors. Having that grit is one of the most important things to actually landing these gigs.

So usually when we talk about what we’re gonna talk about in the webinar I tell you my experience on this particular topic. But this is the first webinar where I have to tell you a great big disclaimer which is that I have never written a guidebook for a mainstream publisher which is what we’re talking about this week and the next couple weeks. So I want you to know, that even though I have never done that personally I am not just basing what I am telling you on things I have read online you know, on various random vague blog posts and things like that.

I know personally and have for years people who write a lot of guidebooks. Some of the people who have, in fact, written these posts about what it’s like to be a guidebook writer, people who’ve written 12 guidebooks or 7 guidebooks or written 3 guidebooks at a time. I’ve coached some of them. I’m very close with a number of them and I know a lot about what this is like through them. And in part, the reason that I never got into writing for guidebooks myself is, I always had $100 to $200 an hour hourly rate as a travel writer.

And it never seemed to me like writing a guidebook was an opportunity that would jive with that imperative in my writing business. But I’ve got to tell you that I spent a lot of time looking into this recently because I thought that it might be time for me to get into writing guidebooks as well. So I’m bringing you a lot of information which is not firsthand but it’s not hearsay. It’s something that I’ve heard directly from people who work for a lot of these companies including Pauline Frommer, herself. So I’m bringing you the best information that you can get, in fact, because I’m not just drawing on my experience writing for one company, I’m gonna bring you multiple sides of the story.

So, before we get into writing or, sorry, to talking about the different guidebooks companies specifically I’m gonna talk to you a little bit about why you should take a deeper look at guidebooks. And I talked a little bit this about this in the blog post today. So as I’m talking I’d love for you guys in the chat box to let me know what attracts you to guidebooks? Whether that’s what made you sign up for this webinar today, it might have just been curiosity. Or what is it about guidebooks that has a certain stirring for you in terms of something that you would like to do with your travel writing or time? So let me know about that in the chat box.

And then as you’re telling me that I wanted to let you know that there’s been a lot of…and when I say bad press I literally mean there was an article in “The New York Times” essentially talking about how terrible it is to be a guidebook writer. So there’s been a lot of bad press very literally about the life of the guidebook writer as opposed to the life of the general travel writer but the guidebook writer specifically.

And in some ways that is a truthful misconception. I put that phrase on here and I was trying to think about a different way to say it but that’s really the best thing that I could come up with. Because when people talk about what it’s like to be a guidebook writer they’re typically talking about that moment when they just hate their job. When they absolutely wish that they weren’t there and that they were somewhere else. And I can tell you I’ve had like seven of those this last week because I’ve been caught on planes that have been stuck overnight here and flights that were missed because of that and just you know, basically in the hell that is travel.

And this happens to all of us to do this job and even those of us who don’t do this job and just travel recreationally. And I can tell you that a lot of the things that people say about being a guidebook writer like going to seven different hotels and eight different restaurants and three different museums and four different nightclubs every day is pretty normal for being a travel writer period. When we do our freelance travel writing boot camp week-long event I tell people that I’m not gonna give them a whole afternoon of like three or four hours at one location. Even though they have an assignment to do interviews and to pick up ideas and different things. And I say that I’m not gonna do that because even though we’re here and we’re learning it’s not realistic for you to pattern having a lot of time to ask questions until you get to the point. Or having a lot of time to wander around somewhere until you finally find something because that’s not what being a travel writer is like.

Being a travel writer as a profession means that you prep before you go somewhere and when you’re there you make the absolute most of your time. Which means you don’t do things that you can also look at his home. You’re getting the things that you have to get in person on the ground that you can only get with your own two eyes. And so a lot of the stuff that has been the negative press around being a guidebook writer I find kind of a red herring. Because it’s really kind of about the whole profession of travel writing as a full-time occupation. Sorry, there’s a quite loud ambulance in the background. I’m not sure if you guys can hear with my new microphone or not though but sorry about that so.

That being said it means that if you are gonna be a full-time blogger or if you are gonna pull your whole income writing for magazines, you’re gonna have a similar set of circumstances to the negative things that people say about being a guidebook writer. So you can just decide those hours aren’t for me. I don’t want to do that, that’s not the way I like to travel. And that means that travel writing is something that you shouldn’t do as your primary source of income and that’s totally fine. And that’s great to know before you spend a bunch of time trying to learn how to make it work. But if you have signed up for that life the thing about guidebook writing is that depending on the company and like I said we’re gonna get more into this in a bit. But depending on the company guidebook writing gives you the type of security that you simply cannot get with any other type of travel writing whatsoever even if you write regularly for a magazine. I just don’t know somewhere else where you’re gonna get a contract which averages around $35,000 just handed to you for about four to maybe six months of work.

I just don’t know anywhere else in this industry where you’re gonna get that. You might get contracts that have a monthly retainer that add up to that over time but those can be broken you know, month to month and things like that. So this is really a place for people who want security from their travel writing and it’s not just the security of the year that you’re working on your book. But often there is either an expectation implicit or explicit that you will also be writing the updates of that book.

So we’ll get more into updates and these different contract terms around writing for guidebooks in a little bit but the main thing I want you to know is that there’s money here and that money is a lot more secure than a lot of other different types of writing that you could be doing. And so something a lot of folks have said in the chat box about why they’re interested in writing for guidebooks is another really great reason to get into this in the first place and that is the status of having a published book.

Now, you know, there’s a lot of people that I talk to especially I just came from the Women in Travel Summit about a week or so. And a lot of folks there were telling me you know, that they have their own blog and they’re gonna publish this book and then they’re gonna publish that book. And I spent a lot of time with book publishing people and I was kind of you know, thinking to myself like what’s the marketability of these books, like how many people on their e-mail lists are actually going to buy this? Like what is the time that they’re spending on this book actually gonna do for them?

And so as Sheryl said, there’s the status of having a published book and then there’s the status of having a book that’s associated with a really strong brand. And that’s something that’s just huge you know, even if you have a book that comes out through a major publisher. There’s somebody that I know in Boston, that I saw at a conference recently and he’s got a really cool book called “The Map Thief” and he’s a very research-oriented journalist.

But the thing is like his book is cool but you hear the book and I could tell you what it’s about and that’s still not as powerful as me saying that this guy wrote a Lonely Planet guidebook. And I think it’s really interesting like I said we’ll talk about the difference between how the guidebook companies are perceived for consumers versus how they treat their travel writers. But something really interesting that came up when I was looking things up for this call and setting up the slides and everything was that when I was looking through stock photos and I googled guidebook on the stock photo site that I use.

Every picture of people traveling with guidebooks, they were all Lonely Planet guidebooks and as is the case with you know, big newsstand magazines or Uber or anything like that, remember the bigger something is the more desperate people are for it, the more interest there is around it, the more cache, the worse it typically is to work there. So we’ll talk more about how that is for Lonely Planet.

And so somebody said that they’re creating a travel guidebook on a travel destination that she’s been to. And she’s completed the interviews and online research and she’s considering whether to self-publish it. And you know, and this is a great thing to think about now. I know a lot of people who just go this route of self-publishing and they kind of try to design on their own blog a series of guides around different things.

And I gotta tell you like even Nomadic Matt, who sells these travel guides I think they’re like you know $50 a day or $20 a day in different cities around the world. He’s like the second biggest blogger in the world like if you look in terms of ratings. He’s right after Gary Arndt from Everything, Everywhere most of the time. And it took him a long time, I’m not even sure if I could tell you that he has a good income coming from his travel guides right now. So it’s doing it yourself is never gonna be as lucrative and it’s going to take way more time than doing it with a company.

And so if you’re in a position where you already have the expertise and you already have the research it’s a great idea to at least consider bringing what you’ve already done to another company. Because something interesting that we will look out later is that a lot of guidebook companies, or not a lot, but the ones that commission full books from writers are also open to receiving a book proposal for a book that they aren’t currently publishing. Like an idea that you had. So if you wanna do like a foodie road trip of the Basque region of Spain, if you wanna do a whole guidebook just around that, you should pitch that as a book proposal before you just publish it yourself because somebody might just buy that. And like I said then they’ll bring that team with the editor and the proofreader and the salespeople and the people who already have a relationship with the bookstores and all that, they’ll bring that for you. So let me just look at a couple of the other reasons that people said they wanted to get into guidebook writing. Yeahs, so Aleisha said it’s a longer-term gig and like I said that’s a really great reason to get into it.

But one of the nice things that nobody’s mentioned… I see a lot of traveling deep immersing in culture and Lisa, I know has a background in history. She’s got a master’s in history so this is a great thing for somebody like her and Artemis  says she loves hiking guides and seeing how different writers approach the perfect trail.

That’s another one and I’m gonna talk more about the growth of these guides that aren’t just travel guides but that are thematic travel guides like road trips and romance and hiking and things like that. But something that nobody said which is one of my favorite other reasons to use guidebook writing as the cornerstone of your travel writing income portfolio, your client portfolio is the following. Which is that when you are out researching a guidebook just like when I’m out researching any destination. I might be there for a specific purpose. I might be there for a specific story for a specific magazine. I might have some ideas that I want to pitch when I get home but you are picking up at least 20 or 50 times as many ideas as the ones that you’re actually gonna use for that source.

So when you’re out researching a guidebook and you’re exploring the nightlife somewhere you might find that there’s actually a really cool kind of institution in the city that you’re in, that places that are normal coffee cafes during the day turn into these nightclub type venues at night. And that’s something that you can then pitch to a magazine and it wouldn’t necessarily make its way into your guidebook past like a sentence. And it’s not a conflict for you to find that in your research as a guidebook writer and then turn it into an article for something else. Whereas, if you’re writing, for instance, for a tourism board’s website or for a visitors’ bureau kind of the book that they put out every year and you find that it is a conflict a turnaround and pitch that to a magazine because you’re getting paid by the tourism board or you’re getting paid by the tour company or by the hotel or something like that. So one of the nice things about working with guidebooks is that they give you a paid way and not just paid for your time but also paid for your travel expenses which is really rare these days.

They give you a paid way to uncover story ideas that you can then sell somewhere else. So you’re probably not gonna have the time necessarily unless you’re super organized to pitch those while you’re on the road doing your research or getting your book done. But you can have a huge set of ideas that then coincidentally when your book is coming out and you can then say, “I’ve got a book coming out with you know, Rough Guides this month. Would you like an article on this, this, this, and this?” It’s this wonderful circular thing where you’re writing articles other places about your book and it can help fuel book sales for your book which can, in turn, led to royalties. Which is something that we’ll talk about later which is money that you get above and beyond your advance which is that first huge chunk of change that you’re gonna get from your guidebook company. So those are all the really great reasons that I wanna remind you that this is something to definitely consider if you haven’t thought about it yet as being something serious for you.

And like I said I’m gonna go through all the different companies and show you where the opportunities are. And that will kind of help paint a firmer picture for you about whether this is something that you can actually do. But the most important thing that I wanna say is that it’s not harder to do guidebooks than it is to do any other type of professional full-time travel writing. And, in fact, what’s really cool about it is that if you are new, if you are new to this life, to this lifestyle, to getting all of these things done then this can help you learn how to do that.

It can help you learn how to manage your time as a travel writer and how to hit deadlines. And this is really crucial because I have a lot of people that I see at events or that I work with one on one and there’s this cyclical thing that happens which is that you have a bunch of free time or you know, time that you’ve decided to dedicate to your marketing work. You spend a bunch of time marketing. And then you get work which is great, right, that’s the goal and then you stop marketing and then that work finishes and then you don’t have work again.

And you’ve lost that energy around pitching and it doesn’t happen. And so what happens is that you’re constantly on this yo-yo diet of how you’re spending your time of writing and researching versus pitching versus all these things. And it doesn’t help you to set up a routine of having a full day of travel writing work. Which you can then port over and continue to do after those first three-four whatever articles that you’ve got are done. When you’re working on a guidebook it’s gonna be several months of work where every day you know, you get up and you’re organizing your notes and you’re figuring out we’re gonna go to that day.

You’re maybe transcribing some interviews or you’re writing up what you did the day before as you’re on the bus going some. It creates the routine of a full-time traveler writing life over a period of time that’s long enough to really set that in for you. So that once that guidebook job finishes you might take a little bit of a break but you’re now primed, you’re used to writing that many thousands of words per day and you’re ready to keep going.

So this is one of the reasons why I really think it’s a cool thing to do when you’re new because it helps launch you into that lifestyle. Now, like I said someone asked earlier on the call how do you break into it, is it just a letter of introduction? And the answer like so many things in travel is it depends and it depends on the company. And like I said that’s because of some of them work different ways but the other thing is that you have to remember why there are so many different guidebook companies in the first place.

Why is it that we have the “Rough Guide to Italy,” the “Eyewitness Guide to Italy,” the “Frommer’s Guide to Italy” the Fodor’s? Why do we have all of these different guides to Italy? Why do we need so many? Well, it’s the same reason why there’s 10,000, 100,000, probably 300,000 different travel blogs about Italy right, is that everybody covers it slightly differently. And in the case of guidebooks, it’s not so much that they need to be slightly different but it’s that they need to have a very specific take. A very specific lens that they use to discuss everything which is really firmly rooted in their audience.

Now, this is something that if you’ve attended any of my live workshops or if you’ve done the Pitchapalooza or the IdeaFest program, you’ve heard me go on and on and on about for magazines as well that magazines have to be incredibly rooted in their audience and so do your ideas if you want to pitch them. But the thing about writing for guidebooks is that just because you live somewhere or just because you’ve been somewhere a lot, if you are not the type of traveler that that guidebook company is targeting you might not know that city in the right way to write that guidebook. And so this is something else important to keep in mind when you are applying is that you don’t necessarily have to be the type of traveler that that book is rooted around. But it can really help you with your clips, it can really help you with how you frame your application to show that you can find the types of things that are interesting to the types of people that that guidebook is around.

So what are the different books and what do they sort of sort out into? We’re gonna break out…like I said we’re gonna break out these companies into a lot of information about each one a little bit. But this is kind of the basic breakdown for some of the basic companies. So you could say that the students and backpackers of the world would stick to Let’s Go and Lonely Planet, particularly they’re ones about how to travel on a budget.

And then what about the adult budget travelers? I would say are still gonna have Lonely Planet for sure, you’re also gonna have Rough Guides, you’re gonna have some of the Time Out guides, and you might also have Pauline Frommer’s guides. Now, what about the upper end of the spectrum? So Rick Steves, especially for Europe, also Frommer’s, I would say maybe a little bit of Eyewitness, in here for upper middle class and some of the other ones, Cadogan and Footprint, you might not know as well and Moon Handbooks. If you’re not familiar with them already I’m gonna spend a lot of time talking about them today.

Moon Handbooks are really, really lovely and I would say they’re kind of, you could think of them as almost newer on the market in terms of name brand. But correspondingly that means that they’ve got fewer people applying and they’re much better to work with and we’re gonna talk all about that in a bit. And then on the higher end is Fodor’s, and Eyewitness. And I would say we’re gonna talk about Frommer’s and Fodor’s and they’re kind of interesting weird situations. And I would keep this in mind that Frommer’s is a bit more middle class and Fodor’s is a bit more upper class and Eyewitness is up there as well. Now, something that you’ll see when I start talking about who you can write for is that these guidebooks that are for the upscale travelers are very hard/next to impossible to write for. Now, why is that? This is a weird reason in that they both are not doing so awesome financially. So Eyewitness got bought by and merged with another guidebook company a few years ago so they’re essentially not updating those books.

So in the case of Eyewitness, these are really fantastic books. They really are one of my favorite guidebook companies to use for when I’m going somewhere and I don’t have a guide for work, when I’m going somewhere and I’m kind of trying to find things myself in an art and historical sense. So they’ve got these amazing drawings of cathedrals and museums and they show you where to find different pieces of art and they tell you the history and it’s all broken out. So a lot of that doesn’t need to be updated every year so they don’t really need a lot of writers to work on them. They really have only at the back of the book a bit of very squeezed together information about restaurants and hotels in different places. So if you think about it it’s very easy to update that so they don’t really need a lot of outside people to do that. That’s something that they can largely do in-house.

And in the case of Fodor’s we’ll look at this a little bit later but Fodor’s books also tend to be very heavily stylized in terms of the brand voice and also the layout. So it’s less advantageous for them to work with outside people who they have to train on that voice and train on that physical layout, format and style than it might be for some of these other companies, okay?

So, another thing to consider and I’ll tell you more about who does this and who doesn’t is that some companies will have you personally write the entire book. Like Sharon was referring to over here in the chat box. Whereas, other guidebook companies work with something that is called a pool of writers that they pull from. Now, are there advantages to both? Yes, are you gonna get $35,000 from being one of the writers in a pool? You could if you get a whole book. So there’s cases where even if it’s a company that works with a pool of writers and that would primarily be Lonely Planet and Rough Guides on here, okay, a little bit Fodor’s and a little bit Frommer’s as well but primarily Lonely Planet and Rough Guides.

If you are going to be working with a company that works with a pool of writers you could get a whole book, you could get a chapter in a book, you can get a lot of different options for them. So when we were talking before about guidebooks and kind of all the things that go into it like being a long-term gig kind of having the status of a published book and all those things. It’s different when you’re one of 17 writers who’s working on a book right, then you don’t have that same cache of having been the person who wrote the book. So this is something else to consider is that there’s types of opportunities with guidebook companies which are a bit more like working with a magazine. Where you might have a little bit of work for a little bit of time or rather a lot of work for a little bit of time. And you’ll get a decent paycheck out of it and you’ll still technically get that author credit but it’s not the same as when we think of writing a whole guidebook.

So, I’ve listed here the players that you wanna know as a writer today and you’ll notice that first and foremost I xed out two of them or rather I struck through two of them. So one is Eyewitness and I already talked about why that is that they are essentially not commissioning any new writing. The second is Let’s Go. Now, I wonder, let me know in the chat box if any of you guys already know why I’ve xed out Let’s Go here. And some of you might not even be familiar with the Let’s Go guidebooks. That wouldn’t surprise me because they’re ones that I remember seeing back in the day.

When you know, before the Internet sort of to say but not exactly before the internet but before there was so much travel information online. Any time I was going on a trip somewhere I would go to the bookstore and I would just spend like, several nights after work hanging out in the travel aisle looking at the different guidebooks for the destination I was going to. Trying to decide which guidebook was gonna be the right one for the type of trip that I was taking.

And even though they had Let’s Go books and even though this was when I was like relatively fresh out of school and didn’t have a ton of money, I never was super attracted to the Let’s Go books. And I was living in Boston at the time and I remember looking up when I was first kind of thinking I might leave my job to be a travel writer. Looking up how do you work with them? And I found out that they essentially it’s like they only employ I might be blanking on the university but I think they only employ Harvard students or something like this. They basically only employ students and only employ students from a certain university or certain set of universities. And so I think that they technically pay but not very much and they’re essentially set up almost as like a paid summer internship. That’s how these books are produced. So that’s also part of why the quality can be a little bit lacking in terms of the writing and whatnot because they’re not written by people who’ve written multiple books. They’re written by people who are maybe not even really writers in the first place, who just want to travel for the summer and get sort of paid for it.

So it’s something that we as professional writers wouldn’t have the opportunity to write for and we probably wouldn’t want to write for them anyway okay. So that’s why I’ve got them xed out on here so yeah, a lot of people said that they went to Europe, with them. So yeah, that’s the thing is that the other…the companies on here they also tend to have certain areas where they excel. So, for instance, you know, definitely we would say Rick Steves, is great for Europe, I think everybody tries to be great for Europe.

But Lonely Planet you really know for Southeast Asia, and a lot of that is because they were originally started in Australia, by two really lovely folks. I know the female founder. It was a couple that founded it originally and two really lovely folks who just worked really hard to build what’s now a great big empire that’s unfortunately owned by somebody else, but they were really known for their South Asia coverage whereas, Rough Guides I would say we don’t really think of them as being known for a certain area exactly.

But I tend to use Rough Guides for Europe, because I find what they cover to be better for there. With Moon has done a really good job of setting itself up in Central America, and also with a lot of the U.S., and Hawaii, and Alaska, as well. So a couple guidebook companies that I’m not gonna go into now on our deep dive besides Eyewitness and Let’s Go which I xed out here are some that are more specialized and I’ll explain why.

So Grant, if you don’t know it it’s one which is really kind of out of Europe, and if you’re based in the U.S., it will be a bit harder to work with. A lot of these other ones even though they’re based somewhere else and might be paying across borders they’ll be accustomed to working with writers in the U.S., and making those transactions happen or in Canada, for those of you that are in Canada. So Footprint is also a smaller one and they’re one where a lot more of their stuff tends to be done both in-house and done in what you might think of as a roundup fashion.

So you may or may not have seen it but there’s a lot of guidebooks out there that I would term as round up guidebooks. And so what I mean by that is they’re like the 10 top things to see in New York, and they outline an attraction kind of over two pages and they also tell you where to eat nearby and maybe where to stay nearby. So there’s a lot like that that are kind of slim and they tend to be oriented around cities that are almost like a roundup in book fashion. And people like them because they’re very pocket-sized and they’re very specifically tailored so that they don’t have to wade through all this information.

So another couple that we’re gonna leave out because they’re quite specific are Michelin which are done mostly in-house. And Insight is kind of similar to both Footprint and Eyewitness in terms of having a lot of stuff that’s quite formulaic and also kind of regurgitating a lot of older information. And then Rick Steves is a bit like Frommer’s and Fodor’s that we’re gonna talk about but they also tend to have things that are written more by people in-house.

But as I’m talking about Frommer’s and Fodor’s you can also kind of extrapolate those things over to Rick Steves. So let’s dive into it and I’ve got one page for each of these five key ones on here Lonely Planet, Rough Guides, Moon which is by Avalon which is by Hachette and I’ll explain that when we get to it, Frommer’s, and Fodor’s. So if you have questions about a specific company ask those while I’m on that company page before we go on to the next one, okay?

So, I mentioned as we go through you may want to ask me questions specifically about each one and these can be questions about how to work with them. Because you know, like I said this is our first webinar in the series, we’ve got a few other ones that I’m gonna do. And I know a lot more about working with guidebooks than I can tell you just in an hour. So if you have specific questions whether about how to apply or what it’s like to work with one of them let me know. If it’s something that’s best saved for a future call we will do that or otherwise, I’ll let you know here on this one. Now, Lonely Planet like I mentioned used to be owned by a couple who started it in Australia, and they for a long time still had their main office in Australia. Now, they have a big office in the UK, but now their main office is in Nashville. And Lonely Planet internally has become a very, very different place than what you might think of when you go to the bookstore and you see all of their beautiful you know, blue-spined books all lined up in a row.

So the way that Lonely Planet works currently and this is very much from the…directly from the editors who work there and from the mouth of the writers who work there. So this is something that you’re probably not gonna see mentioned online per se and this is why I really wanna share it with you. The way that Lonely Planet works now is not at all what you think of when you think of how a guidebook is put together. So Lonely Planet works off of the pool model which I talked about which is that you apply to be a writer in their pool. They will put this on their website where you can do that. And they have a lot of different things that they’ll assign out to that pool and I’ll talk about those in a minute. But first I wanna talk about how it works today at this moment under the Nashville leadership to put out a guidebook from Lonely Planet.

So they changed hands from the original owners to the BBC for a while. And the BBC just couldn’t figure out what to do with them, they just couldn’t figure out how to make it work. They could… They didn’t have the infrastructure set up for this. They weren’t used to working in print, they weren’t used to working on book-length things. And so what happened was that they sold them at a pretty significant loss. You’ll see it’s basically they lost about half or more of the value of what they paid for it when they sold the company. So essentially for them, Lonely Planet was such a thorn in their side that it was better to get rid of it and lose money now than continue to lose money in the long term.

So what that means is that the company that picked it up picked it up with the eye to run it as an incredibly tight ship, to be incredibly efficient and to grow it back into something that makes money. Now, how is it making money today? A lot of different ways that are not just buying books. So Lonely Planet now partners with destinations to have destinations essentially sponsor or curate the content that shows up on Lonely Planet about that destination which is something that I’m sure a lot of consumers aren’t cognizant of.

However, the way that information goes into the Lonely Planet system in the first place is what’s really raised a lot of eyebrows with the Lonely Planet writers’ pool who are a very vocal bunch. So what’s happened is that once upon a time it used to be that a Lonely Planet book that was large would be written by several different writers. And one of those writers would be known as the lead writer or the editor. And they would essentially be the person who wasn’t necessarily editing the book in terms of doing copy edits or editing like a book editor would edit. But they were in charge of the cohesiveness for the book, they were in charge of getting everybody’s stuff together and making sure that it all worked.

And what happened recently was that they changed it that that editor is no longer a writer on the book. It’s actually even weirder than that that they have people in their pool who can choose to be the lead “writer” or the editor on a book about a place that they’re not writing the entries on.

And that works because today in this day and age in this moment when Lonely Planet writers are writing things they aren’t setting them up in book chapters like they used to. They are updating the attraction that they’re visiting or they’re putting new attractions in essentially a CMS, so a WordPress like interface that connects to the Lonely Planet website. And then this lead writer or editor selects from there the things that will be included in that chapter in the book.

So this is really weird because you as the writer don’t even have say about what is actually gonna appear in the book, how those things fit together or anything like that. So Joe’s mentioned that he met recently a Lonely Planet editor on a press trip and they said that they’ve essentially been told to stop taking any new writers into the pool. This is something that happens kind of you know, on and off all the time that Lonely Planet has its doors kind of closed temporarily or open. So that happens every couple months so I wouldn’t take that as a permanent thing that’s happening.

But as I was saying the writers who are writing whatever it is, whatever they’re updating it goes in this content management system and then it’s selected by somebody else. It’s selected in terms of how it’s gonna appear on the website. It’s select in terms of what’s gonna go in the print book. It’s selected on what is gonna appear not on the website in the section that’s more like travel guides, but also what might be connected together to put together a roundup article that appears on the Lonely Planet website. So there’s a lot of different ways that your writing right now today for Lonely Planet may or may not get used. So if you’ve heard me talk about rights in the past that means that when you’re writing something for Lonely Planet you’re writing something as work for hire. And you’re selling all rights to it and that they’re able to use it in a lot of different ways. So this means that you’re kind of getting the worst end of the stick in terms of the content you create here.

Any time you do something as work for hire you need to be really careful that you don’t infringe on that copyright that you’ve now sold when you’re writing about that place in the future. And you all need to make sure if it’s a place that you write about regularly that you’re not infringing up on any other article’s copyright that you have written in the past about this place. So this work for hire arrangement with Lonely Planet is a little bit dicey and there’s no way you can get out of it because that’s how their whole content management system is set up.

Now one of the things though that I mentioned earlier about being in the pool is that the pool does have some advantages because there’s a lot of different things that get assigned to folks in that pool. So this means that you might be doing individual chapters in a book like we talked about. But you could also just be writing an essay pull out so if you guys could kind of bear in mind you’ve probably seen it you might not have really thought about it as a separate thing.

Often in guidebooks, they have these things that might be one page or a half a page which is talking about some sort of cultural phenomenon that happens in a place. Like it might be talking about a tapas crawl in Spain, or you know, the like attending the running of the bulls or it might be talking about mysticism in the Spanish mountains. You might be talking about any sort of things like this. Those essays pull outs in a Lonely Planet book are often sourced from the writer pool not necessarily by the person writing that chapter. And another thing that happens especially and specifically with Lonely Planet but you’ll see it with some of the other ones I’m gonna mention is that there’s a lot of online work to be done that goes directly onto their website.

So the next one that’s kind of a big company that operates in a pool like setting is Rough Guides. And Rough Guides is really interesting in that they have a kind of cool voice, like I said that they’re the one I usually use for traveling to Europe but they’re weird to get into and they’re weird to get into because any of these companies like I said that are big, there’s gonna be a certain amount of gatekeeping like Jeff said just to apply, just to kind of get in the door. But Rough Guides has some really large back doors available that you can scoot right through very easily.

And one of them is their annual writing contest so it’s something that I’ve pulled up on the side so I can drop the link in here for you guys. It’s closed at the moment but it’s something where you…just something you might do with your blog, you might enter to become the person who you know, gets to stay six different weeks in six different cities with a guest or something. The Rough Guide writing contest is something that you might think like, “Well, I’m a professional writer like I don’t really have time to be entering these.” But what happens is this contest is basically a sure fire way to get in front of them.

Now, you get money and they let you start writing for their website right away. But it’s also a way to kind of differentiate yourselves from other people in the writing pool is by going into this contest. Because they’re gonna look at you more closely because they have to look at everyone in the contest. They don’t necessarily have to look at everyone who has applied to write for them so that’s a weird way in. But second to that I’ve actually got it here on the bottom of the slide is that they accept articles just for their website and they pay quite decently for those.

And that’s something that you can just pitch at any moment in time, you can just pitch like you would pitch a magazine, just see what they’re publishing on their website and pitch them something similar to that. And that could also be a nice way to get in front of them to get in the writing pool for the books as well as having that ongoing work of writing for their website. Because while they can be a bit like Lonely Planet in that they’ll assign people in that writing pool articles for their website, the editors are more separate than in Lonely Planet.

So like I was saying with Rough Guides it’s very easy to pitch them for online and that’s something that they have a lot of work going on. And unlike Lonely Planet you don’t need to apply through the same route that you would apply to write for a guidebook to get into that same pool that does the online stuff. Now, what kind of stuff is Rough Guide looking for and how do you start working with them? So if you wanna apply to the pool directly it’s that route that I mentioned which is that you send your CV, a cover letter and some samples. Now, this is the kind of thing like I said where they get a lot of those, how often do they look at them? We don’t know.

Do they look all the time or do they look just for somebody that has a specific bit of experience? It can be a mix but you can essentially think of it in many ways like you’re kind of sending your resume into a black hole. So that’s something to consider which you’re not gonna see with some of the other ones. One other thing that I wanted to mention though is that this is one of those places that I’m trying to remember who said it…that Sharon had said that she had a book and I said this is one to check out because they will take full book proposals for a new book which is something that they’re not specifically commissioning.

So this is really great to know because not everybody does this. Lonely Planet isn’t really super jazzed about doing this. Because they get a lot of random proposals or they used to do this and they got a lot of random proposals that didn’t make any sense. But Rough Guides is willing to do this and this in part because they’re just starting to do something that Moon has been doing really well which is to segment themselves out from doing just those main kind of general interest guides in certain places to things more like hiking and romance and road trips and all those sorts of things.

But it’s important to remember also because Rough Guides is pretty big and because they have this pool model that you can get in with them. They can test you so to say doing an update on a chapter in a book that already exists and then give you more work if they like working with you.

So I keep mentioning Moon so let’s talk about what this Moon thing is here. So I don’t know how many of you guys have heard of this but let me know in the chat box how many of you guys are familiar with the Moon Guidebook Company. So Moon also sometimes goes by the name Avalon. It’s an imprint or kind of a subdivision of Hachette which is…or Hachette which is one of the big five publishing houses here in New York.

So they however have a very, very different model in terms of how they work with writers and it’s different in that they typically work on full book deals and so when I say full book deals you might partner with somebody and that would usually be your choice rather than their choice that you have applied to do it with a partner. But it typically would be that it’s not one of these things where like all of Chile will be done by seven different people. One person will do all of Chile, the whole country. And they do that because they want to have the book have a consistent voice throughout. They want to have the book have a type of consistency that Lonely Planet had that lead writer for but they also have a very strong voice that they impose on all of their writers.

So Lonely Planet has used that consistency by essentially mandating that everybody do something the same way and having somebody check on that. Whereas, Moon is more interested in having your voice come out and this is something that we’re gonna see with Frommer’s as well which we’re gonna look at next.

So this is nice because I mentioned how with some of these companies particularly with Rough Guide and Lonely Planet, you’re gonna have to really bend yourself to their voice, to their style and that can end up taking a lot longer. Or if you’re used to doing that like I have a ghostwriting background, it can not take that long. It depends again on the writer. But if you’re somebody who’s accustomed to writing in your own voice then Moon can be a really great fit.

And like I said they’re doing a lot of these different interesting titles which are not just you know, the guide to New York City, or New York state or the northeastern U.S. But they are “New York Walks” which is just a book on I can’t remember the exact number, I just looked it up for this call. But which is a book just about different walks that you can take around New York City, where it’s the kind of thing you might think of as being an app. Or you might think of having somebody who is walking you through audibly but they’ve made it into a guidebook and it’s really lovely.

And so they’ve been doing quite a few like this which and I’m gonna show you on the next slide some of the things that they’re looking for calls for writers on so you can see more about what I mean for this. But they are especially doing a lot around national parks and hiking areas as well and they also have a number of road trip ones. I think they had one that was like road trips in the south of France, or road trips in Tuscany, and different things like this.

So, if you have an area that you’re familiar with and you have that sort of predilection for outdoorsy things or road trips then Avalon Moon might be a really great place for you even if they already have somebody who’s written the Tuscany book. That person might not be up for writing the next one which would be the Tuscany road trip one, right. They might not have the time or they might not you know, have the experience doing that and that’s a good place for you to jump in even if they already have somebody who’s done something like this.

Now, something to know about Moon is that they have a pretty strong expectation that you will do the next version of the book, that you’ll do the update. But they factor that into their contract in a really interesting way which is that they’ll give you a lump sum but they also expect that you’ll earn more through royalties on your future books.

So what royalties mean is that when a publisher gives you a lump sum which is called an advance. That’s essentially it’s called an advance because it’s an advance against future earnings. So royalties are a specific portion of the sale of each book that goes back to the writer. And this can really depend by company to company with as well as guidebook publishers but all companies. But don’t think of it as being very much like a dollar or less per book, okay.

So what happens is that you get an advance, you can negotiate a little bit about what the royalty is gonna be. It’s a little harder if you’re new writer but if you have some really fantastic experience you can. So you get an advance and then what happens is every book that’s sold counts against that advance. So the amount of royalty that you would earn goes against that in advance and at a certain amount you’re said to have paid out your advance. So you’ve earned enough that you have covered the company’s investment in paying you the advance and then you start to get paid the royalties after that.

So I have some friends that do very handsomely on their royalties from their books every year like quite surprisingly so. So this is one of the other advantages of having books is it’s not just that you get paid when the book comes out. But if it’s a good book and it’s on a popular area and the company markets it well then you can end up having royalties as well. But just as a check in the mail that comes every year or monthly or however your particular company does it.

Now, I mentioned this earlier and something about Moon that’s good to know is that they have a quite involved process for getting you attached to a book in the first place. But they do that to weed people out and a lot of people do get weeded out very quickly. And so what that means is that if you can make it through that process you will likely be the one who gets the book. So the process begins as it does with Rough Guide with a resume, cover letter and clips and then if they like you then you hop on the phone and then they have you do a serious proposal. So I wanna tell you also what goes into that “serious proposal” because like I said it’s rather involved.

So, it’s got 10 different sections so you start by writing an introduction which isn’t necessarily the full-length introduction of a book, it’s just gonna be one page. But it’s an overview of the destination’s personality and character and it should have a sense of place, okay. So then you have your author credentials and then you have a competitive analysis. So this is where you look at other books that are already in the market and explain why your book would be different than those.

Now, this is a really great thing to do always and I recommend anybody who tells me they’re working on a self-published book do this. And it really helps you as the writer for then when you go to work on the book know what you need to do. Then you give a detailed outline of the contents of the whole book and so this should show how each region will be covered and how much time you plan to spend on it. And the proposed content should be similar to what they have in other books that they’ve already done. So you can really just kinda look at what they’ve done in the past and think about how you would break your destination out in that way.

And then they have you write the description and the highlights for the different regions that you would cover. So you see it’s getting into a lot of work then you also have to do five sample profiles on different types of thing, one on an attraction, two on restaurants and two on hotels. And it keeps going. Then you have to do a section on how you’re gonna market and promote your book. And then you have to do just a short bit on how you will physically get the work done, how long you think you’ll need to do it. The number of types of photographs that would be included and where they would come from.

If you plan to take photographs you need to include the photographs that you will do as well. And then you also just find a map and use that to show them kind of what are the geographic divisions that you would plan to break the book out into. So it’s a very proper book proposal but you don’t do it right out of the gate.

Remember when I was talking about Rough Guides, let’s go back for a second. I said that Rough Guides if you want to propose a brand new book that they don’t already have you have to do a proposal right away. But with Moon, you only show your proposal after you’ve applied more or less and gotten on the phone and they like you. So they don’t tend to ask a lot of people to do proposals. Lisa has a good question that I wanna answer about royalties which is that if you don’t get enough royalties do you get to pay it back? And the answer’s no and the royalties keep going as you do future versions of the book so those will kind of add up over time to go against your advance.

So I mentioned that I wanted to show you some of the things that Moon is looking for and they’ve got quite a few listed right now. And I mentioned that Moon has kind of made a name for itself with Central America, and also basically the Americas generally. So right now they’re looking for authors for more than a dozen different books so they’ve got something on the Oregon Trail road trip. They’ve got something on New Orleans, and Maui, San Francisco, great cities here that so you might be familiar with. But then they’ve also got Costa Rica, and Panama, and Oaxaca, and Argentina, Andalusia, and Montenegro, and Crete, and Hong Kong, and South Africa, and, of course, Bali and Lombok. The typical kind of Lonely Planet book they’re getting in on that with a new book as well.

So you can see from this list that Moon is doing well. They are adding a lot of books. They are commissioning writers to do full rewrites of a lot of books. And I’m gonna talk to you about their frequency of rewrites and updates and how that works as well at the end of the call. Penny, “I can’t write this fast. Do you have a slide with this list for the proposal?” I got the ingredients for the proposal from the Moon website and I will drop that link in here as well. This is just from the Moon acquisitions page.

So Frommer’s also works pretty exclusively in whole book deals for the same reason that Moon does which is that they want to have that consistency of voice. Now, there’s a while where they stopped publishing books because now they’ve really turned into a media company. They’ve got a very robust website, they’ve got a radio show. Pauline and Arthur are out there really doing a lot of stuff. They do television as well. And so they went for a little bit away from publishing new books but they’ve gone back and they have 2018 editions on a lot of things. Because they do books that need to be updated every year for some of their big destinations like New York, and Italy, and things like that.

So that means that they do often need new writers when their writers for a specific place have burnt out so to say. But they are quite strict about wanting you to write about a place that you live and if you don’t live there now you better go there every year and be there for maybe six months a year. And part of that like I said is because they tend to do these whole book deals.

But something odd about Frommer’s is that they are 100% opaque about how to work with them. There’s absolutely no contact or application listed on their website. Which is really weird because even the companies that you know, might not take a lot of people just from the cold applications have something online about how to work with them. Now, I know that Pauline does look for people for books. I spoke to her about this over the summer so I know that it’s not they’re not commissioning people. But I think they’re just a little hard to get in order to make sure that they don’t have to spend so much time going through these things.

So if you’re interested in doing a book for them I would really recommend checking out what books they have that you would be a good fit for. And sending a really strong e-mail regarding your qualifications through their normal contact form and that will bubble up with her or you could find her e-mail address online as well. Now, Fodor’s has a very sketchy application page. I wanted to show it to you guys but we’re a little bit short on time but let me pull it up in the background while I’m talking to you.

So Fodor’s like I said has a very, very sketchy application page. It looks like actually at another company that some of you guys might be familiar with. But it looks like a company that’s saying, “Here’s how to travel the world for free and earn money doing it and not work at all and just kind of be on vacation.” So it really doesn’t look like it has anything to do with Fodor’s whatsoever, there’s no Fodor’s branding on here. It says it’s IBP Publishing and it doesn’t say anything about Fodor’s on here, it just says internet brands. So I saw this and I was like, “Wow,” like I wonder if they think that this is gonna make people not apply. Because then they have this other page which very clearly is Fodor’s and they say, ” Welcome, Fodor’s writers, please only fill out this application if you’re currently a writer for Fodor’s. If you’re interested in becoming a contributor fill out this page here.”

So like what Joe said about Lonely Planet, Fodor’s already has a pool and they definitely have a preference for working with people who are already with their pool. Now, I have to tell you I really don’t know that many people who work for them and I think a lot of it is because they tend to have a very tight-knit writers pool. For the same reason that I told you I wasn’t gonna mention some companies like working with Footprints, and Insight and Eyewitness and things like that. Because they tend to do a lot of it in-house or work with the same writer that they’ve worked with for a long time or not introduce a lot of updates into their books. Because they’re quite historic, not historic but include a lot of history.

So one thing to know is if you are interested in applying they have that application, it’s very easy to fill in online. But they have a preference that you know multiple cities. They want people who can work on more than one book. Like I said they wanna have you in their pool and have you do a lot of books for them. And they also want you to have two or more years of professional writing experience already that’s shown on your resume.

So how do you start? Do you pick the company that sounds like the best fit for you voice wise? Do you apply for all of them? Do you just apply for Moon because I said that one’s the best? The thing to remember like I said is that you have to figure out what’s going to be the best use of your time in terms of actually getting that work done whether it’s the writing side or the research side. And we’re gonna talk a lot more about that in the next two calls. But I want you also to remember that with some companies you’re able to work on more than one book and some companies don’t care if you work with other companies.

So it’s not the end of the world to just apply for one and sit there and just wait and see if they get back to you, you can apply for all of them and see what works for you. You can work with one for a little bit and then you can dump and go to another one. I have to say even though I’ve been kind of panning Lonely Planet, I know people who’ve worked for them for like 15 years or maybe more. And they just do book after book after book after book for Lonely Planet.

I know people who have jobs that pay them a lot of money doing copywriting, doing…in a non-travel way and they still do these books for Lonely Planet because they’re able to make it worth their time. So the really key thing here is to remember that guidebooks can be worth your time if you plan it accordingly. They can be just as lucrative as other types of writing. You just have to get in and part of that like I said is just sticking it out. And Moon is a really great place to do that because even though their application process seems really involved, they do that in order to make sure that the people who get to the end of it are actually gonna write great full books for them and meet their deadlines. So some terms we’ll look out for. I mentioned updates are different so a book that is really big for a company might be updated every year. Like I mentioned Frommer’s updates their New York, and their Italy, every year. And some books will be updated maybe every three years, maybe every four years and some of this has to do with budget constraints. So this is something that when you’re working with a company is worth knowing how far in the future will they expect you to work on an update because you need to plan your life around that.

So I talked quite a bit about advances already but the thing that I wanna add there is to make sure to check whether your travel expenses are part of your advance or not. And this is very common and it creates a weird situation where you have a lump sum of money that as the editors say has been done based on the cost of living in different places. And that’s meant to be both your pay and your living expenses in the destination while you’re working on the guidebook. So some people say this sucks and some people say it means that you just stay in really horrible places and eat Ramen. But I think that depends again on how you’re gonna spend your time and how you are going to get the work done, if you’re gonna do the writing when you’re there. Or if you’re gonna just do the research and then do the writing when you get home and what your personal standard of living in order to get your work done is will also inform what type of hotels you stay in or if you get an apartment rather than a hotel.

So we talked a bit about royalties as well and one other thing that I just want to point out to look out for is when a company has a non-compete. If that non-compete keeps you from just writing for other guidebook companies or if it also keeps you from writing for other publications. So something like Lonely Planet which also has a magazine and a website might have a non-compete that you can negotiate around about whether you can write about that destination for competing publications or competing websites.

So that’s what I’ve got for you today. Have a great weekend guys.

Article Nuts and Bolts: How to Put Together a Diary Piece Transcript

Download (PDF, 274KB)

So let’s go ahead and dive in. We’re continuing our article “Nuts and Bolts Series” that we started actually in February. The diary piece is a very interesting type of article. It’s something that you know, inherent in the nature of the diary aspect of it. It’s something that we all theoretically can write, that we all theoretically know how to write. And perhaps some of you…but definitely some people that I coach or some other writers that I’ve met are in the situation where they came into writing in a more travel article setting later in life.

Perhaps they didn’t do any writing, maybe they’re photographers, or maybe they just traveled a lot. And then by virtue of the machinations of the world, they started writing travel articles, and people are like “Wow, you’re so great at writing these articles,” and the person says, “Well, I have no idea what I’m doing.”

So that often means that you started out with a great diary-style piece because this is something that’s very natural to write. You’re talking about your own experience and what you did. However, because they’re so easy to write, and because so many people are writing them, perhaps on blogs or on Facebook these days tends to kind of replace the old live journal model of keeping a diary for your friends when you’re traveling, because so many people write them.

There’s also a lot of them out there that are not the quality of what a magazine or a high-level website is looking for. So there’s a different bar that you need to clear, even if you’re writing the same type of piece, and that is what we’re gonna focus on today.

So specifically, what I wanna look at is when I say diary piece, what does that mean? How does that differ from what you might imagine or from an actual diary? And how does that differ from perhaps what people are writing on blog posts, or even perhaps what people are writing in magazines that you might think looks kind of like I went here, I did this, and I did this. But actually isn’t what I mean when I say diary-style piece, for what we’re gonna look at today.

And then I’m gonna show you some examples. Before we get into the examples of the right thing to do, I’m gonna show you some examples of the wrong things to do, because it’s not always fun. And I’ve made sure that there is no attributions, so you will not know what I’m showing you when I show you the wrong thing to do. But it’s one of those things like I said in the email, in the blog post before today’s webinar. Usually you know it when you see it, it’s often a little harder to know what’s the right thing to do.

But I’m just gonna show you one example of not a publishable diary-style piece, before we get into the real world examples of what people are out there getting paid hundreds and hundreds of dollars to write. So after that, we’re gonna take a minute to talk about where to pitch these pieces, what types of outlets they go in, and what you need to say and do, and how you need to position a piece if you wanna write one.

Now I’m gonna mention earlier on the call, what are the different types of publications or outlets that you can publish these pieces in. 

So as I mentioned we all are no doubt familiar with the dear diary, today this boy looked at me, and I have been looking at him for months, and I just could not believe that finally, he looked in my direction, type of diary right? We’re all familiar with that, whether in a…you know, actually done it ourselves, or you know, we’ve seen in movies, we’re all familiar with that concept.

Even though today, in a lot of ways I feel like the concept of the diary is kind of becoming extinct as people tend to live more publicly online. But we all know this idea which is that it’s a somewhat chronological and I say somewhat because people typically start their diary entries with something that they’re thinking about, something that’s on their mind, and then they talk about that thing. So it’s a somewhat chronological relaying of events that have happened, right?

So I have a good friend who I spend a lot of time traveling with. We used to live in Italy together, and she writes these really, really long diary entries. I’ve never seen them. I’ve never asked actually. But she writes these really, really long diary entries, and I remember when we first moved back to the U.S. together, we were in a hotel somewhere and I said, “How come you’re not writing on your diary? You’re just going to bed.” And she said, “Oh well, I’m here like there’s nothing interesting happening.”

So one thing that we often think of as a diary entry, is that you might be writing it only when there’s something interesting happening. That’s one version of what a diary is. Or you might be writing a diary every day just to capture your thoughts. There’s a lot of different concepts of what people think of when they think of diary. So why would any magazine editor be interested in your thoughts? Why would any magazine editor be interested in a step-by-step play-by-play of what you did that day? Or even just the step-by-step play-by-play of the interesting days in your life. Why would that appeal to them? You guys might have some idea, or you might not know honestly why editors are interested in that.

But the thing is that these pieces are so easy to write that the more important thing then why would an editor ever be interested in that, is to think why would an editor be interested in that from me, about this topic? And when we’ve talked in the last few webinars in this series, we’ve looked so far in the last four weeks at postcard pieces. We’ve looked at guides features, which are where you give a lot of information about a few different topics perhaps in one place, or in a larger area. We’ve looked at a basket of kittens feature, where you take one theme or one topic, and you find 3, 5, 15, 105 different things that all revolve around that topic.

And we’ve also looked at a quest piece where you take a trip that you’ve been on, or a trip that you’re going to go on, and you attach an objective to it. I want to wind my way across the Aegean like Odysseus did on his way home from Troy. I want to find the best pizza in New York’s Little Italy, and your journey centers around that one thing.

So all of these are different types of feature style articles, but I kept the diary piece for last for an important reason. Because in a certain way, many of the things that we’ve looked at this month, and many of the different types of articles that you see in magazine, could in a way be something that one, a person might write in their diary, right? A quest piece is certainly something that a person might write in their diary. A postcard which is kind of like an atmospheric, short, descriptive piece that gives a sense of place of a destination. That’s something that some people write in their diary. They kind of make these verbal sketches or like written sketches about things, right?

So when we talk about a diary piece in terms of the kind of things that you’re gonna see in magazines and websites, what I’m really talking about is a piece which you might think of as a trip report. So somebody has gone somewhere, and in this piece they’re essentially relaying what they found, what they did, what they saw, maybe what they ate, in a way that has a sort of recording home aspect to it.

So it kind of feels like you’re writing an email to a friend, or perhaps you have gone on a scouting trip for your wedding, or for something that might be happening for work, an event. And you’re just writing back this very factual description of what you did, what you saw, and maybe what you thought of it. And the thing is that concept that I just said, a very factual description of what you did and what you saw, is really what we’re going for here by and large.

And so one way to think of that is that it’s almost like a guidebook in narrative form. So I know guidebooks are a little bit less commonly used now, folks tend to use blogs more so than guidebooks in terms of giving themselves destination guides. But how many of you guys have used…let me know in the chat box. How many of you guys have in some point in your life, used an actual physical guidebook to guide yourself around a destination?

When I first started traveling a lot I used to go to the bookstore a couple nights a week, or maybe like you know, two, three months before my trip, and I would just camp out in the guidebook section. I would just kind of read through different sections in all of them and figure out not just which guidebook had the most information about where wanted to go. For instance, one time I was going to Northern Spain, and only one of the five different guidebook companies that I looked at even covered the city that I decided I wanted to go to.

But I would read them all and try to figure out which voice was the type of traveler that I felt like for that trip. Which spoke to me? You know, if I was going India was it gonna be the person who’s going to a lot of parties? Probably not. Was it gonna be the person who wanted to go to every single temple and museum? Probably not. But here’s somebody who’s you know, here’s a guidebook writer, a guidebook voice that’s kind of interested in food, gives you a good historical background of things, you know, has not too inexpensive but not too expensive places to stay. And I was like aha, this is the guidebook for me.

So these diary pieces function in a similar way. We can sometimes look at a guidebook and just think of it as the textbook rather than the guidebook. As in you know, it educates you, it has you know, an index, it has what you need to know to get around. However, a better way of thinking of guidebooks and in turn this slightly more narrative version of a guidebook which is the diary-style piece, is that they have a voice. They have a voice. They have a slant. They have a personality. But that shows through very slightly.

It shows through in choices. It shows through occasionally in little you know, commentary in the words. It shows through in the type of history and the amount of history that they choose to include. But by and large the writing is very factual. It’s very to the point, and it’s very reportive. Now this…what I just said reportive, is one of the big differences between the diary-style pieces that don’t fly for print, and the diary-style pieces that do.

So tell me in the chat box if you…besides what I just said about being reportive. If you were to think about a diary-style piece in the way that I’ve just explained. So somebody has gone somewhere who’s blog posts can also be reportive, right? Somebody’s gone somewhere. You know, they’ve done this turtle walk on the beach. They’ve done a sailing trip. You know, they’ve done a clam bake, and now they’re writing up that trip report. What are gonna be the differences? Let me know in the chat box you think between that piece on a blog post, and that piece in a print out of like a newspaper.

Marilyn has chimed in with, “A blog entry would be much more informal wouldn’t it?” And I find that choice of words really interesting, right? Much more informal. And I think that’s definitely one way to think of what we commonly conceptualize as diary, right? You’re either speaking to yourself, or perhaps you have a certain thing that you think of when you write your diary. Like you know, maybe you’re writing it to a person, or maybe you think that you’re gonna give to your future yourself or something like that, right. But that concept as a diary is quite private.

And I feel like when people write on their blogs even though of course, you’re writing for a public audience, I think a lot of folks have this idea that they’re just writing to one reader, the reader that they know very well. And so it does inherently feel…if not casual then more familiar I think would be great way to think of that. Yeah, and informal can also come into play perhaps with this concept of being reportive that I talk about.

So Kirsten’s got another one, “Maybe a blog piece is more personal and a print piece is more universal.” And Lisa said, “A blog post might be more personal and biased.” I think that’s a really interesting point that Lisa said about being biased. And you know, with travel more so than with other types of journalism, and I have to check which Lisa this is, if she’s… no, so I don’t know this Lisa’s background.

So with travel more so than with other types of journalism, I find that the pieces tend to apparently be a bit more biased, because the writer is showing their opinion of the destination. And that’s a lot more important to the sense of the destination perhaps than in other pieces where other types of journalism where having you know, such a lack of bias that you wouldn’t even take with a bottle of water from the place you’re visiting because that would be viewed as bias.

The line is more towards personal or biased in travel writing, because that’s what allows you to understand a place. How that place relates to the person who is writing about it. But Kirsten had this point about being personal versus universal. And for those of you that joined us for the last couple of webinars that we’ve done about features, having something that is both personal and universal is actually a really an important and inherent part of something like the quest piece that we looked at last time.

So I think the diary pieces have a lot of these characteristics. They do seem personal, but they should touch on universal. They might seem to have some bias because it’s the person talking about their specific trip, but they only have their own eyes, their own experiences from which they could possibly look at the trip that they’ve been on.

So as we talk about these diary pieces, have lots of different types of types of trips. They could be quest pieces. They could be where you’re city hopping. There’s all sorts of different formats that some things feel like they fall into this diary piece, whether it’s a different type of itinerary or a different type of piece. But what happens really is that diary style pieces, I find these different things that we talk about whether it’s personality versus bias or informal, universal, those things can vary a little bit with the type of outlet that they’re on.

But what really separates a diary-style piece from, you know, print publication versus a blog, I think is a lot of what might be called puff, or fluff, or filler is a good way to look at it. So there’s a really excellent slide that I’ve asked so many different people, and no one has quite been able to find. Which is from the Travel Blog Exchange Conference maybe five or six years ago. And it was by Robert Reid, and he took a diary-style piece from a major newspaper, and a diary-style piece from a blog, and he put them up on the screen next to each other.

And he highlighted different types of writing. He highlighted descriptive writing. He highlighted historical background information. He highlighted quotations. He highlighted action. And there was one more thing that he highlighted, it was talking in the first-person. And he had them side-by-side and you could see that the piece that was a blog, had so many sentences that started I this, I that, I this. I that. And the other piece had a lot of what you think of as reporting.

And I’ve pulled up for you…and like I said, I cut off where this is from, and the text is a little small, so hopefully you won’t be able to type it out and Google it. But I wanted to read a little bit for you from this, which is from blog, and then we’ll go back and talk about how this plays out in the different outlets. But this piece begins…and this is actually really diary-style in terms of it says day one, day two, day three. And I just took two paragraphs from it, and I don’t know that we actually need both paragraphs. But here’s an example of more of the blog style.

“I’ve just arrived in Paraguay.” No comma by the way. “I’m already really experiencing the culture! I’ve hailed a cab after I got off my plane, and while the radio was on, I got to listen to some authentic Paraguayan music. Luis Alberto del Parana was the one singing, I found out from the driver. He was a singer in the 50s, and is now a national musical icon in Paraguay because he was the most famous musician to originate from here. It was pretty interesting to find out. I did some research later and also found that he had played with The Beatles and The Rolling Stones on stage before! One of his albums sold 30 million copies, so he was a pretty big artist back in the day. I hadn’t known that Paraguay ever produced any musicians.

However, when the driver switched the station, I was surprised to hear ethnic Latin music on the radio! I had assumed that the popular music in Paraguay would consist mainly of English pop songs and only a few occasional Spanish songs. In countries like France, Germany, and Spain, the music is often mostly North American. It was very refreshing to see that not every country played the same music as the next.

However, the pop genre is still prevalent in Paraguay, just like in the rest of the world. Spain has put its own spin on it, however. Pop can sound very different in Spanish than in English. Some Latin musicians that are popular in Paraguay include Enrique Iglesias.” This is even too small for me to read. “Alkilados, Ivan Zavala and Los Verduleros. However, as far as I know, there weren’t any famous Paraguayan born musicians other than Luis Alberto del Parana. It was a little disappointing to learn.”

So this is one of those things like I said with the quote about pornography from the Supreme Court justice, where you know when you see it. But what are those things that allow us to know when we see it? But this is more of that informal if you wanna call it that, casual blog-style piece. A couple things, so sentences was like, “It was pretty interesting to find out. It was a little disappointing to learn.” These are things that I occasionally see in people’s pitches, just the short versions like “This was very interesting, or I thought this was very interesting.” Those creep into pitches even.

And these are the type of sentences that make editors…editors in this case…I mean of national magazines, national newspapers say, “I don’t care if you think it’s interesting. Show me that it’s interesting. I want to say that it’s interesting. I don’t want you to tell me that it’s interesting.” So in this case, we can see that the author here did include some research, but as they discuss the research…like I mentioned from this excellent slide from Robert’s Reid’s keynoted all of presenting that research seems to have started with I.

So they hailed a cab. We never really need to know that you hailed a cab. We never really need to know that you walked out of your door. We never really need to know that you sat down at the cafe. Those are not pertinent things in a diary-style piece that’s occurring in print, okay. And she’s saying, “Luis Alberto del Parana was the one singing. I found that from the driver.” So this is passive, right? Why can’t she say the driver said, or the driver explained, right? It’s couched as her. And then she goes on saying, “He was a singer in the 50s now a national icon. It was pretty interesting to find out. ”

“I did some research later, and also found out.” We don’t need to know when she did the research this is another thing that when you’re writing diary-style pieces the time needs to transpose. So you will be writing things in your diary-style pieces with a research that you did later, a research that you did before you got there. But things that explain cultural concepts or the history of the destination, without you needing to tell us when or how, of the circumstances of which you found out that information.

So we see this happening again lower down. The author was surprised to hear this. The author had assumed that the popular music, and then she has a sentence that’s not assuming right. “In countries like France, Germany and Spain, the music is often mostly North American.” Now even though we’re looking at a diary-style piece, right, where it does matter you know, what we think or what happens to you, a sentence like this should be qualified somehow.

So either like we don’t know how much time this person has spent in France, Germany, or in Spain, what authority they have to say that, right? So you know, as it continues the writer says some Latin musicians that are popular in Paraguay include blah, blah, blah, blah, blah. According to who? Where did that come from? So one of the things that you notice in this piece, is that in this more blog-style diary pieces, there’s a big question of authority on a lot of the facts that are transmitted. But you really don’t know where the person heard this information, if this information is reliable.

And so that’s really a big piece here that separates the type of diary-style pieces you would see in these publications. I’ll go through each one in its own time. But is that authority. that reported facts, that sense that the information contained within the piece has some kind of weight on the outside world, and is not purely opinion. So when there are things that are opinion, they should be used sparingly, and they should be used to a fact, okay?

So these are the four main different settings in which you are gonna see a diary-style piece today. Now they used to be a lot more prevalent in print settings before blogs. And then what happened was there was less need for editors to pay people to write first-person, non-narrative, non-quest, not highly reported pieces, because there were so many of them out there already. So there wasn’t so much of a need for them to publish them.

But what happened was…I’m sure you guys have felt it. People get round up fatigue. People don’t just want to have information thrown at them in an entirely third-person setting. People like the first-person voice. They like to follow along someone else’s trip. And not every trip can be a quest, not every trip can be a Don Georgian [SP] personal essay. Not every trip can be a beautiful story-structured feature with a transformational moment at the end where you have an epiphany about life. Not every story ends up being like that, and not every writer wants to write those.

But editors still need trip reports from all sorts of places in the world, and they’re happy to pay for them, and this is where. So newspaper travel sections. We’re gonna look at a few of these in a little bit. Actually because these are one of the really great places still today to find these type of articles. And I know that people often think…and I think part of this is because we tend to look at newspapers online. I know people often tend to read clickbaity type of things.

So I have the “Dallas Morning News” up, and let me pop over to there, we’ll leave the slides for one second. And what you’re seeing is that if you just look of the homepage, if you look at what they have loaded up there, there is definitely this sense that there is a lot of…Oh no we lost the ability to switch to the next screen. I’m just gonna jump in.

Oh-oh guys, all right so I’ll tell you what I see in “Dallas Morning News” while I try to get this functionality back. I’m sorry, were having some trouble with this slides today on the web platform. Okay great here we go.

So what you go to whether it’s “Dallas Morning News” “HuffPo” or even bbc.com, which we’re gonna look at later, is that on the homepage, like when you first look there tend to be these things that seem very clickbaity. They really seem to be like those you know, typical headlines that are 17 ways to do this, or very servicy oriented things. You know, like blah, blah to do with your dog, that kind of thing. And the reason for that is that the metrix the folks are tracking do tend to be you know, what gets the most clicks, okay great, let’s put that on the homepage, and we’ll just keep looking at that.

But what happens…I’m so sorry. It’s still not showing up. But what happens is that they’re publishing a lot more content than that. And that content is still being found in search. That content is still going out in their newspaper, and also in their newsletters to subscribers. And that’s the type of content that I know that you’re all more interested in writing, rather than this. I don’t know why they’ve got such a horridly lit photo on the homepage of dallasmorningnews.com’s travel section, but “What Are Your Pet Peeves When It Comes To Hotels?” As in your pet peeves about your pets.

I know this is not what we all aspire to write, and a lot of people come and tell me everyone is only publishing this, this, and that. But I can tell you because I look at physical copies of these stuff all the time, that this is not what is in the print issue. Okay this is very different than what you see the print issue.

So we can see here we’ve got some very newsy pieces. “Book this swanky cottage.” so that’s basically like they went on Airbnb and they found something interesting, and they wrote a story about it. This one is just probably a] “This storied Aspen Hotel is a Dallas favorite and now it’s expanding.” We got “Southwest plans to open four more flights.” We’ve got very, very straight news. “Five tortured bodies in Cancun,” quite serious, and it takes us quite a while again news, news, advice, flying style. Where is the actual destination content, right? You gotta go way far down before you get that.

We’ve already gone…let’s see this is the style section. This is the tab. We’ve gone two folds and we don’t see that. And so it’s very easy to think that outside of service that these pieces aren’t out there. But the thing is that nothing could be farther from the truth, because what you’re seeing on there is what they are publishing, they’re highlighting, on their website.

And it’s been really great to see how many sections in newspapers are super easy to pitch, that writers just don’t know about because you don’t really see them on the newspapers websites, so they’re not easy to find. They’re often highlighted in the newsletters. They go to newsletters subscribers, but they are not gonna be right there on the homepage.

And so what that means is that being newspaper travel sections…and like I said, we’re gonna look at some of the diary-style pieces in newspaper travel sections in a bit. There’s tons of opportunities for these first-person diary-style pieces because if you are picking up the print version, you’re much more interested in spending some time reading some stories, rather than getting quick tips. Or hearing about Texas’s power outlet and how that’s gonna affect your flight. You would read about that online. But when you pick up the print version, you’re looking to follow some sort of narrative. You’re looking to follow someone else’s story.

And newspapers come out way more than magazine guys. Newspapers come up 52 times a year with the exception of one or two weekly magazines. There’s no magazine opportunities out there for you to come out that frequently. So if you get in with a newspaper editor, even if they’re paying you know, 30 or 50 cents a word rather than a dollar a word, you still got four times the opportunity to get published with that editor. So your bang for the buck in terms of the making that relationship is huge.

Now I just wanna say a little sidebar about how many newspaper travel sections are out there because we’ve really done a lot of digging into this lately. So there’s about five U.S. newspapers, pardon me, that have dedicated travel editors, dedicated travel sections. And those “The New York Times” of course, “The Washington Post” does some travel but also “The Wall Street Journal,” and “The San Francisco Chronicle” actually there’s two different travel editors. And “The L.A Times” not only has a travel editor, but they also have staff travel writer.

“The Dallas Morning News” has somebody who edits travel in a couple different sections. And “The Chicago Tribune” does publish some travel, but it’s pretty much entirely comes out of press releases, and off the wire, and out of syndication, and some things like that. So there’s really those main five, but you will still see travel pieces in “The Denver Post,” in the newspaper I’m going to nominate “The Newspaper of Sonoma.” I’ve picked up newspapers in Sarasota Florida, they had some coverage.

So don’t discount the newspapers that are city newspapers and you know, tier two or tier three cities, or even a smaller areas than that, because those can be really nice places to put diary-style pieces. And the next question of course, is what do they pay? Because this is always a question for newspapers. And the national newspapers that I was talking about, those do typically pay 50 cents a word and up.

But these small newspapers they might not pay so well, but there’s a great thing here in terms of getting more bang for your buck for trip. Which is that these diary-style pieces are so easy to write and when you have a clip from a trip that really displays a lot of what you’ve done on that trip, that gets placed in the newspaper, that’s really great for you to show the next time that you’re looking at going on a press trip somewhere.

PR people really value newspaper clips, and so it gives you a really nice in to say “Well you know, I’m not sure I made a business trip yet, but I’ve written for this newspaper before.” That really is a good way to get yourself on press trips if that’s something you’re interested in.

So let’s look now…taking away from newspapers for a second, let’s talk about the type of websites that are publishing these more diary-style pieces. Now, obviously we talked before about blogs, and we talked about those in different types of pieces and what we’re looking at today. But there are several editorial outlets…and I say editorial outlets rather than just websites, because these are really magazines…or sorry yeah, essentially they’re really magazines that take place online. And so “BBC Travel” is a really great example.

There’s one websites but I have several you have written for which are called “GoNOMAD.” They also take these diary-style pieces, but they only pay $0.25 a word, they have some of the full piece on spec. So please, please, please, do not leave this webinar and go pitch your diary-style piece to “GoNOMAD.” Because you can pitch to “BBC Travel” and get paid 10 times as much, actually more than 10 times as much.

So “BBC Travel” is one of these, “Huffington Post” can take these, but you may have heard “Huffington Post” pays some people but not all people. So if you’re just looking for the cred from having published on “Huffington Post,” you can do that, but I wouldn’t necessarily recommend it. Because besides “BBC Travel” which everybody knows it publishes really a lot of stuff there’s also things like CNN.

There are magazine websites that are also publishing these types of things. “SAVEUR “and “AFAR” which are the two magazines that I know a lot of you guys love, they both publish diary-style pieces on their website as well. And that’s actually a place where they like to put things that are of that nature that they like. They like the trip, and they like the writing of the author, but they can’t just can’t figure out exactly what to do with those pieces in their print magazine.

So these diary-style pieces like I said, with newspapers you’re gonna be getting about 50 cents a word, on editorial websites there’s probably gonna be a flat fee and it’s gonna be somewhere between say like $250 and $400 if you’re doing it on a good website. If you’re doing it on a smaller website that’s not gonna be like BBC level, you should still be looking at minimum, minimum, minimum, minimum $150.

Don’t give away a diary-style piece which is talking about your entire trip for less than that, okay? Because once you have written that piece and you’ve covered all those different things from your trip, you’re cutting yourself off from a lot of other different options, in terms of where you can publish that content. So don’t take that first to a small place because what you’re doing is you’re just depriving yourself of income, writing about that same trip for somewhere that would pay you better either for one small slice of it or for a whole diary-style piece, okay?

So another one I put in here I think this is gonna probably be a surprise for a lot of you. So how many of you guys…let me know in the chat box, and I won’t pause for this, but please do let me know. How many of you guys have heard of trade publications, have heard me talk about trade publications, have some sense of what trade publications are, and what they do? Because this is actually one of the coolest and easiest places to put diary-style pieces is in trade publications.

So trade publications are magazines that you can’t buy on the newsstand. They aren’t handed out, but they are distributed on a limited circulation basis, for people who work in a particular industry. So in the case of travel, those can be travel agents, they can be people who book travel in a corporate setting, they can be people who plan conferences, they can be…we have really interesting weird ones like people who are…it’s like hotel interior design and things like that.

So there’s a lot of trade magazines out there, but there’s some that that are less specific and they’re more for everybody in the travel industry with all sorts of different jobs. And “Travel Weekly” which is also available online, but “Travel Weekly” is a good example of that. And these trade publication do tons, just tons of diary-style pieces. Because what’s happening is that these trade publications are for people or work in the industry, obviously they’re traveling a bit themselves, but they can’t be everywhere, they get everywhere.

And they wanna know what’s going on in a certain destination. It’s new but they might be thinking about going to. So they just wanna hear what it’s like. They wanna essentially the Trip Advisor slash Yelp version of it, but from a repeatable source. From somebody who works in the industry. They want it to be recorded. They wanna know that it’s reliable information. But what they really want is a trip report from a vetted source, okay?

And so what happens is that “Travel Weekly,” and other trade publications like this, are often sending…and when I say sending I really do mean they will put you on a plane. They will pay for your ticket, and they will send you there. Someone that I coached went to Maldives the other day. Sometimes though they’re working with International Visitors Bureau or the Tourism Board to send you there, but they are often sending you. It’s not like with the “The New York Times” where you have to get there on your own dime and you have to assume your expenses.

So these trade publications they’re sending you places to check it out and then do the trip report for their audience, of other people who work in the travel industry with what you saw, what you did, and what you thought. And these are some slam-dunk easiest, fastest, diary-style pieces to write, and it’s really lovely because the trade magazines don’t compete with consumers.

So you can write that diary-style piece for a trade publication and then turn around and sell a slightly different version of it to the trade publication or chop that trip up and lots of different pieces and sell it out. And you’re not conflicting with the story that you already wrote.

Now, I mentioned, when we were talking editorial websites, I mentioned the magazines that have websites that are publishing this type of stuff. And you will also however occasionally see diary-style pieces in print magazines. And it seems so weird that somebody would get paid $3,000 to go stay in a villa in Tuscany for a week, and see what it’s like to stay in a villa and get to paid $3,000 that and all their expenses, but it happens.

And it happens for the same reason that I was talking about that you see with the people writing for the trade magazine, which is what they are travelers who just wanna know what something is like. Maybe they’re considering going there. Maybe they are just armchair travelers who wanna stay home and hear about what it’s like. But they want to know first and they want to know…not from Yelp and not from Trip Advisor, and they don’t have any friends down there, and they wanna know from a trusted source. And that’s why you’re still gonna see diary-style features out there even in the highest level of print magazines, okay?

Again, a good way to remember the bad version of these pieces is that it would be the email that you write home to your close friends and family, that now might be that post that you’d put on Facebook for everyone to see. But the good version is going to have reporting. What it isn’t gonna issue though is that sense of I went here. I did this. I did that, but the writing will be better. Not every sentence is gonna start with I. Not every single thing on that trip is gonna be included, but a lot of it will. And there’s gonna be more reporting.

Now something that reporting will come in the guise of actual dialogue and quotes from people who were met along the way of the trip. And sometimes that reporting will come in the form of data. But they tend to follow a structure that you’ll find very familiar whether you’ve been following our other webinars on features and we’ve done on quest pieces and things like that. Or you just heard about the three paragraph essay when you were in school. Which is that they do tend…but not always…but they do tend to have what I call the three key stops and then the rest.

And so what happens is that the pieces often begin with the author getting reporting very quickly saying where they went and why. How did they end up there. And sometimes that has to do with something that the place is known for. So it’s not gonna be a quest piece where they’re specifically looking for the best Chilaquiles in Phoenix Arizona. I’m in Phoenix right now so that was all off the top of my head.

But they might mention I came to Phoenix looking for the best south of the border food north of the border, but then the whole piece isn’t gonna be about that. But they’re just explaining to you why I had the idea to come here. And it’s often pegged to something that the location is known for. And then when they start giving you background on the location this what makes it different than a quest piece. Is the background that they’re giving you isn’t gonna be just about Chilaquiles or green chilies or whatever the case might be.

The background is gonna be more general background on the city, in terms of who lives there now, the history. What type of background they give tends to depend quite heavily on the audience of the publication at hand.

Now, like I said the three key stop sections is not a must. It’s not always there. It makes them much better diary piece when you do that little kind of intro, you give some information of a place, and you talk more in depth, a little more expansion about some of the stops that you went on, to paint more of a picture of the place. Before you get into the more laundry list of all the things that you did slash that are available to do there.

And if any of you were with us for the webinar that we did previously which was on the guide style piece, what I said in that webinar was that you tend to have paragraphs which might list of many as 8 or 12 different things that we can do in one place per paragraph. And that is what starts to happen after the two key stops here. Especially when you’re reading a newspaper pieces these are quite long, and that’s one of the reasons that getting 50 cents a word can be great. Because a magazine space is a huge, huge premium. Magazine pages are small. They’ve got about half the pages are ads and half the pages are content.

But in newspapers, there’s a lot more space for text. I was skimming through with someone who writes for the database for us, and we were figuring out how to start putting newspaper in the database. We were looking, and there was just like 3,000 words of article there. So if you’re getting paid 50 cents a word for your diary piece, that’s 1,500 bucks a pop and you get to write those you know, even if it’s only like every eight or 10 issues, that’s a pretty nice take home that you’re getting from that newspaper. And part of what fills in that space is this mini round-up of the extra things.

So for instance, I was just at a conference in the Washington State’s wine country, and I went on a post-trip which is more around beer and cider and types of different kinds of drinks. But we did stop at some wineries, and so for that round-up style piece I couldn’t include all sorts of different wineries that they have and what they’re known for, and the different grapes that grown things and like that. It really has a bit of a laundry list element to it.

And then something that you’ll see to these diary-style pieces is that they typically have some kind of resolution after that laundry list. But it usually feels a bit weak, and that’s because they haven’t set up an arc to the story. There’s no conflict like we talked about last week with the quest pieces. So let’s take a look at some of these. So I’m gonna have to switch the slides here, so we’re gonna look at the “Dallas Morning News,” and let me see if I can get this up, an issue for you, there we go.

So these is “Dude Ranch, Fishing And More: Colorado Is A Great Outdoor Getaway.” So I’m gonna pop this in the chat box, you guys can open it along with me if you’re interested. So you can tell from the title that this is a real general piece, right? They don’t even talk about a specific part of Colorado, and it’s not even just about Dude ranches, so how does it start?

“For a midsummer trip last year, my partner and I wanted to experience something both “outdoorsy” and “out West.” So that’s why right? That’s the why they got to do this, okay? Why Colorado? “At the top of our list of activities were horseback riding, fly fishing and river rafting, and we found all we yearned for in west-central Colorado.”

Now, I know a lot of you are saying “Wow this paragraph does not blow my mind like how is this so different than a blog post?” So then we get in the part where you start to see more of the reporting aspect of it.

“The trip started at a unique spot called the Smith Fork Ranch. Nestled on 350 acres in the fabled West Elk Mountains of the Gunnison National Forest, Smith Fork has been a working dude ranch since the 1930s.”

Now these are things that I wouldn’t always see…these are the kinds of things that when you write for print, you just have to spend maybe like 30 minutes on that paragraph looking up all these things to make sure you get the names right. So he’s got you know, everything capitalized, everything correct titles, exact number of acres. He didn’t say why the mountain were fabled, but I guess kind of sense of these West out mountains, in the national forest and how long he’s been working at Dude Ranch.

“When Marley and Linda Hodgson purchased the ranch in 2000, the old log cabins that served as the principal lodging and dining structures were in serious disrepair. Instead of tearing down and building new, the Hodgsons decided to carefully rebuild the ranch, log by log, keeping it pretty much the way it was.”

So you’ll see here that this does not start with I even though it’s about the writer, and the writer’s partner. This does not start with I, even though it is the top their list of activities. The writer could have said, we found or we yearned for from our list of activities, but they started at the top. So you’ll see that this is one of the key differences, there’s not a lot of I as the focus here, even if I is the subject of the sentence.

And as we get into the background of the place we’ve seen it goes right into reported information. So let’s go down and see what are their examples. So they talk more about the reconstruction the preservation and more…you know could almost PRA information, but more description of the ranch. This is something that you see a lot in these diary-style pieces where it almost seems like there’s more description of each element. And that’s what I told you way back in the beginning of the call, to think of this as something more like a guidebook in kind of narrative form, right?

They’re giving really a lot of information here about not just the lodge itself, but also the family who created the well-known Ghurka Bag line of luggage. So they continue on talking about what’s special about the ranch. And then if you keep scrolling past these ads that don’t display because I have an ad blocker we’re gonna get to the last of the text. Sorry, I’m not sure you can see text. Now I have this time to open this and waiting for you guys for a while because it doesn’t like that I have too many browser windows open. Let’s see if we can get the rest of this. Then I can go over to a different piece. But I really wanted to show you guys this thing. Let’s give it one more try. Okay, I’m gonna just flip over and show you this in a different browser. Sorry, I can’t go to a different browser because I’m doing webinar in. But let me just try one more time guys.

So someone asked if “The Dallas Morning News” will be in the database soon. Holy shit, if you would like to send us a copy then we’ll add it very soon. But until I can get physical copies that’s really the hold up for us in terms of adding any newspapers to the database. So if any of you guys have a newspaper that you would like us to include in the database, you need to have two or three weeks of physical copies. So that’s why it takes us a little while to get the new papers going, because it’s hard to collect physical copies from places that you don’t have somebody based.

So all right, so here were back, okay great. So as I said, there were four whole paragraphs of description about the ranch. And then finally, we get into more of this what I did content. So this is when I was saying how newspapers have a lot of expansive space, that’s often filled with this description and background of the different places.

So the author says, “I spent my mornings waking as the sun first peeked through the dew-covered scrub oak trees.” Is this flowery writing? No, he’s giving description about what it looks like. So it’s observations. It’s facts. “Hiking to one of the many ponds or small rivers on the property and casting for brown and rainbow trout. After this relaxing morning ritual, I’d join my partner for a steaming pre-breakfast coffee and muffin on our porch, as the sun burned off the morning chill. During the day, we’d hit the arena to work on our horsemanship or join some of the other guests on trail rides throughout the property.”

Now you’ll notice something curious here, in the little bit of detail where he’s talking about the type of trout and the trees, a lot of these stuff is pretty vague, right? He doesn’t say where the coffee was roasted, he says some other guests, he doesn’t give them names and the occupations of the other guests. He says “The resort also offers skeet shooting, mountain biking, hiking and breathtaking views of Needle Rock a majestic volcanic pinnacle that sits atop to the property.”

So these paragraphs where he talks about what he did the writer himself, there’s not such reported detail here. And that goes back to what I was saying is that the I, the specific things that this writer did, are not the focus here. So what is?

“Meals are a highlight at Smith Fork Ranch, and the resort prides itself on using locally grown organic foods whenever possible. Nearby North Fork Valley, once rife with fruit orchards, has evolved in recent years into Colorado’s ‘bread basket,’ with ‘organic’ being the operative word. The resort’s creative and eclectic young chef also oversees a large organic garden on the property and designs his menu around what is fresh and in season.

The resort complements its homegrown cuisine with a wide selection of locally produced wines. Vintner-entrepreneurs (and some adventurous souls looking for a quieter life) are using the region’s rich soil and sunshine to produce delicious pinot noirs, pinot gris and other varietals and blends.”

So this was another interjection, right? He talked a little bit about what he did, but then he went back and expanded more about the details of his stay.

“After our stay at Smith Fork Ranch, we decided to change it up a bit and mix a little fly fishing with rafting at nearby Gunnison River Farms.” So you noticed it seemed like in the beginning this piece was gonna be just be all about that one specific place that he’s stayed. However, now they’re somewhere else. And this is one of these things about this diary-style features that I said right up front, there’s no objective, and there’s no clear connection between the places that are being mentioned. And that’s okay, that’s how these pieces work, they don’t necessarily have a thread except that this is what the writer did, okay? So the writer continues.

“The resort is tucked into an old fruit orchard on the banks of the Gunnison River with cathedral-like canyon walls as a backdrop. Here, you can fly fish right in front of your private cabin or join a guide for single or multi-day float-fishing trips through legendary Black Canyon Gorge. Fishing or not, rafting this gorge was one of the most magical and beautiful experiences of our entire trip.”

So you’ll see here’s like an opinion and as I mentioned, opinions in these type of pieces tend to fall flat, so you need to sprinkle them very sparingly. The writer continues.

“Our guide, Ben Magtutu, grew up in the region fishing with his father, who was one of the first guides to take guests down Black Canyon Gorge. Magtutu has a wealth of local knowledge. He also teaches high school science; so, in addition to mastering our fly-fishing technique, we learned pretty much everything about the gorge, from hydrology to geology.

After visiting Gunnison River Farms, we stepped up our rafting game and took a weeklong trip down the mighty Colorado River … sans guide! This may sound a bit insane, but the Ruby Canyon stretch of the Colorado is not only amazing and breathtaking, it’s also rather calm (class I-II rapids, maximum). The many campsites along this 25-mile stretch of the river are situated at the mouths of long canyons that stretch inland and provide amazing hikes up to breathtaking vistas.”

Now this one of those things where you’re like, well this is a little vague, inland amazing hikes, but then the author gives you something specific, okay.

“One of these memorable hikes, Rattlesnake Canyon, ascends to a ridge where there are nine towering, windswept sandstone arches. Bring plenty of water and avoid the middle of the day — it can get mighty hot out there.

After all this outdoor action, we settled into the state’s capital city, Denver, which is experiencing a renaissance of chic new bars, restaurants and hotels. We stayed at the recently opened Maven Hotel, located in the ‘Dairy Block.’ Once home to the Windsor Dairy company, this ultra-hip new mini-district is in the heart of Denver’s fashionable “LoDo,” or Lower Downtown, area

The Maven is right across from the city’s big-league baseball park, and as it just happened to be the Fourth of July, we not only caught a game but also got to enjoy an awesome post-game fireworks display while resting in the cool grass of the baseball diamond.”

And here’s that sentence like I said, it doesn’t quite have the same weight as a lot these features because there’s not an arc. So the writer ends, “Not a bad ending to an epic summer holiday.” So there’s that little bit of resolution but it doesn’t really have that transformation, that epiphany type moment. So just going back up a little bit you’ll see where we got out of our three things.

So we began with the lodge, talking about the lodge itself, and then the writer doing fly fishing there at the lodge, and then the meals at the ranch. And then we started to get more vague, right? So we talked a little more about this fishing with the guide and then suddenly, they’re on the Colorado River. And then suddenly there’s hiking, and then suddenly they are in Denver, then there’s this hotel and then there’s a baseball game. And that’s where it starts to get like it’s really coming pretty fast, and here is maybe a sentence or less per item.

So that’s the trajectory that diary-style pieces take. And I’ll just drop a couple more in the chat box for you. Let me see if it follows me when I switch tabs, there we go. So I’ll just drop of a couple in the chat box for you so you can see some of these other ones. So you can map out the same trajectory that I talked about in all of these pieces. Where they begin very quickly, very directly why is the writer there? What is the writer telling you about?

And then they get right into these three slightly more fleshed out examples on what they did on their trip. And then they start dropping in that round-up style bit where they are just here and then they’re there and then they’re there. And you don’t necessarily know how they got them from here to there, but there’s just names, and there’s museums, and there’s attractions, and then there’s hikes, and then there’s hotels. That’s how these pieces end.

So speaking of endings, I know we’re already over time, so we let me get back to slides, and we’re gonna talk about pitching. So any question about pitching that you guys have been holding on to very graciously because I asked you to hold on to them, now it’s time to pull those up. Because I’m gonna talk about pitching and like I said, there’s a bit of a delay. So this is the time for you to mention your pitching question to the chat box, see if I can weave them in a slide about pitching.

But here’s some examples and like I said, in the chat box other diary-style pieces that you can take a gander at after the call, and you will see that same structure that we talked about. And those sentences where when the writer writes about him or herself, you feel like air go out of the piece a little bit. You can feel it because of the juxtaposition between with the description and talking about a place and the place being subject. And then suddenly being, “I went here, I went here, I did this.”

But the writer is saying I did this, and I did that, is what causes some action to move the piece along. Because if it was just all the background about that ranch then we would just start to feel like it was marketing copy at some point. It would just feel like we were reading the website of the ranch. So the connective tissues of the trip is, “I went here. I did this.” But the muscle, what really does the work is those descriptions of the different places.

So let me just take this question, a question from Kirsten. So when pitching editors do we actually say to them I’m pitching a diary piece or a quest piece whatever, or are these terms for narrative feature styles that you’re using to help explain them to us, but to an editor we’d actually say, “I’m pitching a first-person narrative feature etc.” You might wanna check out our…we’ve got a replay of our webinar on how to craft travel article features coming I think quite a bit later this month. But we’ve also got the “How To Craft Travel Feature Webinar,” in the webinar library, and I’ll pull up that one for you.

So in the pitch of any kind, you usually say, “I’m pitching an article for your blah, blah, blah section.” And blah, blah, blah can be your journal section, your where to go next section, your…like the local section. But you wanna use whatever is the name of the section that the editor uses. Because editors have been trained differently on it all, and they all have different definitions of things. Whether it’s something from one publication to the next. So like one publication of journal review a teacher section. One publication will have journal be its front of book section.

So even outside of the types of terms that I’m using, editors have competing terms for different things. So when you talk to an editor and when you talk to anybody that you’re trying to sell anything to quite honestly, you wanna use the same things that they say. So here is that webinar that I had just mentioned that talks about how to craft a pitch itself. So when you’re pitching these pieces specifically…that was more of a general question. When you’re pitching these pieces specifically…I’ll tell you the truth, editors are really spooked by writers that they don’t know very well these days and for very good reason.

A lot of writers these days are very flaky. They’ll take on a piece, and then they won’t turn them in. I’ve noticed a lot of editors these days giving new-to-them writers very, very short deadlines, and that’s either because they’re only taking a chance on this writer because the person who originally had the article flaked, or they’re giving you a short deadline to see if you actually pull it off, and if you don’t then they’re gonna assign it to someone else.

So there’s a lot of mistrust on the part of editors these days, and that’s because the people who are out there pitching are not those of you who are super diligent and willing to put time to make sure everything is perfect. Which is why I want you guys all to be pitching more. But what that means is that the diary-style piece which really depends a lot on the quality of the writing and how interesting the trip was, is gonna be a hard sell to start with.

You do not wanna pitch a diary-style piece to an editor that you’ve never worked with before unless there is a section in that person’s publication whether it’s a newspaper, or online or in a magazine that’s really specifically for diary-style pieces and you have a cool destination. You have a cool reason why you are the one who should write this piece.

Maybe you’ve gone somewhere that’s really hard to get to or you’ve gone somewhere that you have a personal connection to. Otherwise, it’s hard to sell these first out the gate to an editor you haven’t worked with previously. But the beautiful upside of that…like I said there’s a lot of need for these pieces especially in newspapers. And newspapers will take these if you haven’t worked with them before because it’s what they publish.

So this is more when I say they can be really a hard sell the first time if they don’t have a dedicated section, that’s more for places like magazines and especially those trade publications, okay? But newspapers and websites like BBC. this is what they publish, so they’re very used to getting pitches for these types of pieces. So when you’re working with an editor that you’ve worked with a lot, the great upside of is they are really happy to have you take on a diary-style piece, because they know you. They trust you. They know that they know that they approve of your writing. They approve of your judgment. And that you’re not just gonna write something that comes back and they’re like “There’s just too many things in here that aren’t interesting to our audience.” Right?

Remember what I said that part at the end which is around up that curation of it. It’s like when I was talking about guidebooks before. It comes from the voice. It comes from the discretion and the judgment of that writer whose voice you trust. So if you don’t have that relationship yet with an editor they can be skittish to assign it with you. But once you do have that relationship they’ll give you a ton of them. And that’s why trade magazines are really great, because once they know you they’re really happy to give you tons of those destination pieces.

Now the flipside with newspapers though…remember I said newspapers are used to these. Like they’re assign them to you first time out, more of you in fact should be pitching newspapers because they’re so easy to get into, because not so many people are pitching them these days. A lot of them do still pay quite reasonably compared to what you’re getting paid for small magazines and websites.

However, you cannot pitch a diary-style piece from a press trip to a newspaper. And it doesn’t matter whether they have a press or policy or not, it is more because if they do not know you, and you’re pitching a piece that’s based on a press trip, they can just smell it from your writing. They can just tell from the itinerary all the press trips that are running. So that when writers send them pitches especially when they start seeing like 20 writers sending them pitches at the same time or whatever, or there are many people on the trip, they know that those are all coming from that same press trip. And that those aren’t necessarily ideas that the writer had because they were great, because that place was interesting but it’s because it was included on the press trip.

So if you have gone on a press trip and you are pitching a diary-style piece, you need to be pitching not just around the itinerary, but you need to be really pitching around the sense of place that you discovered, perhaps if you did a day before or a day after a trip. So Spud Hilton who is the Editor at “The San Francisco Chronicle” said “He’ll take a pitch. He’ll take a piece that you wrote that’s from a fam trip, but he shouldn’t be able to tell from reading your pitch that it’s from a fam trip.” And this is another one of those things like that Supreme Court justice pornography quote. You might say, “How can he tell?” But he knows it when he sees it.

So I’m gonna leave you guys with that.

So Kirsten had one question she said she just wanted to make sure whether or not we should use the actual terms diary requests. “Yes, I’d always refer to the magazine section, which would also tell the editor what style narrative pieces. So maybe my question is that.”

And yeah, that’s really the thing is that I teach you how to write in these articles “Nuts and Bolts Series,” different types of articles, more so that you can see how to do a piece once you get an assignment in terms of the structure, but you have to lay out on top of that structure the specific things that the specific magazine that you’re working with does, and every magazine is different. So these structures that I teach you, we look at examples so you can see how it works in real life. But that structure is the important part. That’s what you build on top of using the voice of the magazine, using the style of the magazine, but it all starts with that structure.

So thank you guys so much for joining us, and I hope you have a great rest of your week, and for those of you who are gonna be at the Women Travel Summit, I’m arriving tomorrow and I will see you guys soon.

Article Nuts and Bolts: How to Put Together a Guide Feature Transcript

Download (PDF, 246KB)

Right now, we are gonna talk about how to put together a guide feature, and I’m gonna tell you in a lot of detail what I mean by that. But, first and foremost, what I wanted to talk about for a second is this “Article Nuts and Bolts” series that we’re doing, and why we have embarked upon in the first place. One of the really big reasons that I’m talking about how to write different types of features or different types of articles, we’re talking about different type of features at the moment, but one of the main reasons that we’re talking about this is so that you feel confident pitching articles that you’ve never written before.

And this is really important because in the Travel Magazine Database, you’ve got 500 magazines that are looking for travel articles. And often, they are looking for upwards of 10 or more different articles from freelancers every month. So that means there’s like 5,000 different opportunities on a monthly or sometimes bi-monthly basis to be published. But what I see happen a lot is that people who have been writing on the web, on their own blogs or for other places, doing content marketing, or maybe you’re writing your own job. Before I was a freelance writer, I was a professional writer, but in a university setting. I ghostwrote for the chairman and the president of MIT and I did internal communications, and also outward-facing things. So I was a writer, but not for magazines. I don’t have any journalism background. I just have a literature background, and Italian literature at that. So I basically didn’t even go to college in English.

So it’s very easy to feel like you are not qualified to write the types of pieces that you might see in magazines or in the Travel Magazine Database and think, “Oh, I totally have an idea for that.” So that’s why we’re doing this series is to show that you can do it, that you do know, that it follows a structure that’s repeatable, and that you don’t need to think past that, that you don’t need to gather more information. You don’t need to know everything under the sun about a topic. In fact, that can actually be really detrimental to your writing process because if you gather too much information, it becomes hard to know what should go into your article.

And I’m saying that today in particular because…hold on one sec, someone’s saying that they couldn’t hear me. So I’m saying that in particular today because these guide features that we’re gonna talk about are kind of the height of this concept. You might feel, on the superficial level, that you can definitely tell, you know, a friend over email or your aunt who’s going to your favorite city for the first time, what to do in a place, but writing it for a magazine is inherently very, very different. And you can either then feel like, “Well, I don’t know how to do it for a magazine. I can’t do it,” or, “This is just like what I would already write, and that’s easy.” But it is different, but it’s not hard. You just need to know what the format is today.

And for guide features, one of the most important things about that that we’re gonna talk about today is how to view these guide features differently than in other pieces of writing that you might do, than other city guide or guide type things in other parts of the magazine, and other things of that variety that you’ve done online. Because people talk about often how print is dead, and hopefully those of you who’ve been listening to me, I know there are some of you who are just joining us for the first time, but hopefully if you’ve read any of our stuff, you’ve seen that magazine aren’t dead. There’s new magazines opening. Every time I check out the airline magazines, there’s like three new ones. I can’t believe that they are just blowing up. There are so many magazines and newspapers even.

Print is not dead, but print is having to change or focus or narrow or be more abrupt and obvious about what makes it different than what people are writing online. And as that happens, things like city guides, which are ubiquitous online, you find them on airline websites, you find them on credit card websites, you find them on people’s blogs. This is a type of article that in print needs to just reek of journalism, it needs to reek of authority, it needs to just put off an undeniable scent that this is worth your time to read it here, that the things that we are telling you are “the” things. They are absolutely what you should do in that place, and it’s a hard thing to do.

How many of you guys…let me know in the chat box, how many of you guys have read a “New York Times 36 Hours” piece about a city that you know? I’m not gonna look at a “New York Times: 36 Hours” piece today in our webinar, but I just wanna talk about this concept for a second because I think it’s a type of article that a lot of you guys are familiar with.

So a friend of mine who’s a very avid traveler, let’s call her an AFAR-type traveler. She’s a doctor, her husband’s a professor, they have a good amount of money, they are both from other countries, they are not from the U.S. but they live in the U.S. and they are very avid travelers, they like experiential things, they are not afraid to go out the beaten path. She used to always tell me…well, Carol, hold on, you might not wanna read them after I tell you. She used to always tell me, “Oh, I went to this place. It’s so cool. I read about it ‘The New York Times: 36 Hours.’” She would always tell me she had done blah, blah, blah because she read about it in “The New York Times: 36 Hours.”

And so for a little while, my husband and I, even though we both, you know, have lived in lots of countries, avid travelers, I work in travel, he travels a lot for work, even though we are very, you know, skilled travelers and researchers in our own right, we started using these “New York Times: 36 Hours” when we traveled as well. But I found something really interesting about them. They are useful for folks like us who travel a lot, who want to know that new thing that you can only get in this city that’s really cool or want to know where to get the best third wave coffee or the best farm-to-table food or something like that in this city.

But they are absolutely not for the first-time visitor to a place. Which meant that if I was going to a city and I actually wanted to see the things that made that place that place, that gave it a sense of place, you know, for instance, Chicago, you really have to go to the Cloud Bean. It’s this just amazing thing to photograph, which is in a park and you stand under it and your reflection all these different ways. You just have to go there, like it would be sad to visit Chicago and not do that. “The New York Times: 36 Hours” won’t mention that, they won’t. They’ll tell you the things to do as if you’ve gone there a thousand times, and that’s really not for everyone.

But I mention this for two reasons, because that is the type of city guide that the people that “New York Times” editors think are reading their newspaper are gonna want, okay. So city guides begin, they are pegged inherently, not to the concept of what are the must-dos in a place, but they are pegged very strictly to the concept of what the editors of the magazine think the experience of the travelers who read their magazine will be. This is incredibly important. If you go out there and you pitch a guide feature to easyJet…easyJet is, for those of you who aren’t familiar, a low-cost although increasingly mainstream carrier in Europe that focuses on going to all the cool vacation destinations. So they fly from London to all the beaches, all the islands, all the cool cities everywhere that a cool kind of, you know, urban, experiential, maybe millennial, interested in food-type traveler would want to go to. If you were to write a piece for them about Paris’ like 10 top museums, that wouldn’t fly as a city guide for them. They would wanna know the unique undiscovered museums or the ones where you’re gonna learn something you never realized about Paris because those are the types of things for their readers.

So as we talk today about city guides, we’re gonna look at a couple different formats that city’s guides can take. They can be itinerary-styled pieces. They can be these 10 museum-type pieces. They can be every type of thing that you would ever wanna do in a city pieces. They are inherently service-oriented. Service means telling you how to do, what to do, giving you advice, but they take the narrow slant of what matters specifically or what the editor think matters to the readers of that magazine. Okay, so we’re gonna talk much more about how this plays out, but it’s incredibly important to remember that magazines are not looking for, explicitly not looking for, would be pissed off to have a piece that looks like a city guide that you would see on Mastercard or on Priceline or on WowAir’s website. They are not looking for something that appeals to everyone. They’re explicitly not looking for that, okay. So that’s something that I want you to keep in mind that we’re gonna go through today, okay. And so, we’re gonna look at some of these in practice and we’re also gonna talk about how to pitch these.

With these guide features that I wanna talk about…in the last webinar, I spent a lot of time talking about how to put together a basket of kittens, and I’ve talked a lot about what that meant so check out the other webinar if you’re interested. But I spent a lot of time talking about the positioning of it, about how you choose what is going to go in there. But in this webinar because writing these guide pieces, like I said, is quite different than what you might expect, I’m gonna spend a lot of time looking at the actual words on the page.

So I’ve got an article pulled up that I want to show you because this is the kind of thing where it really, like I said earlier, is different than you might expect is gonna be there, but also that it really is helpful to see how this works out in reality more so than to have me talk about it. So we’re gonna spend more of this webinar looking at the words on the page rather than having me talk to you. But first, I wanna talk about this concept of what makes a guide feature different than a narrative feature. So first and foremost, I’d love to have you guys tell me what you think I mean when I say a narrative feature. I’m gonna explain this a little bit more but there’s like…in Italian we call this [foreign language]. There’s a shade of difference between a guide feature, even that’s in first person, and a narrative feature.

So let me know in the chat box what you think of when you hear me say narrative feature. And Carol, in response to your question, the webinar last week was cancelled and rescheduled to be today, but it is recorded and if you had registered for the webinar then you’ll get an email with the link to check out the recording, which is available to watch for the rest of the day today. So let me know, you guys, in the chat box when I say narrative feature, what does that make you think of? Cool, so these are great answers. So we’ve got, “A narrative is about inspiring people through storytelling.” I love that, and it’s kind of a great overall answer, but in terms of a narrative feature, I like what Catherine said here. She said, “A first or third-person story about someone’s personal experiences.” That’s one way to look at it. We’ve got a first-person point of view versus third person. Somebody said experiential. So Carol says, “A narrative, telling a story about my visit. Guide about how somebody else can go visit.”

So I’m gonna pull over to look at a magazine here for a second so that we can look at what I mean when I say narrative feature. So this is from this month’s EasyJet magazine. Their feature well is called “The Stories.” So this one talks about, “The hottest young pizza chef in Naples is cooking for London’s foodies, what could possibly go wrong?” So we already here have a sense of what the narrative is. We’ve got a chef from Naples, he’s gone to London, something happens. So what that initially sets up for you is that there’s a beginning, a middle, and an end, right. The beginning is there’s a chef from Naples. The middle is that he goes to London and cooks for London’s foodies. And the end is that there was a result, right. They loved it, they hated it, he couldn’t cook in London, he was complaining about the tomatoes and the oven. Something has happened, right.

So inherently we know that this is gonna be a third-person story, right, because the writer is not the chef, but the writer is gonna be talking about the chef. And they begin by talking about pizza, and then they get into the chef, okay. And so, they say, “At 1:00 p.m. there’s already a queue.” So there’s a bit of chronology here. So somebody said timeline, right. So timeline is definitely part of it, but the inherent point of a narrative is that it starts somewhere, there’s some sort of change, and then we end up somewhere different.

So you’ll see this feature here goes on for about, I think we’ve got about eight pages, and it ends, “His immaculately round creations fly out of the oven as gloriously messy as Naples originals, and leave the lucky punters with big smiles and sticky chins. ‘My God, it’s the best pizza I’ve ever had,’ says one,” right. So that’s the end is that he goes from Naples to London, you know, there’s some things that happened in the middle, it’s hard, there’s problems with the oven, what have you. And then in the end, the people in London who are like this, you know, super foodies who, you know, can’t anything anywhere, they’re very picky say, “This is the best the food I’ve ever had.” So that’s the end. So there is a bit of a timeline.

But what’s important here is that it’s not just that somebody has gone somewhere, that it’s first person, that it’s about “a” trip, or “your” trip, or “an” experience, okay. It’s not a description. Narrative inherently means that something has changed from the beginning point to the endpoint, okay. So this is really important to remember. We’re gonna talk more about narrative pieces in some of the future webinars, but it’s really important to remember that with a narrative, there is a transformation, a changed action, a result between the beginning of the piece and the end, okay. Now with these guide features, that does not happen. This is really weird, but also important.

So I wanna go back to what Brit said about storytelling. Narrative is about inspiring people through storytelling, okay. So people tell stories for so many reasons, right. To inform, to entertain, to educate, those are some the main three reasons why people tell stories, right. But guide features don’t do a lot of those things. They inform and they can educate, but they don’t necessarily entertain. There’s not a sense necessarily that you are traveling along with a person, okay. So a guide feature is much more about that inform and educate side. So this is really important to remember because we have a struggle here, which is that we aren’t telling a story, we don’t have a narrative, we don’t necessarily even have action, and that can be boring. So this is the struggle in writing a guide-style feature that you are for a long number of word just educating somebody and it has to keep from having a sense of that it’s Wikipedia or that it’s a lecture or something like that without necessarily incorporating action. So this is the weird in-between place that these guide features operate in.

So first, I wanna give you a short example to look at. So how many of you were with us for the first iteration of the “Article Nuts and Bolts” series? In February, we did an “Article Nuts and Bolts” series the part one, so to say, where we looked at all sorts of different short articles, we looked at how to do news pieces, we looked at how to do front-of-book round-ups, we looked at how to be trend pieces, we looked at how to be business profiles. So let me know in the chat box if you were with us for the first part of the “Article Nuts and Bolts” series because I’m gonna pull up an article that we looked at in one of those webinars because this is also a city guide, but it’s not a city guide feature. Okay? So that’s why I wanna look at this. It’s gonna be a little small. So I’m gonna pop over to my other screen and read it for you.

So the thing with a short city guide is that here you don’t run that same risk that I was just talking about of boring your reader because you’re just educating them for too long. You’re very much getting in and out with the information, it’s very skimmable. You can see even though you can’t read it here that on the side there’s a lot bolding in here, okay. So what it says here on the side, by the way, because I know it’s hard for you guys to read, is that so this is a piece about Mexico City. Like I said, it’s a city guide. And the top part is about shopping. It says, “Buy Mexican,” and then there’s “Eat,” that’s about food, and then there’s “Drink,” and the bottom section is called “Explore a Neighborhood.” And in each of these sections that you see here, all of the things that are bolded are different individual locations that they talk about visiting.

So you can see here in the first one, they talk about four different locations. Here they talk about five different locations. Here they talk about one, two, three, four, five, six locations, seven, eight…four locations down here, right. So they’ve had nearly 20 different locations over here in the sidebar that can’t itself be more than 150 words. So that’s barely 10 words per place that they’re telling you about including the title of the place. That’s super quick. It’s almost like a list in it of itself, but a list in paragraph form, right. So with these front-of-book guides, the power, the usage to the reader of these pieces is that list, is that Rolodex element of it, okay. And that’s totally fine because it’s short. They’re just skimming it. But when we take that same idea, when we take the idea that we’re just giving somebody a Rolodex, but we stretch it over 1,500 words, that’s when things get really tricky, okay.

So I talked about this in the beginning, and I know some of you joined us a little later, but one of the really central struggles of this guide-type piece apart from just keeping people entertained or with you for 1,500 words of Rolodex is to focus. And I talked a lot of it in the beginning about how you have to focus on exactly the type of experiences that speak to the exact type of reader of this publication, but you also have to focus with a lens.

So I mentioned in the beginning, I mentioned “The New York Times: 36 Hours” type pieces, and I know I said that I wasn’t gonna pull one up, but since we talked about it for a while, and some people aren’t familiar with them, I’m just gonna pull one up. So in “The New York Times: 36 Hours” type pieces, they do not cover the basic what to do in a city. They don’t cover that at all. They talk about what’s new, they about things that have just opened, they talk about things that, you know, you might call them hipster-type travel or something like that, but they don’t just talk about the basic things to do, and if they do, it’s always with an angle. So I usually really hate this word, angle, but I think it’s really appropriate in this context.

So I’m gonna flip over this “New York Times: 36 Hours” piece to show you this. So this is “36 Hours in Reykjavik.” This is kind of an older piece. It came out in 2013, so about 5 years back. Now what is the focal point here? What is the angle? They begin, “The major news of Iceland in recent years has not been good. First, a banking collapsed crippled the economy in 2008, and then a year-and-a-half later, the volcanic eruption,” I’m not gonna try to say the name of the volcano, “halted air travel across the Atlantic and Europe, frustrating millions. But signs of an upswing, economic and otherwise, can be spotted in Reykjavik, where this year the capital’s impressive new concert hall won the prestigious Mies van de Rohe award, the European Union’s top prize for contemporary architecture. In other parts of town new restaurants embracing fresh local fare and the bacchanalian nightlife is thumping with crop of new bars and clubs. This winter has been predicted to be a particularly favorable time to observe aurora borealis dancing across the night sky, but already Reyjavik is shining.”

So what’s happened here is that they’ve told you how they’re gonna focus this piece. They’ve given you some time pegs and they’ve given you some background, and you can think about it like they’ve given your reasons why you should go to Reykjavik now, but they’ve also told you what this piece is gonna be about. This piece is gonna be about what they said right here. This idea that, “Reykjavik is shining,” right. They talked about this architectural award, this impressive new concert hall. They’re talking about restaurants embracing fresh local flare, a new crop of bars and clubs. They are going to tell you about what’s new, they’re going to tell you not about the things that already exist, and they are not necessarily gonna tell you every single thing that’s new.

They’re not gonna tell you about a new hotel necessarily unless it falls into this concept of Reykjavik on the rise after these bad things that have happened, right. There was the volcano that halted air travel. There was economic collapse. They are going to show you the vibrancy. They are gonna show the parts of Reykjavik that have a tone of everything is okay, all right. So that’s the scene that they’ve set here. Was there a question? Okay, right. So the scene that they’ve set here is that they’re gonna mention the concert hall, which is a guide book as opposed to guide feature, which is a guide book-type item, right. It’s like a to-do, it’s like one of those landmarks, it’s like going to the Empire State Building, but they’re gonna mention it because it’s symbolic of resurgence in Iceland. So I hope that makes sense.

Let me flip back to the slides now because I’m not gonna look at the “36 Hours” piece in part because it’s not a good example of the guide-type feature. And let me just tell you why for a second, actually. So this “New York Times: 36 Hours” piece is actually…see how it goes through 3:30 p.m., Hallowed Halls, 5:30, Records and Reels, 8:00 p.m., Icelandic Tapas. Each of these portions of the “36 Hours” piece does not do what we saw on that previous slide, right, where they had, you know, “What to See in Mexico City,” and they had seven things. Each of these is a tiny article, almost like a news brief just about one place. And this is actually the type of article that we spoke about in the last webinar. So if you didn’t catch that webinar, like I said, it’s available for free to be the replay for the rest of the day. So I recommend checking out that one, which is called the basket of kittens-type feature.

Okay, so that’s why we’re not gonna look at this “36 Hours” today. We’re gonna look at a different type of…here we go, back to the slides. We’re gonna look at a different type. We’re gonna look at the “Hemispheres” piece, which does more of what I was talking about before, this kind of thing in a feature format, but still with a focus. Okay? Now, that focus is tied to three different elements. I talked about the audience, it has to be tied to what is interesting to that audience. It also has to be tied to the time, to this time peg, right, that’s what we just talked with the “New York Times” piece. But it also tends to have a focus that is more thematic or topical. So if we were to think about that “New York Times” piece that we just looked at, what’s the time bit? The time bit is they kind of looped in a little about the aurora borealis. It talked about this architectural award that it’s won. But they talked about this resurgency post, the recession. So it was really the idea that Reykjavik has moved past a sort of dark time.

But what would be the thematic thing there? The thematic thing there, can you say that new as a thematic thing? In this case, yeah, right, like new here is the theme, as they are only presenting you with new things. What if, however, they were showing you a piece which was about Charleston, and they were talking about they had a time peg about why you should go to Charleston. Perhaps the time peg is that, you know, this new museum has opened, or it’s the anniversary of Fort Sumter or something like that, but the focus is actually about food and they’re showing you all sorts of different food experiences, okay.

So sometimes the time peg becomes the theme as well, but not always. So we are looking at what is interesting to the audience, what is timely, and what ties into the theme. Okay, so those are three focal points of these guide pieces that make them a magazine-worthy guide rather than something that you would see on a website. And part of that, like I said, is that…remember I talked about how the timeliness is one of those big things for a magazine guide. On the web, you don’t want things to expire, you don’t want them to be as timely, you want your piece to be evergreen, you want it to build that SEO juice over years and years and years and continue to be relevant. So on the web the exact opposite is needed. You want things that are more permanent. Whereas in print, they want things that not necessarily are going to be closed tomorrow, but that have an air of “you need to know about this right now” about them. Now, how do we get that?

One of the really important things when you’re writing a guide piece for a magazine or a newspaper, as the case may be, is sources. This is a thing that I see happen a lot when I’m working either with folks in our IdeaFest or Pitchapalooza programs or perhaps in one-on-one coaching is that people tell me, “Well, I don’t know enough about blah.” We, in our recent Freelance Travel Writing Boot Camp, we were working on a pitch together. We were gonna write a pitch, and then write a small piece for a certain section of a certain magazine, and somebody had an idea for that same Mexico City thing that I showed you earlier. Someone had an idea for that section about a certain area, and as he started to work on the pitch he realized he didn’t know enough of those specific things, enough of those things to go in the shopping section or the eating section. He had an idea for the theme, but he didn’t know the individual items to include.

Now, in that case, we were pressed for time so he picked something else, but usually that wouldn’t be a problem, and it wouldn’t be a problem because you can go online and see what other people who are influential or who know the area well think fit. And you can write your piece, your pitch rather. And then once you get the assignment, you call people up and you get that up to the minute information from people who are experts and you write your piece. This is the huge dividing line between writing for your own website and writing for magazines. It’s not just the concept of interviews being necessary, it’s the idea that you are not and should not be the ultimate authority on your topic. Which is weird because you need to show that you are an authority to get the piece assigned, right, but you aren’t and shouldn’t be the ultimate authority, the ultimate arbitrator of what is good or what is good enough about the topic. So let me know if that differentiation doesn’t quite make sense.

But the idea is that you use sources to get authority, and to get a diversity of inputs, and to get information that you wouldn’t have access to because you’re in the place or you’re not in the place all the time, or maybe you haven’t visited for a little bit. Or maybe you just aren’t an expert on music even if you live in a place, like maybe you’re just not a person who goes to clubs or goes to concerts or whatever. So you get that information from someone who knows that really well. And the boon for us as the writer is that not only does getting that information from other people make our pieces better because we get better information, but secretly it saves us tons of time.

There’s this interesting step that I see happen with writers where if you haven’t been writing for magazines when you first start doing interviews, you feel like you need to be on the phone for like half an hour, an hour. If you’re in person, you just wanna ask them everything you possibly can. And then slowly over time, the interviews start getting shorter because you realize what you need to ask to get the information that you need for your piece.

So what happens is that when you do a really, really long interview, you might be collecting all sorts of different information, but it’s not necessarily relevant for the piece at hand. So what I encourage you to do if you’re doing a city guide-type piece is not to talk to one person for an hour, but to talk to seven people for five minutes to get more viewpoints from people who are experts in different things so you have more expertise and you have the distillation of the best advice, the best tip from each of those people. That’s why I said sources, and I said it three times, because you don’t wanna have just one, sometimes your editors will need you to have more than one, but because you want to take advantage of the collected knowledge of the most people. That’s how you save yourself the most time and you get the best information for your pieces, okay.

Now, the next big difference between guides that you might see online and guides that you’ll see in a magazine is the compression. So let me just look back at this one just for a second because it’s so distilled, I just love to show you this. Like I said, there’s like 20 things and barely 150, maybe 170 words over here. It’s so compressed. Now, obviously, in a guide feature, things aren’t going to be as compressed, but there is still an incredible amount of advice for the space at hand, okay. So how does that play out?

Now, in a guide feature, now the one I’m gonna show you is a type of a guide feature where everything is split up by day. So remember I had told you we were gonna look at not the “New York Times: 36 Hours” piece, but we’re gonna look at the “Hemispheres,” which is the United Airways magazine. We’re gonna look at their section, which is called “Three Perfect Days,” and this is a guide-type feature where they are trying to show everything to do in a city using the lens of the author spending three days there, but it’s actually gonna be first person, which is a little unusual, okay, which is why I’m showing you this, but I wanna tell you about some other options, okay.

So with this first-person guide-type piece, you’re going to have a little bit more information than you might in a more third-person reported guide just because the author is telling you how they got from point A to point B, okay. Does that make sense? So it’s gonna be a little bulkier, for a lack of a better word, okay, and they might perhaps include fewer things than you might see and something that’s more of a third-person guide. So I wanna make sure to make that distinction clear. So in this “Three Perfect Days” style piece, however, you’re going to see that there’s three sections, they’re very obvious, they’re the days, but what happens in these more third-person type pieces?

I’m gonna pop over for a second to show you an example. This a very, very weird one, but also very long, and that’s why I wanna show it to you because this is a type of guide piece that happens a lot, but you’re not gonna necessarily pitch it. So I’m gonna talk to you more about how to pitch these front pieces and when you can pitch them and when they need to be assigned in a minute. But I wanna expose you to this type of piece so that you know that it’s out there, and you know how approach it, and you see how it compares to this “Three Perfect Days” piece that we’re gonna go into it a little more in-depth. But I want you to know that this is type of piece that’s usually assigned, and I’m gonna talk more about that difference in a second.

But first, let’s pop over and look at it. So this magazine that we’re gonna look at right now is “easyJet Traveler,” and this is a feature called “The Ten Best Street Food Stalls in Europe,” okay. So it’s a big area that they’re looking at, they’re looking at all of Europe. Now, this has been compiled. See here, they say compiled by four different people, and they say, “We asked 73 top chefs, food bloggers, food writers, bloggers, Instagrammers, and other experts to name their favorite street food spot in town.” Now, what’s really important about this, like I said, it’s compiled. They said they asked all these different people. This is the type of thing that magazine editors in their editorial meetings say. “We wanna do this thing,” and then they say, “Okay, we’re gonna need to do this many countries. We’re gonna need to get in touch with this type of person,” and they split up the list and they say, “Okay, editor one, you do this piece. Editor two, don’t you have that freelancer that lives in blah, blah, blah, that knows really well, blah, blah? Why don’t you give them this batch of the story?”

So stories like this that have a big almost listicle-style roundup tend to be written by a number of people together, okay. So this is not something that you would pitch, but it’s something that you can write, okay. So they’re talking about the 10 best street food stalls and the way that they do it, if you look here, is each one of these, here’s number 10, here’s number 9, each one of these is 1 page about 1 place, and it itself is a roundup. So it’s a roundup composed of roundups, oh my God, how meta, right? So here it’s called “yum bun” and they’ve got all the service information in a roundup style. So they’ve got who, where, what, need to know, and then this recommended by. So there’s different sections that are very clearly delineated. It is not a narrative that goes through. They’ve separated out these different sections. First, they talk about who, then they about where, then they about what. Then there’s another page, which does the same thing: who, where, what, need to know, recommended by. Okay.

So again, I wanted to show you this because it’s out there, because you’ll see these in magazines and you’ll often say, I see people do this all the time, “Oh, I could totally write, let met pitch that.” No, you can’t pitch this, but you can’t get assigned to write this, and you can work on it with an editor, but it’s not something that you would pitch. So when you see a piece like this in a magazine, in the feature well, double-check who it’s written by, and look out for written by four people, or edited by somebody, or compiled by, or with contributions from. That means it’s something that’s been assigned in-house. So, like I said, this is a very common iteration of this guide-style article, but it’s not one that you can write.

So let’s instead pop over…let me go back to the slides for a second. Let’s instead pop over and look at what type of thing you can write, that you would be writing. So remember I talked about how in that street food one we looked, there were 10 different sections, there were 10 different street food stalls that they looked at, and each of them is a type of mini article, okay. They talk about why you need to experience this type of thing, and then they give you details why it’s noteworthy, special features, service information, what you really need to order, what time of day you should go, if it’s hard to get to. So for each thing in the city guide article, they’re gonna tell you each of these things. Now, I’m gonna go back for one second, in this one that we looked at with the street food, they’re really clearly delineated, right. It’s like a mini roundup in here, but that’s not always gonna be the case.

So let’s go back to this piece in “Hemispheres,” okay. It’s not always gonna be the case because some of these guide-style articles are actually masquerading as first-person features. And that is the case with this “Three Perfect Days” in “Hemispheres.” Now, when these guide-style pieces are masquerading as first-person features, how do you know that it’s not a narrative? I know there’s a delay, so I’m just gonna say it for you. But you know because there’s not a beginning, middle, and end, okay. You know because there’s no transformation, there’s no change in the author, you know because there is not a thesis. There’s a theme, but there is not a thesis, okay. All right.

So let’s pop over to the piece that I wanna have us look at. And again, because it is a feature which is very long, we’re gonna look at it more from the perspective of an overview and I’m gonna read you a couple of different pieces, but I’m not gonna read the whole piece and comment on the whole piece, okay. So hopefully everyone is still with me. We are now on “Three Perfect Days in London.” This is from the current issue of “Hemispheres” magazine. So I am gonna be on the PDF scrolling through, so if you have any questions, drop them in the chat box, but I won’t be able to see the chat box for a little bit but I’ll come back to it after I’m done going to the article, all right.

So let’s look at how this plays out. So I talked about how in each section, they’re gonna tell you why you need to do this certain thing, they’re gonna tell you the service information that you need to know, but there’s gonna be like 20 things every days. They’re gonna tell you tons and tons of stuff and cram it in this small space. So as with any type of roundup, we begin with an introduction. Usually one paragraph, it gives you this why now information, a bit of overview, and like that “New York Times” piece, it tells you the theme. So what do they say here? “Every city has its intriguing juxtapositions. London, however, has always been a bit different. There’s always been a mix-and-match quality to the place, but not so much as a city that’s a patchwork of villages.”

So they’re trying to set it up for you that London is a bit different, but what’s the point here really, right? “While Londoners do value their traditions and institutions, they’re also restless, preoccupied with novelty and change. As a result, the city is constantly sticking new bits onto the old, very often without any discernible logic, creating a jumble of styles and sensibilities that could leave visitors feeling utterly confused.” I have to say, this intro is making me feel confused about London and kind of about where this article is going. So then they say, “How do you make sense of the chaos? You don’t. Rather you adopt the organizing principle of the city as a whole. Get out there, give it a go, and see what happens.”

So this is a really weird intro, you guys, right. But that’s the idea, they’re trying to tell you that London is a weird city, and then it’s a jumble. So what we can expect in here is that things will seem a bit random, okay. So what a weird theme is that, right. They’re telling you that their theme as if they don’t have a theme, right. Themes can be so weird in articles, but there’s always one. And I love…I wanted to just pull back up and show you…this image that they used to show it, right. Like I know London and I know the perspective of this image, but it gives you a sense almost that there’s different photos cut together, like here and here, like it looks like there’s a cut line. It’s a photo that encapsulates what they’re saying here. They’ve got the new bridge against the old building, right. You know, they’ve got all sorts of diverse people. They’re trying to show you exactly what the weird thing is that they’re trying to tell you here in the intro. And then they go into something that’s got that idea. It looks old but new at the same time.

And then they go into day one, okay. So the theme for day one is “Skipping and Sipping Around Stylish Soho.” Okay, so even though they don’t have a theme for the whole thing, at least they’re giving us themes for different days. So let’s see what’s the theme for day two. This is a really long piece so you’ll see how it just scrolls for a lot of days. Day two is “Perusing the Posh Shops and Restaurants of Chelsea and Notting Hill.” I’m not gonna scroll down all the way to day three, but you can imagine day three has a similar theme. So they’re theming the days, right.

So let me just go back to the slides for a second. So as I told you, in these roundup pieces, there we go, each thing, each section is going to have its own theme. So in this case, they are days, right, which seems like, “Okay, well, you know, like, it’s a day, l can do any sort of things in a day,” no. In a magazine setting, they’re gonna give that day a theme and they’re only going to include things on that day that fit into that theme. Why? It seems weird. In life, do you have to do that? Do you have to do all the things in Chelsea in one day? No, but they do it for editorial consistency because, like we talked about before, these guide pieces don’t have a story, they don’t have a beginning, middle, and end. It’s really too easy to bore or just lose your reader, so they create these artificial themes, okay. So that’s why each of these days has a theme.

So let’s go back. Let’s go to this day two in Chelsea. So like I said, this is a first-person piece with a sort of narrative, but that’s masquerading, okay. It’s not actually a narrative piece. It’s actually a guide piece. So you’ll see that they start with a strong firs person here, but that’s only to create a little bit of sense of action against the guide setting. I know it’s like a bit meta and it’s a little hard, but that’s one the reasons that people shy away from these pieces because it seems like they don’t know how to put together, but it’s really not that hard. So let’s get into it.

So at the beginning, we get the introduction to why do you care? Why? Right, like it’s a day, why do they have to tell you why you care about what to do on your second day of London? No, they’re telling you why do you care about the theme for the day? So the theme is “posh shops and restaurant of Chelsea and Notting Hill.” And they say, “Forty-odd years ago, not far from where I’m standing now, a rabble of proto-punks started milling around in a tiny boutique run by a designer named Vivian Westwood. The World’s End Shop is still there, its storefront clock spinning backward, but little else remains to remind us that the swanky Kings Road was the birthplace of the Sex Pistols.” So this is a little bit of a lead to introduce you to this area that also ties back to that overarching theme, right, of the old and the new, but things quite not making sense, okay.

Now, they get into what I told you, which is that there’s little bits of something that they describe throughout this day, which is themed, and each of those things then say why that thing is important, some background on that thing, then some service about that thing. So here, they say, “Certainly, there was nothing like Chel-ski back then.” So then they tell us, what is Chel-ski? Why do we care? What do we need to do there? Then they tell us about the Ivy Chelsea Garden. What is Ivy Chelsea Garden? What do we need to do there? Okay, and then it keeps going in that same way with each of these things. Okay, they talk about Saatchi Gallery. What is Saatchi Gallery? What do we need to see there? They talk about the Map House. What is this thing? What do we need to see here? Let’s look at a couple of these to see how he puts this together.

So you’ll see he’s got a pretty clear one paragraph per thing, and in a guide feature that’s very common to have one paragraph per item that you’re talking about. Sometimes they’ll have more than one and sometimes those paragraphs will be shorter, but this is pretty normal. So he says, “Wandering towards Kensington, I come across the Map House, a treasure trove that has counted Winston Churchill and Ernest Shackleton among its customers.” So here’s the what is it and why do we care? Okay, so it’s a shop because they said customers, right. And we care because Winston Churchill shopped here. Okay, then what it is? Tell us more, a little more information. “One wall contains a 19th-century poverty map of London with a color-coded index ranging from yellow for wealthy to black for vicious, semi-criminal.” Great detail here, okay.

So they don’t start by telling you that this store includes things like this, this, this, and this. No, that’s the type of thing that you would see online. Here, in a print setting, they give you extreme detail. This is called reporting, okay. And these are details that they’ve gotten by visiting, it looks like, but the guy who wrote this piece, or the girl who wrote this piece, didn’t need to visit this place to get this information. They could have called up the Map House and said, “Hey, could you tell me a couple of the more interesting things that you have in your store?” All right, so you don’t need for a guide piece to have done all of this research on the ground. You can go and pop around and see some different things, and take some notes, and then call them back later, all right.

So then he continues, or she continues, “Nearby is a 17th-century map of the world, which the dignified store clerk informs me is valued at 950,000 pounds. I asked how long he’s been hanging there, and he gives me a thin smile, “A while.” So this gives you character, it gives you sense of place, right. He says that the store clerk is dignified. He gives him a thin smile. He’s creating a scene with just this little one tiny paragraph, okay. And like I said, it’s done by giving specific details about what is there, about the setting, about the characters, about the visuals rather than by giving a laundry list of vague overview, okay. So one of the main things that I do when I’m editing people’s pitches, especially for these roundup style or guide-style pieces, is that X out the too many vague things they have in there and I ask them for super specific details like this.

Let’s look at another example, okay. “So I leave the Newman-Young at Sloan’s Garden, head into the Saatchi Gallery, which is housed in a grand 19th-century building and puts on exhibitions that skew heavily toward the inscrutable.” Okay, so they’ve told us what it is, it’s a gallery. They’ve given us a sort of sense of setting and, “Skews heavily towards the inscrutable.” But do you notice what’s missing? Maybe not, but they don’t say why you should go here. I don’t know if anybody noticed that, but that “why” is missing. And in part this is because the Saatchi Gallery is very famous just like this Harry’s over here, which I’ll go to in a second. They don’t mention why you should go to Saatchi Gallery because this is essentially one of those guide book-style, Empire State-style things that if you are in Chelsea you must do is go to Saatchi Gallery. Okay, that’s why that’s not here, but they do tell you a little bit about what it is. It’s got this old-style setting with the new modern thing. So that’s why they’ve included this guide book-style here because it fits in the theme of the article, okay.

And then detail is, “The first thing I see upon entering is a huge canvas by Los Angeles-based English painter Danny Fox, a naïve depiction of two seated women titled ‘Planned Parenthood Waiting Room.’ It has a touch of Gauguin to it, but also a touch of off-kilter Dilettante, very Saatchi.” Okay, so even the sentences here have more of a spoken quality to them, right, because they’re giving description, but with a service element. He is explaining to you what to expect here.

Now, let’s look at this one for Harry’s Dolce Vita, which again, is kind of a landmark-type thing here. Harry’s is a very famous bar. “Next, I head to the new Harry’s Dolce Vita, which looks like a bar from a 1930s rail station and has a staff that greets you like a long-lost friend.” So this is a very short description with two intense details that create a picture for you of what this place is like. And then he goes into more detail, “As I scan the menu, a white-collared…” hold on… “a white-collared bartender suggests I try an Infinite Negroni explaining that the ingredients are determined by rolling three dice, one for the type of gin, one for the vermouth, and one for the aperitivo. “It’s a gamble,” the bartender says deadpan. I roll the dice, he explains what he gets, raise my glass to a photo of Sophia Loren, and take a sip. We have a winner.”

So again, it’s really hard to introduce action into these pieces, but he’s trying by incorporating the quote here, the roll of the dice, what he gets, the action of taking a sip, but it’s all done through intense detail. He gives the name of the drink, he says how it’s determined, he explains what goes into it, and he tells you the end result. Okay, so that’s how these individual pieces in these guide features work out is that you have meta sections. In this case, day one, day two, day three. It could be where to say, where to eat, and what to do. Each of those has a bit of theme. And then they’ve got a few sentences or a paragraph for 20-odd different things that fall under that theme. In this case, this day, which is themed as Chelsea. All right, so that’s how they play out.

Now, we’re over time. So I wanna make sure that we have time to talk about how to pitch these because I know that I said earlier that there’s a lot that you can’t pitch. So many of these guide features are, as I mentioned, assigned. Assigned means that you get on the editor’s radar either by pitching them and not receiving assignments or by pitching them and receiving assignments, either way. You can be assigned pieces by an editor even if you haven’t written for them based on a pitch before, fascinating thing. This is one of the great reasons why you should always pitch and keep pitching. I’ve heard it both from editors and writers. It is completely common these days for you to get assigned a piece by an editor even if you haven’t written for that editor before, just based on the fact that you’ve been pitching them and they have become familiar with you by pitching, okay. So that one that I showed you from easyJet, that mega guide of guides to street food, that was one that’s definitely assigned, there’s no other way to get that besides being assigned.

This “Three Perfect Days” one that I showed you, you can pitch to that. They are more likely to assign it to you, but you can pitch. So the way to know if you can pitch it, like I said, is to check the byline of course to see if it says it’s been contributed by a bunch of people, but also, the ones that have a very specific format, like they happen every month such as the “Three Perfect Days” that I showed you, those are ones that are open to pitches. Okay, so a good way to know if a guide feature is something that you could put together a pitch for is that if it’s something that happens every month and has a very dependable format. But if you are pitching these pieces, you have to have a little bit more oomph than you might for other pieces. And why is that? On the one hand, it’s because they’re a feature, but on the other hand, it’s because guides can always be written about any place. So to convince the editor that this guide needs to happen right now, that she needs to assign it, you need to have a pretty secure time peg.

Now, you’ll notice though that this London one that we mentioned, that we looked at before, didn’t have a time peg, right. It was really weird, the theme was kind of that things that are new and old and don’t make sense. That probably means it was assigned. This is a really good way as you’re looking through magazines to know if a piece was assigned or not if it’s got like a crazy strong time peg at the top. It’s not necessarily an indicator that the piece was pitched, but if there’s no time peg whatsoever, that probably means the piece was assigned.

Now, a really good example of this that some of you may have seen me or heard me mentioned before is this Alcatraz feature. So during one of our retreats in the Catskills, we were analyzing magazine articles and somebody found a feature about Alcatraz and it really just seemed to be very much like an explainer-type piece profiling Alcatraz and what to do there, like a guide to Alcatraz, okay. And the writer who was analyzing it or analyzing that magazine said, “I don’t understand what this piece is doing here,” and that unfortunately happens with features because they need to assign them so far in advance that it can be hard to make them timely because often features are assigned, literally, like they are assigned at least a year if not two years in advance.

So if you are working on a guide feature, and you’re working on it from a pitch, you need to know that that time peg needs to be a year in advance. You can’t do a time peg for something for this fall for a guide feature, it’s gonna need to be for next fall. So that means that as you’re looking through the magazine database, or as you’re looking through magazines and you see these guide features, and you see that they’re written by freelancers, and you see that you can pitch them, you wanna have a very strong time peg but you wanna have a time peg that’s for next year sometime. Okay, so at least 12 months time peg on that. And I say at least because you wanna also factor the time for you to go back and forth with the other about the pitch. So you’re really looking almost more at 16 months minimum timeframe on these, okay. So that’s what I had to say about pitching these.

And that’s everything I got for guide features. I know they’re kind of like a weird category and I showed you a weird example, but that’s because they are a little bit off. Not off, but like they’re a little bit odd, right, like the guides that are in the front of the book of the magazine are super formulaic, they’re to the point, they’re really punchy. But a feature, which is a guide, like I said, it’s not a narrative. It has to have something a little interesting to keep somebody reading, basically, like a Wikipedia article for that long. So this is what’s important to keep in mind is that they aren’t narrative, but you need to have the ability to pull the reader along through all of that information for that much time. This “Three Perfect Days” that we looked at, that piece goes on and on for like 16 pages. That’s like 3,000 words, okay.

So we’ve got a question from Brit, “Would writing about a recurring festival or event be suited to the guide feature format?” That’s a great question, Brit. Thank you so much. So I would say that writing about a festival, unless it’s something really big like Burning Man or something, would probably be too narrow for a guide feature because like we saw with this London piece that we looked, on each of those days, he mentions like 20 things, right. So you would really need to have an event that had enough going on that you could have 3 different sections where you have 20 different things that you could spend the whole very detailed paragraph about. So that’s why I would say that most festival or events wouldn’t work for that.

But there are some that would. So like I said, Burning Man would be one, the Seville Feria, which takes place over the course of a month and really a lot going on in terms of service, that would be another one. So there certainly are festivals and things like that that could work for that, but I think that it might be too narrow for an editor to assign even within that because it would really need to be something that would be interesting to enough readers for the editor to wanna spend that many pages going in that much depth on it with the guide format. So that would be my answer for that.

So thank you guys so much and thanks for bearing with me while I still have this cold. Hopefully, next week I’ll have shaken it and we’ll have a normal sneeze and cough-free webinar. And I hope you guys have a great rest of your week. Bye-bye.

Article Nuts and Bolts: How to Put Together a “Postcard” Transcript

Download (PDF, 258KB)

Let’s go ahead and get started. This week we’re getting back into our “Article Nuts and Bolts” series. So we’ve done four of these so far. We’ve talked about mostly smaller things that you find either in the very front of the book or in the departments of a magazine. If you’re not familiar, magazines tend to have three major sections, sometimes four. There’s the front of the book which is also called “The Front Matter,” which means everything that comes before the features. But editors tend to think the front of book sections that are those short kind of newsy maybe calendar pieces as you see as separate from something called departments. Departments are pieces that tend to have a very specific format. They follow the same format every week, sometimes that’s a my city-type piece, where a celebrity will tell you, kind of, their favorite places in the city. It can also be an interview piece, or it can be a city guide, something like that. And those departments are followed by the features, which is followed by something called “The Back Matter” or the back of the book, which can also be short pieces or things are similar to the departments that you saw earlier, but they come after the features.

So in the earlier part of this Article Nuts and Bolts series, we really focused a lot on the things that you see in the front of magazines. But this month, we’re gonna be leading into some of those things that you’ll see in the feature section, and also types of articles that you can write for other places. So right now we’re gonna talk about postcards. So I’d love to hear from you guys in the chat box, how many of you are familiar with the concept of a postcard as relates to writing for print? So I don’t necessarily mean writing postcards that you get in the mail. I mean, postcards that you’ll see in the magazine or online. So drop that in the chat box if you are familiar with that concept before.

I know some places that teach travel writing might have taught you this as well. So the first thing that we’re gonna talk about for those of you who aren’t familiar, is what a postcard is in this context, and in the context of professional writing as opposed to postcards that you get in the mail. Because there is some resemblance. And we’ll talk about that, and we’ll talk about what makes up a good postcard piece.

And as we do that, we’re gonna to talk about, of course, the structure because that’s what we’re doing in these articles nuts and bolts pieces. But, I also have some examples for you guys of very different postcards. I’ve got one which is for more of a newsletter website context, one which is from a newspaper, and one which is from a magazine. And then we’re gonna talk about how you pitch these pieces differently and the different types of sections that they appear. So it seems like a lot of you guys aren’t familiar with it, so that’s great, because I actually wasn’t sure whether or not to include postcards in this list of the webinar topics that we’re doing for Article Nuts and Bolts series. But I feel like it’s a really great type of piece to have under your belt, because it’s something that you can do always. You can do them for every trip, and you can do them for every afternoon outing. You can really do them about anything that comes up for you, because they’re very minute.

The topic that you cover is very, very narrow. It’s really the extreme end of a slice of life-type thing. So this is really a great tool technique, tactic, for you to have in terms of writing these types of articles, even if you don’t feel like you’re gonna go out and pitch them tomorrow. It’s a really nice type of piece to know that you can write, that it can be written, that it can be pitched. 

So today, we’re talking about postcards, but what do I really mean when I say postcard in the context of writing for magazines? I’d love to hear from you guys. I said a little bit in the newsletter proceeding today’s call in a blog post. But I’d love to hear a little bit from you guys. Have you seen something before that you think might count as some of these postcards? Do you feel like you, kind of, have a sense of what it is? Let me know in the chat box.

So Lisa says she thinks she has. And I may have already called out Lisa on an earlier webinar. She’s somebody who’s come to one of our events in the past, and is really, really lovely and hard working. She left and then within just a month or something, less than a month, I talked to her after and she’d already built up like $2,000 or more of recurring income for herself. And she wrote me the other day that she got a piece in “USA Today”.

So I know she’s been looking at a lot of newspapers, so that might be why she’s seen some. Marilyn says she’s seen some that are usually a large photo with a one paragraph description. That also happens, yeah. That’s something that people tend to think of it as a little more like a photo essay, but it’s like one photo that’s functioning in the photo essay rather than a series of photos. So, great. So I think that’s all the time we’re gonna get on that.

So when I talk about postcards in the context of writing about travel, now, postcards as you’re gonna see, we’re gonna talk about this in a little bit, postcards aren’t something that just appear in newspapers or in magazines, or even just in editorial websites. They can also appear in content marketing applications. And, in fact, that is one of the coolest reasons that I recommend people who really like to write, but will also care about money, get into content marketing, because there’s actually a lot of space to write these really beautiful pieces. But the thing is that a postcard as a piece is, like I mentioned earlier, an incredibly narrow slice of a destination on the one hand.

So you have to think of something very specific, something very narrow, but it’s also has to be very atmospheric, very descriptive, very evocative. Evocative is really the word that I think of when I think of postcards. They need to be something where in a tiny space, in a small space, not a lot of words, you get people to feel something, you get people to picture something, to imagine something, to want to be somewhere. So like I said, we’re gonna talk about how this relates to the obvious postcards that we think of, right? Which are the postcards that you put in the mail, the “Wish You Were Here” type things.

Now, it’s interesting, because obviously, this type of piece is called a postcard for a reason. And it’s called a postcard because it does have a lot to do with the postcards of yore. I mean, I know people sometimes who still send postcards. So they’re not an entirely, you know, extinct species, just a little bit endangered. But, I want you to think of postcards, maybe that you have received in the past, or postcards that you might see in a museum. You know, sometimes we go to these museums that historic museums. For instance, I went to the Titanic Museum, and they had a whole exhibit on the post office in the Titanic and how they were handling mail being brought across the country, and also how they deliver mail to people who are on the ship.

And this idea of letter-writing or postcard-writing from back more like in the 1800s or the early one 1900s or something, right? People used to write these letters and postcards where they were really trying to convey to their reader, to their friend, to their family, to whoever that they were writing to, where they were, or what it was like, what they were feeling. And they had this small space, usually bounded by whatever postage they were gonna pay, because who knows how far this thing was going, and it used to be the postcards, because they were kind of just one-sided and flat had a lower postage rate than letters.

So people used to use these postcards, or even as well letters, to really try to convey to the recipient in as little space as possible what the place is like, how they felt about it, all of these things. And for those of you, I know Alana who just chimed in in the chat box also has a degree in literature as well, for those of you who have a literary background, these are things that you might have read as part of literature. Like there’s a lot of books that I like to read about Italy in different places which were originally letters that the author wrote to somebody, or that had that vein. They wrote it as a letter. And this type of writing is called epistolary writing. I’ll write it in the chat box, because it’s a really weird word, epistolary writing. I actually took a course on this when I was younger. So writing in the form of a letter, that’s called epistolary writing.

So when I talk about postcards for us as a journalistic technique as a type of writer, I’m not specifically talking about epistolary writing. I’m not specifically saying that your piece at the top should says, “Dear so and so.” But I want you to imagine that it has this sense that if you were to tell somebody who was very dear to you what you love about a place or what most struck you about a place, what would that be? And I feel like we write these less to the people that we know today, because we tend to be sharing things on in the setting of like a Facebook or something like that, or perhaps we just have an album somewhere where we upload all of our photos and our family can check them out. Maybe it’s on our Facebook, or maybe we’re using Snapchat or something like that.

So I feel like today people tend to convey to their friends and family what’s going on with themselves in their place and their travels through photos, right? And so, a couple of people had mentioned that they’ve seen sections in magazines where it’s like a photo and then some text underneath. So that is kind of in line with the old fashioned type of postcard that you’ll see here on the screen, right? Because they have these photos, like here’s this photo of the beach or the pineapple or of the high grade. So it used to be that when you sent a postcard in the mail, somebody would have a picture, and then the text will accompany it.

And in some cases, in postcards today, you’ll still have that. Like if you’re writing for a newspaper or something like that, then you’ll have a photo and you’ll have text to accompany it. But I remember I was in a writing workshop a few years back, and they asked us to share a piece of writing. And I shared a postscript, a piece that I had written, that had already been published in the newspaper. It wasn’t something that I was working on. And I remember the lead, sort of, instructor saying… not necessarily that he didn’t understand but asking a question, kind of, related to something way back up at the top in the very beginning of the piece. And I said, “Oh, well, there’s a photo there. There’s a photo that explains that.”

And he said to me, “Okay, but you have to write like there’s not a photo. You can’t assume that there’s a photo with the writing.” So the way that I like to think of postcard pieces, as you can imagine that you are creating both the photo and the back that goes with your postcard. So you’re creating that descriptive depiction image and that’s usually the first thing they see, when people get your postcards, right? Is they look at the picture, the check out the picture, they have thoughts about the picture, and then they go and look for your explanation about it.

So that’s what we’re trying to achieve with postcards here, is that we’re trying to include both the picture that we draw with our words as well as what we would write on the back of the postcard. So I mentioned this a little bit earlier, but I wanna talk for a minute about where you can place these stories, because you might be really surprised, because these seem, as I’ve heard a lot of people say, these seem like literary writing, kind of, like in quotes, like “highbrow literary writing,” right, because they’re very atmospheric, they’re very descriptive. I’ve heard a lot of you that I have interacted with in the past, including some of you that I know who are on the webinar right now, say like, “Oh, gosh. Like I can’t write. I don’t know how to do travel writing. Like I’m a trained writer. I write for my current career, like I wanna get into travel writing, but I just don’t know how to do that kind of thing.” And when I ask them what they mean they say that descriptive, flowery kind of thing. And I tell them, “Well, that’s great, because I spent all sorts of time trying to get people to stop doing that.”

But postcards are the one place where you do, or where you do really kind of dive into that description. And so for those of you that feel a bit nervous about that, I have good news which is that it’s actually much, much easier than you think, and we are gonna look at a few different examples. I’ve got three examples for you guys of different pieces, but you’ll see that the description that goes in these postcard pieces, it’s all talking about something that’s in front of you. And you don’t have to, and you probably shouldn’t use these big words, right? Because a lot of, you’ll see this in websites that you might write for, you’ll see when you’re writing in Microsoft Word, people care about the reader level.

So a good description isn’t necessarily gonna be something that uses great big evocative words, which the word in and of themselves has a complex meaning that conveys all these things. It’s about the details that you choose to share. Adding colors, adding sense of smell, adding sounds, that’s what creates this evocative type of writing. So who publishes that? Right? So I’ve mentioned newspapers a couple times, and I mentioned them in the prelude to today’s webinar. And that’s because newspapers are one of the best places still today for this type of writing with some caveats.

So newspapers are kind of the Wild West. Let me know in the chat box. Have any you guys tried to pitch newspapers before? I’m really curious about this. So we’re actually…one of the things that I’m meeting today in London about is starting to add newspapers to the travel magazine database, and how that works, and how you guys would go about pitching newspapers and what you need to know about that. And I have actually just had a request from one of the main travel writing associations to use our database for their readership, to sort of make it something exclusively for them. And one of the first things that the guy asked for was about newspapers. And it’s so interesting to me, because I’m seeing a lot of you guys say, no you haven’t pitched a newspaper. Somebody said, “Yes, without success.” Somebody says yes, she’s pitched a local one. A lot of people just don’t think about pitching newspapers.

Stacey, who I’ve been interacting with for a few years says, yes, she’s had success pitching newspapers. Somebody say they won’t take anything from a press trip. That’s very, very, very true. And there’s somebody who follows us but I don’t know if she is on the webinar today, who has written for quite a while now for “The Wall Street Journal”. And then she just asked them a question one day. She had been invited on a press trip, she’d never been invited on a press trip before. She didn’t know, kind of, what the protocol was, or if she could go on it or anything. And so asked the Wall Street Journal, she said, “Hey, I received this invitation. Like, is this allowed? Like how does this work or something like this.” And they basically ghosted her, actually.

So newspapers, as someone very astutely mentioned, tend to be very, very, very skittish around the topic of press trips. People may have famously heard that the “New York Times” doesn’t work with anybody who’s taken a press trip before, and the specifics of that is that it doesn’t work with anyone who’s taken a press trip within the past three years. And they run a background check, and I’m not quite sure how that reveals if you’ve been on a press trip, but they also don’t work with people who have a history of regularly taking press trips before that.

The “LA Times” also take things from press trip. There’s varying policies across different newspapers. I think that the British publications are fine with press trips from the people that I’ve talked to, but I think a lot of people don’t not pitch newspapers because of this press trip thing. I think people don’t pitch newspapers because they don’t think about them really as viable places for stories. They don’t really know what a newspaper is looking for, and they’ve heard that you have to, for newspapers, write the whole piece in advance and submit it rather than pitching. And they don’t even know if newspapers really pay anymore.

So, there’s a lot of reasons that newspapers, or that people, freelance writers, wouldn’t be pitching stuff today. And Lisa has a great one here. She says she was told there was no freelance budget. I remember a few years back, there was this really lovely editor of “The Toronto Star” for several years, and I happened to email her about something, and he told me that he was leaving. And so I emailed the new person who was taking his place, and he looks like… What’s the guy that runs the Virgin Airlines? Richard Branson. This guy looks like Richard Branson and he’s got this like sassy, long, white hair flowing in a picture of his head shot, which looks like he’s got a fan in front of him. And he was telling me, “No, no, We don’t pay for freelancers anymore.” And then very shortly after that, I saw that he posted on a site looking for writers for stories. And I said, “Hey, you just told me that you don’t pay for freelance pitchers. Like what is this thing are you paying for?” He said, “Oh, yeah, that’s advertorial.”

And so, then, trying to be a good little journalist pitcher, I went and looked at what they had had in their advertorial in the past, and I looked at how they couch it to the people who are paying for the advertorial, and then I came back and sent him some pitches. And or I, kind of, told him like, you know, “Are you looking for something like this?” And he said, “No. We want heart. We want drama. We want…” He was like, you know, a director in a bad movie about like a play all gone wrong, like with the directors like hopping around acting out the roles for somebody. So in newspapers, just like with other content marketing, which we’ll talk about, there is a place for these type of pieces on the editorial side, but also surprisingly and interestingly, on the content marketing side.

So, someone said typical newspaper editor. So I’ve met some really savvy, very, very cool newspaper editors. I think most people these days are very down to earth, because they’re fearing for their jobs all the time. But in terms of the cool things that are happening with newspapers on the non-editorial side where you can write these nice postcards, there’s just some very cool stuff coming out of their, I think call them content studios usually. “The Washington Journal” has a big content studio now.

And the idea that brands have, when they come to a newspaper or a magazine, or particularly newspapers is that they know that their advertising works like advertising, and that they’re not looking for advertising. They’re looking for a story that readers will really get into and really love, that often has a very, very, very little to do with the brand. I heard about a really amazing one, which isn’t exactly travel-related, but I can’t remember if it’s a fridge or freezer, but the brand is called Sub Zero, and they did this huge project all around food waste. They had like this amazing reported piece and infographics, I think they also did a video. And you don’t think of that as being an ad for a freezer.

So there’s often a lot of quite well-paid opportunities to do advertorials, but as a postcard, not as this really boring, kind of copywriting, content writing type thing. But there’s also opportunities for postcards in newspapers as stories. And newspapers do not pay as little as you would think. I would say, “Don’t be expecting necessarily a dollar a word, but don’t be expecting less than 50 cents a word if you’re looking at a newspaper with national distribution.” So in each country the newspapers that have a national discussion are bit different. But if you’re looking at a paper, which is either like the local alt magazine that’s actually on newsprint, or you’re looking at, someone had mentioned like the “Courier Journal” has their freelance budget now. These regional papers that are smaller, that don’t have like national distribution, those ones tend to have very little/no freelance budget. So that’s not a place where I would be looking to pitch these stories.

But, anyway, it’s better click for you if you’re pitching these to like the “SF Chronicles” and “LA Times” and “New York Times” or “Wall Street Journal”‘s of the world. So I have definitely been paid, I would say in the like 70 or 80 cents a word section for newspapers. And one thing to keep note of though is that even though you actually can pitch a story to a newspaper before you write it, having them pay for your expenses is a different animal. So newspapers are not necessarily a place where you can pitch them before a trip and get the pitch approved and go on the trip and come back. Everything that you submit to a newspaper will be on speculation, which means that they’ll have to see it and then tell you if they can publish it. And I found a really, really well-reasoned argument about this from the very fantastic editor of the “LA Times”.

So what she basically said is like every day for her is like a fight, and in the, she said she never knows what’s going on bureaucratically and administratively. But she can’t have people who are not employees of her paper who have signed their code of contact, who, you know, they’re liable for going around and right saying and representing themselves as writing for her paper. For her, it’s a big legal liability issue about how the brand is being represented or if something happens to that person on a trip, it reflects on them. So she can, no matter how much she likes, you know, no matter how well she knows you, or no matter how many of your pieces she published in the past, she can tell you like relatively shortly, like, yeah, that sounds great. Like go on the trip, write it up, and spin it to me when you come back. But she cannot give you an actual assignment before you go, before you file the piece. So this is something that newspapers just work differently, but it’s not that they don’t pay, and it’s not that they don’t have call for your stories. And the last webinar in April, we’re gonna talk about another type of story that’s really great for newspapers besides postcards.

And, like I said, we’re gonna start adding those to the database as well. So if you’re interested in getting into newspapers, there’s a couple more ways to learn about that. But let’s get back into the specifics of the postcard pieces we’re talking about today. So I know some of you who are here in the webinar today either have the travel magazine database, or you have had it in the past. But let me know in the chat box if you’re familiar with what I mean when I say independent magazines. And I’ll explain a little bit more right now while I’m waiting for your responses about how these postcard pieces work for independent magazines. But in the meantime, let me know in the chat box if you know what I mean by independent magazines and then I’ll explain in some more detail.

So independent magazines, as you may have seen in the database, function really differently from what I talked about at the top of the call. At the top of the call, I talked about how magazines have this front of book, and then they have the features, they have back of the book. And as part of front of book, they have these departments that are very specifically outlined sections, that are the same every month, they follow the exact same format.

Now, independent magazines, by and large, I would say, gosh probably only three or four that I’ve seen that are quite structured. So independent magazines tend to just be all features. They might have a couple different types of features that they do, but they tend to just be filled completely with these “features”. But what that really means, and we break out each of these different articles types in the database when we talk about them, what that really means is that they might take photo essays, they might take first person stories, they might take third person reported stories, they may take stories that are more essays and features.

They tend to have some different types of stories that they take. And one of the things that I’ve seen that was really surprising is that even though a lot of these magazines think of themselves as all features, they also do have a number of pieces that run like 500 words, or maybe shorter, or maybe 700 words, where they’re expecting you to get something, let’s call it feature caliber from their viewpoint, out. But what they’re really looking for is a postcard. So independent magazines for those of you who aren’t familiar, these are magazines, they tend to be on very thick paper, like really, really, lovely beautifully laid out publications. They don’t usually come out monthly. They typically come out either quarterly, sometimes every six months, maybe annually. But they’re just stunning and they have really fantastic storytelling, and they’re started by people who are really passionate about telling a specific type of story.

And some of them don’t pay at all, because they’re quite new and they’re trying to figure themselves out, and some of them do pay and they pay quite, you know, well for what they do in terms of, I think that there’s two that are published in the same place that I know that pay about 700 words for a piece that’s like 1200 or 1500 words if I’m not mistaken. So the pay is not shabby especially because they give you a lot of latitude to write these really lovely stories. And with these Indy Magazines, they are often not things that you would ever know about unless you’re lucky enough to live in a city where they have a store that sells these magazines, kind of like an art magazine store.

So we’ve really made a big push over the last few years to get a lot of them in the database so you have access to them. They’re just great places for these types of stories. And so they’re great for features, but like I said, they’re really great for postcards as well. They’ve got a lot of these short pieces. Now, content marketing, I know it sounds weird that we’re talking about these atmospheric, short, like descriptive evocative literary pieces, and that that’s content marketing writing. But secretly, this is what people are looking for. Last night here in London, I was meeting with somebody who has a book coming out soon on brand storytelling. Brand storytelling is such a huge, huge buzzword right now. Everybody wants to tell stories rather than just have content. Everyone wants evocative writing that motivates the people reading it to have a feeling about the brand, rather than just to know about the brand.

So with content marketing in terms of travel, the way to use these postcards is when you are doing work for something like a tour company, or a destination, something that covers destinations. So there’s not necessarily a ton of other companies that might be. If this is a product-oriented company, it might be a little hard to do these postcard-type pieces. So this is more reading directly for a tourism board or a Convention Visitors Bureau, or writing for a company that has tours in a certain destination.

So, for instance, when I used to do these content marketing gigs for tour companies or travel concierge specialists, something like that, this would be one of the pieces that I would include in my proposal, that once or twice a month, we would do these postcard pieces. And if you have my book, in the back of the book in the appendix there’s some proposals for different types of gigs. And you’ll see that I propose these postcard pieces, that I propose them as around 600 words. And the idea for a company like that of these postcard pieces is say it’s a company that does tours in the Cotswolds, the Cotswolds are this really lovely area, they’re called an area of outstanding natural beauty, there’s these wonderful little towns.

So you could have, on your blog, on your website, your itineraries of the tours that you do, you could have, you know, top 10 posts of the cutest villages in the Cotswolds. Or at least in addition to that, you could have these short pieces where it’s really easy for people to read online, because it’s not that long, but it just gives them this compelling sense of place, this incredible sense of like, “Wow, I wanna be there.” And that drives business for that tour company so much better. So that’s what I mean about these postcards in this content marketing context.

Now, the other place you’ll see these is on editorial websites. So when I say content marketing, I’m talking about when you are writing for a company on its website. But editorial websites, what I mean is more like something in the online magazine category, or something like a blog. So I do know some people who have their own personal blog where they aim to write things that are more, like what you would consider like a magazine feature or a postcard, than what you would think of as a usual blog post.

But there’s also websites that commission these type of postcard pieces from people. So one specifically, and I’m gonna show you one of these later, and so that’s why you put the name in here. They also use them in their newsletter, and they are quite short the ones that they use, I would say they’re maybe between 250 or 300 and like 450 words is “International Living” publishes them in their newsletter. And they tend to have a relatively strong sales angle. At the end, after the postcard that’s written by the person.

But ones that you’ll see on most websites of an editorial nature won’t necessarily be in the email where they say, “Read this email, and then go read our full issue to find out more,” as is the case with the “International Living” one that we’ll see later. But they tend to be things more like what I was talking about with the independent magazines. They tend to be websites that are doing just some really lovely destination content. Their goal is just really to be showing that sense of place and atmosphere. And they are looking for these short sections, not necessarily because there’s not space but more because of the attention spans of readers and how things work online today.

So, that being said, what is the subject of…or sorry, the structure of the usual postcard? You hear me mention a couple of different word counts, and one of the ones that I’m gonna show you later, I think it’s like 75 words. Postcards can and should be very short for best results. I think the ones that I’m gonna show you today are… this one is like 75 words, one that I think is around 450 and another one which is maybe like 250. So the idea is that in a very, very small space, but not like we do in a news brief, in a front of book thing which is equally short, we’re trying to tell you everything about a place. In a very small space, you want to show them how the place makes them feel, or give them a glimpse enough about a place so that they can have a feeling about it.

And the trajectory is much different in terms of how sort of short it is for these pieces than others. And it really relates back to what I told you about that postcard analogy. So usually when people pick up a postcard, they look at the picture on the front, and then they flip it over and look at the back. And on the top of that postcard when they say, “Hey, you know, I’m writing from so and so. Like our trip here has been going this and that and the other thing.” And then there’s another bit down towards the bottom of the postcard where they tell you what they think of the place. They tell you how they feel about the place, they say like it’s changed their life or something like that.

So that’s our trajectory of these written postcards as well. They start with a scene, they give background, and then they go back to the scene and they tell you what the takeaway, what takeaway from this experience. What’s the point of them writing you? What do they want you to know? And you’ll see, especially in the really short one that I’m gonna show you, that sometimes that background is also not there. But the piece is so short and so concise that they’re just showing you something and having you take what they want you to take from it, just from that sentence, just from the text.

So I know this is super tiny, so I’m gonna read it to you, right. So I’m going to pop over my screen and read it from here, so it you won’t be able to see the chat box for one second. So this piece is from the “Dallas Morning News”, and like I said, this one is the longer one, this is around 450 words. So I’m kind of going in order with the ones that I’m presenting with you today. So we’re gonna go from long to short, so you can see how the things that we talk about start to get crunched over time into a smaller and smaller space.

Okay, so this because it’s in a newspaper, it’s got this head where it says the specific city and the country. So here’s the story, “Strolling down Santa Luzia’s promenade one evening in search of the perfect plate of octopus, I was paralyzed. Which one of the 14 Polva plates at Casa do polva Tasquinha should I order? When my “octopus filet” arrived at the Casa, it was not what I was expected. The plate held four tentacle chunks each at least 1 inch thick and 2 inches wide, delicately breaded in a panko-style crumb and fried to a golden hue that mimicked the sun setting in front of my table. Furthering my confusion, the “filet” was threaded onto two parallel skewers like a roast luau pig.

“When I bit in, I realize the advice I had gotten from Tamar Weiti, founder of nearby Quintamar ecolodge was dead right. Though I’d come to Santa Luzia for an eco-getaway in the hinterland of Portugal’s Algarve coast, spending days by the eco-friendly swimming pond or on the coastal Ecovia Litoral do Algarve bike trail, I had stumbled into Octopus paradise.”

So you’ll see here we’ve switched. So we had going on about, we had that scene, we had that postcard. So you could almost think, and, of course, because this was a newspaper piece that came with some pictures, you can almost think that the front of that postcard, to continue our postcard analogy, would have the picture of this octopus plate, right? But instead here we’ve done it with words. And we’ve explained a little bit also, you know, about being paralyzed, but there’s a little bit of background kind of slunk in here. But this especially with the description of the octopus filet and how wide it is and breaded, that’s more of that picture, okay?

So then we get it further into the background. So we’ve had a little bit of background about how… sorry. We’ve had a little bit of background about how the author got here, but then we have more background about, again, not the whole destination. That this specific slice, this specific thing that is the focus of this article, which is the octopuses. So it goes on. “Octopuses are highly intelligent creatures, but their inquisitive nature lets fisherman entrap them using simple clay jars. Octopuses peek in looking for food or a good nesting or mating area, and then they can’t slither out. Fishermen in Santa Luzia have honed their methods, turning their village of just 1,450 inhabitants into Portugal’s Polva (octopus) capital.

“Santa Luzia is off the tourist path. Even the Ecovia, which meanders along Portugal’s southern coast from the Atlantic to the Spanish border, skirts the sleepy town on its way between the Pedras el Ray resort village and the ancient port town of Tavira. Though a small community of British expats has trickled in over the last two decades, the Portuguese have tried hard to keep Santa Luzia to themselves. It’s easy to see why.

“Days in Santa Luzia revolve around food and sun. To catch the fishermen in action, you need to set out early. Along the combination oceanfront promenade, port and main drag, cafes are happy to welcome you and let you linger over your garata-strong espresso with milk in a petite glass-for the entire morning. They garata and a sinfully rich pastry are a steal at barely $3.

“In the afternoon, Santa Luzia becomes a ghost town. After a three-course meal, at home or a prix-fixe lunch in the shaded back streets for around $10, locals take a siesta or a 10-minute stroll and a 5-minute tram to the pristine Praia do Barrit Beach. As things cool down, the town slowly awakens. Restaurant owners set up their outdoor tables, arranging each tablecloth, fork and salt shaker at a languid tempo, ignoring early arrivals eager to fill their packed vacation itineraries. Savoring the succulent octopus and the smaller morsels in the rose-tinged risotto underneath, I wished I had more time. Though it’s known for its octopus, Santa Luzia is a microcosm of Portugal.

“In just one day, you can get a dose of everything: the coast, seafood, intricate tile work, warm hospitality, warmer sun and even fada music. But if you can, don’t spend only one day. After all, there’s 13 more polvo preparations to try.”

So you’ll see that there was that background, like I said, which was the background of how the writer got here, and the background of the octopus. But then, there’s a bit more information about the destination, because this piece, like I said, this is the longer one. So you’ll see what starts to get cut when the pieces get shorter, which is why I wanted to show them to you in this order. So, like I said, we talk about the octopuses, and then it goes into some information about the Santa Luzia town. And it also gives, if you notice, it gives you, kind of, like a 24 hours of what to do here, right? And says, “You start here, you have a lunch, you go to this beach, but it doesn’t say, “Do this, do this, do this, do this.” It’s not kind of set up in that 48-hours, 24-hours, 36-hours format. It’s more through this descriptive lens, designed rather than telling you what to do to help you to imagine yourself doing it.

So, like I said, this is the long-version. And if this was shorter, it would probably wrap up here with, you know, “Savoring this, I wish I had more time. Though it’s known for it’s octopus, Santa Luzia is a microcosm of Portugal.” It could end right there, but because it’s longer and it has a space, there’s a little bit more of a conclusion here telling you, you know, all the different things that you can get there, but don’t spend just one day, because there’s 13 more preparations to try.

Now, this next one that I have for you, it’s probably gonna be even smaller on your screens. So this one, like I said, I think is about 250 or maybe 300 words. And this one’s just, ironically, these were the ones that I picked, because they were the best examples of this, this one also takes place in Portugal. This one takes place in Lisbon, okay?

So she says, the writer begins, “Laundry is hanging in vivid postcard style…” Sorry that was a funny pun that she also says postcard style, “above bougainvillea draped walls. Built on one of Lisbon’s seven hills, this is Alfama, my favorite Lisbon neighborhood. Walking through the old becos, the slim cobbled alleyways that lead me up and down ancient hills, I hear fado, the beautifully melancholic traditional music of Portugal from a neighbor’s window.”

So you’ll see here that she’s done something interesting that I hear people ask about regularly, which is how do you incorporate foreign words. And in the last piece, in the octopus piece, you know, it said “polvo” is the word for octopus and it made it really clear that it was about octopus, and then “garoto” which was the word for the espresso, and it would say the word and then explain them. So that tends to be how these things are used. But you’ll see later down, she incorporates some different methods for this which is that she puts it in parentheses and quotation marks, and then she starts to reuse some of these words that you’ve already seen without explaining them again.

So she continues, “The Portuguese capital is all about romantic views, secret neighborhoods, and faded grandeur. The houses here are clad in intricate tiles to reflect the sun’s heat, and it seems as if the city here wears its beauty inside out.

“Originally from Texas, I moved into the heart of the old Moorish part of the city at the beginning of 2011, renting a small apartment with a tiny balcony on a narrow street in Alfama, I paid about $550 a month, and it was the perfect introduction to the city.

“Alfama is reminiscent of the North African heritage of Southern Spanish cities like Seville and Granada. Lisbon’s central neighborhoods sweep down the old part in elegant boulevards rebuilt after the 1755 earthquake in an elegant style known as “Pambaline”. Into the mix, you have late Gothic architecture as well, and the city is home to one of Europe’s largest plazas, Terreiro do Paco.”

Now, I wanted to say, I had mentioned earlier for those of you who are, you know, nervous about incorporating description, or feel like it something that you don’t know how to do or that you don’t know how to choose, you’ll see there’s two totally different styles of description between this piece that we’re looking at now and the piece that we looked at earlier. The description that she’s using here, it’s a very, you might almost say it’s kind of general, it’s almost guide-booky, right?

So she’s saying, you know, that the neighborhoods sweep down, and the boulevards that were rebuilt at this time, there are some Gothic architecture. But that’s because this description here it’s not in the postcard part, right? The postcard part was where she was talking about the slim-cobbled alleyways that lead me up and down the ancient hills. And you’ll see the same thing over here. So in the previous piece when the author was talking in the beginning in that picture part of the postcard, you know, there was a lot of specific detail about the breading and what not. But then, you know, talking about the octopuses, there’s not so much detail here.

You know, it doesn’t say like the purple octopuses with their, you know, four-foot long, tentacles, you know, it doesn’t go into that kind of detail here, because we’ve switched. We’ve gone from the picture painting part to this more background part. And so, the nice thing about that is that if you feel a little nervous about your description, there’s only a bit of these pieces where you really need to do it in super, super deep detail. And then you kind of pull back the lens a little bit in order to cover more ground. And that’s the part that we’re in now.

So she goes on. “Yellow trams from either era climb slowly past medieval cathedrals, delicious pastry shops, and haphazard stacks of bacahau- dried, salted codfish-outside traditional grocers. My head is constantly turning to take in the rich array of markets and boutiques, esplanades and plazas, fado singers and street performers. But there are so many cathedrals around Alfama, around Lisbon, around Portugal, I always know what time it is by the bells.”

So that’s one of those examples where I was saying that if you wanna add things not just you’re seeing, you wanna add also things you’re hearing, that you’re smelling, that you’re tasting, things like that.

“The city’s wide, wild, river, ocean, atmosphere, has affected the children here so that they never tire. And they rocket up and down these steep hills and stairs, yelling with smiles. Built by the Moors to create natural air conditioning, the buildings in Alfama are clustered together over narrow streets, and the sun has a hard time finding its way into the apartments. Unless you’re on the top floor of the building, the interior spaces can be dark.

“To combat the lack of indoor sun, locals sun themselves on the Miradoures (lookout points). several of which can be found in Alfama. The people of Lisbon, known as alfacinhas, little lettuces, are proud of the Miradoures, and their cinematic views of the city and the Tagus River in Alfama recommend the Portas do Sal with a nice esplanade and a kiosk selling pastries and coffee. There is a wonderful rhythm to life in Alfama.”

So you can tell now that she’s getting into that conclusion bit, because now she’s summarizing even more. “Old men gather to smoke every morning at tiny home in the wall tascas, bar or cafes. You’ll know when you’re at an authentic tasca, an espresso will cost you just 65 cents.”

So, this last sentence here, brings home a point that you might not have realized was actually one of her… I know this person who wrote this piece, one of the points of writing this piece, which is that this is related, this is for an outlet that talks about living abroad for very little money. And so, the idea of this piece is to show you the type of experience that you can have for not a lot of money living in Portugal.

And so, it’s not like a super beaten home point, right? She says up here that she pays about $550 a month for her apartment, and she says that here the espresso was only 65 cents. But that’s something that’s central to the outlet that she’s writing for. But the point of her piece is to show you what it’s like in this place, that this is a place that you should consider living in if you wanna have an inexpensive time abroad.

So the last one… I’ll just see if there’s any questions. Okay, sorry. The Lisbon one was published, this is from “International Living”. This is from the “International Living” newsletter, and the author of this one, her name is Suchi Rudra, and let me see if I can get the word count for you. I might not be able to get it here, so I got it in PowerPoint. Sorry, I can’t get the exact word out for you. I would say looking at it, that it’s probably around 300, but it might be 350. But I think it’s around 300. So this next one though that I wanna show you, this one is from “National Geographic” UK, all right. And this section is 500 to 100 words, okay? Super short, right? 500 to 100 words. And this is something in UK, or “National Geographic” UK.

And this is one of those ones that some of you guys had mentioned, where there’s a photo, and then there’s a little bit of text that goes along with it. So we’ve clipped the photo here to make the text as big as possible, but there was a photo of a woman. And this is a section that is meant to focus on a conversation that you have, in a country that you visited, where you don’t speak the same language of the people, or where you guys don’t necessarily understand each other, but you’ve had a conversation.

So this one is called “Suri girl. Ethiopia” And again, the section is called “Snapshot” So it begins, “From the capita, Addis Ababa, it takes three days of hard travel to reach the isolated village of Kibish, in the Omo Valley.” So even though she’s got 75 words only, these sentences they’re not like, you know, they’re not like something that God wrote on a stone. They’re not like the be all and all of literary writing. Often, the description is just saying what is. She continues, “I stayed with the Suri people, one of the regions ancient tribes, where piercing, scarification, and lip plates are a strong part of the culture. I lived in my tent under the protection of the travel leader, and over time gained the community’s trust and was able to take portraits.

“One day, several women and girls came by. One of them was very shy, and stood aside. I went to her and said, “Challi” which means “hello, how are you?” And took the picture. I didn’t ever find out her name, yet in my mind, I saw still call her Challi.” So this is one of those things where, because there’s that photo there, she didn’t start her piece, sorry. I’m not sure if this is a her, it looks like maybe it’s a he. This person, this author didn’t start the piece with that whole description, and that’s part of how he or she is able to get away with it in these few words.

That the piece here in the writing, actually starts with that background part which is in the middle part that we talked about. But then it gets back to the scene. There’s a small scene, there’s an exchange with this person, and it creates this idea that here’s this culture which we think of as very, very different, very foreign, very exotic, we feel like we don’t understand them, we don’t know about how they work or their ways, and she spent all of…or this author spent all this time trying to get to know these people and still up to this time, people wanted to interact with the author, but there’s still that threshold wasn’t completely crossed. And yet those interactions stood out in such a vibrant way that the author still remembers this girl, the shy girl who wanted to interact but couldn’t quite.

So this I wanted to share with you also, because this idea, this goes back to that type of piece that some of you mentioned where there’s a photo with a little piece, but also how I really love in these snapshot pieces, how they don’t explain at the end, they don’t tell you what it is that they want you to take away from it, which they do have to do in a lot of these other types of pieces that you would see, whether it’s online or newspapers. This is more of the kind of thing where there’s a sentence that just ends, and it’s really left for you to figure out what it is that you think about it.

So let me know… Well, I’ll switch talking about how to pitch these pieces in a second, but first just let me know in the chat box if you have any questions about the pieces that we looked at, or how that structure of painting the picture, giving the background, and then going back to the scene and what you took away. Let me know if you have any questions about that before I get on to how to pitch. I think the delay should have caught up by now, but if people have questions that come in, then I’ll answer them as they come in.

So how do we pitch these? So I mentioned a little bit about the newspapers before, which is that you don’t have to send them the whole piece. I don’t recommend sending them the whole piece. You can definitely pitch them an idea before you send it to them, and then if they say they’d like to look at it, then you write that up. Patricia’s got a great question, but let me go through these, how to pitch these, and then I’ll answer that after.

So for independent magazines, you would definitely wanna pitch it before you write the piece, definitely, definitely. If you have… I’ve often heard people say that they have a story that they’re sitting on, like an idea, but that they’ve already written up the whole story. I always recommend to not write the story first, but if you do have something where you more kind of wrote it up in your diary or in your notes, or something like, or you had an experience, you had a moment, that was really great. That’s something where you still don’t wanna put that whole moment in your pitch, okay?

So your pitch, even if you’re pitching whether it’s to a newspaper or magazine or website, in your pitch make sure you don’t give away that whole moment, that whole last paragraph, that whole end of your postcard piece. And it can seem really hard. I since have a lot of folks who if they’re pitching pieces that are like 300, 400, words, their pitch becomes like 500, 600 words.

And I can tell you, I tell you not just because I would think this, but I can tell you because I’ve seen responses that people that I coach that have come to our events. I keep seeing these responses where people write long pitches, and the editor writes back in a way where she isn’t just in the piece. I can tell that editor is interested, but she’s nervous that if it took the writer this long to get to the point of what she was trying to pitch in the pitch, how is she gonna accomplish the piece in the 400 words that the section actually has?

So you’re much, much better off when you pitch this to magazines or newspapers, these, kind of pieces, to have just a little snippet at the beginning of that, kind of, description of that picture painting, and then go into your second paragraph where you explain.what it is that you’re pitching, where you explain what you cover, rather than continuing to show throughout your pitch. Someone asked you call it a postcard when you pitch? No, you always call it the name of whatever the section is in the magazine, you don’t call it a postcard.

So relatedly Patti asked, “Do you send a photo with your pitch?” This is actually something that I had noticed lately. Those of you who have blogs and things like that and have an email signature, where you got a lot of stuff going on, you’ve gotta cut that out. When you pitch an editor at a magazine, there should not be a single attachment in your email. And I think a lot of people don’t realize that those signatures that they have, even if it’s just all images of Instagram and stuff, those show up as attachments. and editors aren’t gonna open emails with attachments for people they don’t know.

So, if you have a photo that the story is around, you can put it in your online portfolio, in Dropbox. I always send people things in Dropbox as links if I’m sending files. I don’t necessarily recommend sending Google Drive. It’s much better to do it either in Dropbox or in a photo gallery type thing that you use. Or if you have your own website you can just upload it to your website and send them the media file. So you can definitely attach a link to a photo. If it’s a photo that is so over the top good, that it should be on the cover of a major magazine. If you don’t have a photo that’s that quality, I would not include it with your pitch, because you don’t wanna give the editor another reason to say no. You don’t want them to like your pitch, and then wanna know if you have a photo to support it. You wanna give them the opportunity to ask you about that. So unless your photo is really, really fantastic, I would not necessarily recommend sending it at the pitch stage. Let them know you have photos available, and they can follow up with you.

Marina asks, “What if the signatures have text and link only?” Yeah, I think yours probably looks like mine, and that’s correct. So you wanna have your signature be, you know, like Gabby Logan, freelance, you know, travel journalist and author www.gabbylogan.com. Like that’s what your signature should be when you pitch editors. That’s it.

So I’ve noticed a lot of people have, even someone emailed me the other day, they have the logo of the travel writing association that they’re in. They have that logo underneath their signature. And editors just won’t open your emails like that. It’s not that they don’t want to, it’s they can’t. They have internal policies about spam and hacks and things like that. They just can’t open them.

So the other two on here, “So for content marketing, can you just pitch a company that you wanna do a piece like this?” No, unfortunately, you need to have a full contract with them that you’re doing different types of stuff, and you can suggest this as part of your contract. And I’ve had a couple people that I coach, and maybe like some other people that have done one off calls with me, who are doing content marketing stuff where they kind of like got in with a company through an ad or something like that, but they don’t necessarily have a contract. And I can tell you, it’s really crazy, it’s amazing. When you have a contract from the beginning, the engagement lasts longer, it goes better, like all this stuff.

I’m sitting next to somebody who writes for me right now, and I’m sure she’s gonna be like, “I should get a contract with Gabby.” So for editorial websites, that’s another one that you would send them a pitch. Now, there’s a lot of editorial websites out there that will tell you, “Oh yeah, send me the piece and I’ll look at it and decide if I wanna publish it.” F that. If a newspaper says that, they have a reason, they have a legal reason, and you getting a clip there would be great. If a website says that, tell them, “I’m sorry. I don’t write on spec for whatever your tiny, tiny budget is.” And you can say, you know, like how much would you potentially pay for the eventual piece to find out whether it’d be worth your time? But by and large, the websites that don’t know enough about how to read pitches to know if they would be interested in your story from the pitch are the ones that are not worth your time.

So Patricia had a great question with the structure that I wanted to come back to. She said, “How do you determine what background to use?” And I love that question, because it’s the whole point of this postcard piece is that it should be narrow. So you should only give as much background as space allows, right? That piece on the Portugal, the octopus, that one there was more space to talk about the tone. But the one about Lisbon, there wasn’t more space to talk about Lisbon outside of her neighborhood. And she was really talking about, like, the physical things of her neighborhood, the lifestyle of the people in her neighborhood. So the only background that you should include is the background that is needed to understand why the audience that’s receiving this pitch should care.

So it has to be tied into your audience, or not this pitch, rather reading this piece. So I talk about this tons and tons and tons in our idea fest program online, which is also in our live events that the audience dictates what you choose to add into the piece. So in the case of that Lisbon one, it was for people who might be thinking of moving abroad and want somewhere with a very interesting atmosphere, a great lifestyle for not a lot of money. The octopus piece was for a U.S. publication where why would these people go all the way there just for octopus? You have to give them some more. You can’t tell them just about the octopus, you have to show them what else they can do in that place. So that’s why that one had a little more.

Okay, cool. So it seems like there’s not any more questions. So I will let you guys get going.

So thank you guys so much for joining me. And I’m gonna get back to chatting about the travel magazine database with my colleague here in London. I hope the rest of you guys have a great rest of your week. Bye.

Article Nuts and Bolts: How to Put Together a Basket of Kittens Feature Transcript

Download (PDF, 261KB)

Let’s go ahead and dig in. This week, we are continuing our “Article Nuts and Bolts” series with a basket of kittens. Now, some of you guys may have heard me talk about the concept of the basket of kittens before. We’re gonna elaborate on it today. And I mentioned it earlier in the “Article Nuts and Bolts” series and we had the first batch of these in February. We talked about front of book roundups. This week, both in the webinar I’m doing now which is rescheduled from last week and the webinar that we’re gonna have after this, we’re gonna be talking about roundups that are more feature-length. So we’re looking at not even just, you know, a 700-word or a 1,000-word, but we’re looking more at 1500-word long baskets of kittens.

So for the purposes of today’s webinar, we’re really looking at longer pieces and how those are different than roundups that you might do in the front of the book. So I just threw out a lot of terms there. I’ll define some of those for those of you who haven’t, you know, done a lot of digging into magazines and how they’re put together. So I mentioned roundup. Roundup is something that you might also be familiar with from doing blogs or other work like that, but a roundup is where you have an article that consists of several almost mini articles. Sometimes, they’re just a paragraph, sometimes they’re multiple paragraphs, but you have rounded up the usual suspects, so to say. You’ve rounded up several different facets of the same type of concept.

So we’re going to look at how you put those together, but that’s what a roundup is and it has different iterations. Today, we’re gonna be looking, in this webinar, at roundups that are composed of several different paragraphs or sections, as the case may be, on individual items, and you’ll see more in practice what I mean when we get into the examples, but we’re looking at a roundup where you have, for instance, five sections and each of those sections focuses on one thing as opposed to a different type of roundup where you have five different sections and each of those sections talks about a lot of different things.

So what I mean by that is that a roundup where you’ve got five different sections talking about a lot of different things might be a city guide for Portland, Oregon, for instance, where I am now, and it might say, in each of different sections, one section might be places to eat. One might be cocktail bars. One might be festivals. One might be shopping, and one might be food tours or something like that. And in the food tour section, they’re gonna mention very quickly anywhere from, you know, 2 to 5 to 15 different food tours. Whereas in the type of roundup that we’re gonna look at in this webinar, when they say food tours, they would just talk about one food tour, or you might have a whole article about food tours and it’ll talk about five different food tours but each of those food tours has one section.

So like I said, the difference will be a little more clear when we get into looking at the individual articles themselves, but I just wanted to make sure that you guys knew that right now, and we’re talking about these articles where you dig in deep into a handful of things. And later, we’re gonna talk about features where you talk about a lot, a lot, a lot of different stuff in one space and how you make that contiguous, how you make that not just be kind of a boring list for your readers.

So as I mentioned, we’re talking about the basket of kittens type feature today, but I want to elaborate quite a bit on what basket of kittens means and where that concept came from and why you should care because this is one of those things where it’s a term that editors use or even if they have a different word for it, it’s a concept that editors think of that a lot of writers don’t think of their roundups in this particular vein. And you have to start thinking not just of your roundups, but of all of your articles like editors do, if you want to have success with your pitches and with your eventual pieces.

Something that I mentioned in the blog post and the news that are going out about today’s webinars was that we really started this “Article Nuts and Bolts” series because of several different instances that I see happening really commonly with people and their articles. And some of those have to do with being afraid to pitch an article in the first place because you’re not sure how you’ll write it when you get assigned, or taking a very, very, very, very long amount of time to put your article together and then wondering if it’s even the right way before you submit it to your editor, but a much bigger issue to me because it really sucks when it happens is when people take a lot of time to work on their article, and then they file it, and then one of three things happens.

There’s either absolute radio silence from the editor, like, in perpetuity. They’ve just ghosted you. Or they kill the article. As in, you turn it in and they say, “Oh, we can’t use this.” Or they send it back to you with an amount of edits that’s essentially causing you to rewrite the piece from scratch. So these instances always stem from the same thing. They stem from a gross, like huge disconnect, not gross as in disgusting, between what you’ve conceptualized the piece to be and what your editor needs, wants, imagined the piece to be.

Now, these things happen when you pitch the piece, of course, but they’re much worse when they happen after you’ve filed the article for two reasons. One, because you’ve already written it so you have a sunk cost thing or you feel like you put a lot of time into it, but secondly, because when you pitch something and it’s not exactly in line with what the editor is looking for, they expect that. But when you’ve already written a whole piece, they expect that you have written the piece in line with what you imagine the editor publishes, in line with what you see in the magazine.

And so when you file a story that’s very different than what the editor would expect, it’s showing them that you don’t do your homework, that you don’t do your research. And it’s very easy to feel like you have copied exactly what’s in the magazine. You’ve copied their style. You’ve copied their format. You know, you’ve done it exactly like what you saw, but there’s all sorts of issues you can run into there. It might be that the particular article that you copied, the format that you copied, was one that the editor didn’t like or one that was written by the editorial assistant that wasn’t very good, or one that was done by a different editor and now there’s a new editor and she doesn’t want it that way. There’s all these different ways that you can go wrong.

So the reason that we’re doing this whole “Article Nuts and Bolts” series in the first place is so that you have a really firm grounding in the expectations of different types of articles. Obviously, different magazines will have different tone and different things like that, but various types of articles in terms of their structure and their format always come out the same. This is the kind of stuff that they teach you in journalism school, that you can, you know, learn yourself by reading a lot of articles and comparing them to each other and dissecting the structure like you would do if you were in school. But it’s the kind of thing that a lot of people don’t know before they go into pitching pieces. And so they either will just put off pitching those pieces, or like I said, they’ll get into an issue where they’ve written it in the way that they think it should be written but it’s not what the editor is expecting.

So this “basket of kittens” term and concept is something that’s really specific to the way that editors think that I want you guys to start thinking about as well because it makes all the difference in your roundups. And roundups are something that editors get a lot of pitches for, like really a lot. And it’s because roundups are very prevalent in blog posts. You know, seven things you need to know before you rent a villa in Italy, or, you know, five stops to consider on your personal Portland food cart tour. Roundups are all over the internet because they’re very clickbaity. They’re very, you know, the type of things that people want to look at and see, “Oh, do I know all of these already?” Or like, “Oh, great. This will give me a lot of different options for what I’m trying to figure out.”

So editors get a lot of pitches for these from people who aren’t used to writing for magazines, but the pitches that they tend to get, the way that the roundups are put together for the web is very different and less rigorous than what a magazine means. And what that comes down to is the fact that for it to be in a magazine instead of on a blog, it needs to come up to a different standard of reporting, and that’s really what we’re gonna talk about with this whole basket-of-kittens concept today.

So we’re gonna go in-depth into how to create the perfect basket of kittens because, like I said, there’s a big difference between the ones that you would write whether for your own blog or another blog or that you might see on Huffington Post and the type of basket of kittens that appears in print. And a lot of that comes down to the very simple fact of how you choose the items that go into that basket of kittens in the first place way before you even get to the writing or the research, but just which topics you choose.

So I can tell you, because I ridiculously track all of my time, that when I used to do a lot of these basket of kittens types features, that in terms of the hours that I spent on the piece, it would probably be about, let’s say, 15% to 25% of that time was just choosing and going back and forth with my editor about which things would be in there. And then another 25% was doing interviews, and then the remaining 50% was writing the piece, but that’s a huge chunk of time that’s just on what goes in there, and there’s a reason for that. We’re gonna spend a lot of time looking at why that is.

Now, then we’re gonna talk about where these types of features appear and how that’s different than what we talked about early on in this “Article Nuts and Bolts” series which was the front of the book. And again, front of book, for those of you guys who aren’t familiar, front of book is the part of the magazine that comes before the features. So today, we’re talking about features. And like I said, those are gonna be around 1,500 words usually for this type of article, but we looked in the past at front of book roundups and those can be as short as 200, 300, sometimes 500 words. And those are written very differently that the type of roundups that we’re gonna look at today because when you have front of book roundups, those, like I said, have so few words available and you need to cover so many different things that you end up sharing very little information and you have to be very diligent about what you choose to share in terms of the information you share in the front of book roundups.

Whereas in these feature-length basket of kitten roundups, you have a lot more latitude to share information, but you still have to be very choosy, and that involves being very closely tied into the whole purpose, the unifying factor of the items in your basket of kittens. Lee has a great question here about, is this the same as a listicle? So I don’t think people use the listicle term for magazine articles quite so much as they do for web articles, but that being said, I do think that you would call this perhaps a listicle. The thing is that in magazines, another thing that we, as writers, don’t often think about is that the editor never thinks of an article just as your words. We think just of the words because that’s what we’re responsible for, but when an editor is commissioning an article, they think of how it looks on the page.

So actually, as I’m talking about this, let me open up a different magazine, not a magazine that I was gonna use today, but just a different magazine to give you guys a sense of what I’m talking about here. So like I was saying, editors think about how an article is gonna look on the page rather than just the content which is the kind of thing that we think about. And so that means that for the editor, when they think of a listicle, they’re thinking of an article that when you look at it, appears as a numbered list. It appears as like one, two, three, four, five, blah, blah, blah.

But with the type of roundups that we’re talking about right now, it’s much more common to think of it like a type of article where there are subheads. Like a lot of articles on the web have subheads, of course, like blog posts and things like that, but articles online don’t tend to have subheads in quite the same way in terms of features. Features often will just go and go and go and go, and maybe they’ll have little breaks and things like that in between, but they won’t have separate subheads where the focus of the article changes completely every time there’s a subhead. But you do sometimes have longer features which are, you know, 52 places to go in 2018 or something like that.

So that is the type of magazine feature that would be more of a listicle, and that’s actually more the kind of thing that we’re gonna talk about in the webinar after this, but I did find something here in Hemispheres which is an example, kind of, of what I mean in answer to Lee’s question. So let me just change the screen over quickly and look at that. So the difference here…okay, this is the opening page of this article here. Sorry, it’s a little hard to read. So this is the “Three Perfect Days in London.”

So here in this “Three Perfect Days in London,” “Three Perfect Days,” if you’re not familiar, Hemispheres is the United Airlines magazine, and every issue, they do this “Three Perfect Days” type story. So here, they’ve got day one. And then on day one, they go through all of the different things to do, but see, there’s no break up in here where it says, you know, “9:00, do this, 10:00 do this.” It’s very narrative style. And so it goes through day one. It keeps going through day one. Keeps going through day one. And then we get to day two. And then, again, a narrative style.

He talks about what he did on his second day here. So this is the type of article where even though there’s a numeric basis for it, it still goes as if there’s miniature articles on day one, day two, and day three, about what he’s doing in London. So this is more the type of thing that we’re looking at now. Whereas what Lee was asking about is the type of thing where you might have 177 islands in the Mediterranean to visit this summer. And each of those islands is gonna have like one sentence, maybe two sentences, something very short about that thing. And so that’s more the type of thing that we’re gonna talk in the webinar after this, which I called sort of city guide articles, but that also applies to those more listicle type things that Lee was talking about.

Okay, so let me get back over to the slides. So then at the end of the webinar today, the last thing that we’re gonna talk about is just how to pitch these types of pieces. 

First of all, a basket of kittens. What a weird concept. This is my favorite basket of kittens picture, not because the kittens are particularly adorable or because it’s actually a basket underneath, but because this really shows the ideal components of a basket of kittens. So the concept of the basket of kittens, the name for it, came from an editor and former freelance writer, she kind of goes back and forth between editing and freelance writing, who I know and respect and she’s just a really lovely person in addition to a highly skilled writer and editor.

And she first taught it to me. She, at the time, was working at “Every Day with Rachael Ray.” Her name is Abbie Kozolchyk. She’s not with “Every Day with Rachael Ray” anymore, but she was in a position there that actually had been created for her specifically around her. This is the type of person who is so good at what she does that very, very major newsstand magazines will create a position for her.

So she told me or she actually told a number of people, this was at a workshop, that editors like the New York type editors who are really intimidating, who, you know, will respond to your emails in all lowercase and constantly seem upset with you, those type of editors are always, always looking for baskets of kittens. The reason is, as she put it, and if you’re a dog person, please imagine this as a basket of puppies. I know some people have a very averse reaction to cats, I’m not sure why. But if you prefer dogs, imagine it as a basket of puppies.

So the way that she put it is, “Who can refuse a basket of kittens? Because, well, one kitten is cute…” You know, and if you have ever seen various cat photos or videos online, you know that they catch cats in their most adorable moments, but cats are…you know, they’re not always the cutest. You know, they’re perfectly adorable, but they’re not always doing cute things. So like one cat, one kitten, one puppy, whatever animal you need for this comparison, can be ignored. Like, you know, if there’s a cat or a baby or a puppy or whatever in front of you doing adorable things, it’s possible to ignore that and go back to what you’re working on. But if there’s a whole basket, if there’s a whole bunch of them sitting there doing adorable things and looking at you with their kitten or puppy or baby eyes or whatever, how can you ignore a basket of kittens?

So that’s the idea, that editors love baskets of kittens because there’s just so much good stuff in there that you can’t ignore them. And it’s not that the editor can’t ignore them, it’s that their readers, their audience also can’t ignore them. So to go back to what Lee said about listicles, this is why you very often see on the cover of newsstand magazines things like, you know, the classic Cosmo, 72 ways to fire up your sex life or something like that. That’s why these numbers, these roundup type things, tend to be mentioned on the cover of the magazine because just like online, they’re the type of things that people really want to look at. People want to look at them because even if they know about a topic, they want to see if there’s something that they don’t already know. People want to look at them because it seems like they could learn a lot about a topic in one place. And most importantly, people want to look at it because if there’s that many options, it seems like even if some of them won’t apply to the individual reader, some of them will. So they’re likely to get something out of it even if there’s other things in there that they’re not interested in.

Now, this is really important in terms of features because if you think about it, and especially for those of you who’ve joined us for the earlier webinars in this series, in the front of the book, in the beginning of the magazine, and all of the things before the features, there’s a lot of really short articles that cover a very diverse range of topics. And the idea of this is to catch the attention of a lot of different readers. That’s the whole goal of having that front of book, lots of short pieces that cover lots of different things. It’s so that there is something for everyone.

But then what happens is that in the feature section, there tend to be, depending on the magazine, let’s say, you know, two or three to five to seven long articles, and we think of them in terms of word count. We think of a feature as being somewhere, these days, between say 1,200 and 3,000 words or something like that, but in terms of pages, these articles are going anywhere from 6 to sometimes 12 or 15 pages. They take up a lot of pages. So if you are an editor or a reader and you have something that takes up that many pages that is very narrow and not necessarily going to be interesting to every reader, that’s a gamble. So if you are sitting on an airplane and, you know, the plane is taking off. You really need to work on your laptop. You don’t have anything you want to do on your phone. Can’t take your laptop out yet. So you take out the airline magazine and you start flipping. If you get to the features and there’s 5, 7, 12 pages of something you’re totally not interested in, then you might just put that magazine away if you have to flip for that many pages and you just don’t see anything that’s interesting to you.

So having a basket-of-kittens as a feature, not just in the front of the book, is very appealing to an editor because it means that in that feature area where there’s a lot of pages in a row that might be too specific in some features for most readers, you can instead have something where it’s gonna appeal to different people. Even if they don’t like something on one page, they’ll turn the page and they’re still in the same feature article. There’s something else that might grab their attention.

So this is different from features that might be a profile feature. They might be a narrative first-person feature. This is different from features that really take place in one location and only talk about one type of thing. So for instance, it could be, you know…I think of the classic Condé Nast style feature where, you know, the writer goes and rents a villa in Tuscany or Spain or France or whatever for the week and talks about what they did there. Or there was one recently that we looked at in another webinar where the writer had gone to Japan to figure out if the new Hyatt hotels was interesting as a stay as the old-fashioned ryokan style hospitality.

If you’re never gonna go to Japan and you don’t care a ton about what type of hotel you stay in, if you’re somebody who’s more of an experiential traveler, you like food tours and you like getting out and meeting with locals, that whole feature might just not appeal to you. So this is where the basket-of-kittens concept really comes in, but I told you when we first went to this slide, and again, for those of you who prefer puppies to kittens, I apologize that these kittens have been staring at you for several minutes.

For the reason I, at the beginning of this slide, said I love this picture. I was so happy when I found it because it’s the perfect display of the basket-of-kittens concept. So tell me, you guys, look at this basket. And I know that we’ve used this on a past webinar, so some of you might already know the answer, but look at this basket of kittens and tell me what strikes you about this picture when you look at these kittens? And please, no obvious kitten answers, but when you look at these kittens, what do you notice about the particular kittens that have been chosen to be included in this picture?

Okay, great. We’ve got a couple different answers here that are about their eyes, different focuses, different colors. I’m just blowing my nose in the background. So if you don’t have sound for a second, don’t freak out. There’s about a 17 second delay between me and you guys. So I’m just blowing my nose while I’m waiting to hear from you guys. So let us know again, what differences you see. Some people have mentioned color, markings. That’s a great one. What else do you notice about these kittens?

Great, super interesting answers here, and I love that some people talked about where the kittens’ eyes are looking. Can you imagine this poor photographer trying to get all the kittens to look at the same place at once? So a lot of people had mentioned the differences and some people had mentioned the similarities, and that is really what I wanted you guys to notice here. So if you’ll actually…I don’t think anybody mentioned this, but if you…I’m glad some people like it. So I was really worried you guys might be like a dog crowd and then you’d be upset to have kittens staring at you for so long.

So something that I’m not sure anybody quite mentioned is that if you actually look and almost make like a little ruler in your mind, the kittens’ faces are almost all exactly the same size even when we account for the fact that the ones in the back will automatically be a little bit smaller because of perspective. So I love this picture because it’s so perfect in terms of, I’m just gonna flip to the next slide and flip back, this idea of the Set game. We’re gonna look at this in a minute and we’re gonna talk about it, but the idea with the basket of kittens is that you want to have, for each possible variable, you want everyone in your basket to be either the same or different. So this idea of the game of Set, let me know in the chat box, you guys, whoever has played this game before so I know how much detail I need to go into.

So the game of Set, you have these different cards and they have four different variables. The variables are color. So you’ll see on the first example here, there’s purple, red, and green. That’s one variable. The second variable is shape. You’ll see in the second example here that there’s diamonds, there’s a squiggle, and then there’s these cylinders. The third variable is filling. You’ll see also in this second one here that there is…the middle one is completely filled in. The first one has sort of like a strike-through shading, and the third one is completely empty. And then the fourth variable is number. So you’ll see here in the second as well as the third example here that you’ve got one, two, or three different items on here. So there’s four different variables.

So let’s go back to our kittens and let’s look at how this plays out. So first of all, we’ve got a basket of small animals and they’re all kittens. Right? Check. They’re all the same, they’re all kittens. Secondly, the kittens are all…Marilyn said that game is like Uno. Uno has different directions on different cards. Set is about looking at the cards in front of you and finding a match. I’ll go back to the Set in a second and show you how it works, but I wanted to just go back to these kittens for a second.

So they’re all in the basket. None of these kittens are outside the basket, all of the kittens are in the basket. So they’re all located in the same place. So they’re all the same general type of thing. They’re all located in the same place. Next, they’re all the same size like I mentioned. See, the kittens’ head width is almost…the gray one here in the front is a little bit bigger, but otherwise, they’re all basically the exact same size. They’ve all got their ears perked exactly the same way. And then some people mentioned they’re all kind of at least trying for the best that the photographer can do to look at us. So there’s all these different ways where they’re exactly the same.

And what happens is the fact that all of these elements have been kept consistent, allows us to better focus on, understand, and appreciate their differences. Okay? So what that means is some people had mentioned different colors, somebody else had mentioned different markings. I really like that as well. So you’ll see here that, obviously, this one in the front lower right is dark gray. And then we’ve got…it actually goes around in a color palette. Nobody mentioned this, but this is another thing that I love about this photo. Is that we’ve got the very dark gray, and then next to that one, we’ve got the one that’s the gray with a little bit of brown and a little bit of white, but it carries over the gray. And then we go from this little bit of brown kind of…I’m not quite sure what you would call that color, like ginger color, I guess, that’s in the nose and around the eyes of the front left side kitten. And then in the back, we’ve got this full ginger kitten. And then that one goes into the one that’s like part ginger with a little bit of white.

See? So there’s actually a gradient of colors going on here, and then of course, as people had mentioned, they also have different markings. So the fact that they’re all the same size, all posed the same way, allows us to really appreciate this color gradient that’s going on here. If the kittens were all over the place in this photo, if the kittens were different sizes, different ages, looking in different places, there would be so much going on in the photo that our attention wouldn’t be drawn to this nice gradient here. So that’s really what you want to make sure to do in that selection process.

Remember, I talked about how with a basket of kittens article, it’s really like 25% of your time, maybe less than that, 15% to 25% of your time is on the selection because the selection, the balance between the different items in your basket is so important. So here, again, is those key components that, first and foremost, the concept of the basket of kittens. The reason editors love it is that all of the things in it are just as adorable and just as interesting, but then they have to be united in certain ways in order for the differences to be noticed and important but not overwhelming. But the next thing here is why we’re gonna get into the Set example, that the balance is important. It’s the mix of diversity and similarity, but you notice how they’re all diverse here. None of these cats, kittens, are the same colors. Each of them is an absolutely different color. Each of them have different markings. There’s not two gray cats and then two that are different because that would upset the balance. Okay?

So let’s pop over for a second. I know only a couple of you are familiar with the Set game. So I want to pop over and show you how it works so that you can understand because this is really the key, the fundamental aspect of understanding how to put together a really proper basket, your correct balance of kittens. And the thing is, like I said, this idea of the balance of the basket is really what is gonna set you apart to an editor in terms of understanding how she thinks about this because she has to think about this diversity. She has to think about bringing in different readers, but she also has to think about not overwhelming them. She has to think about making sure that what the article is about is very clear to them.

One of the main things the editors complain about in their pitches is they don’t think that the editor knows what the…sorry, that the writer who has sent the pitch understands what her piece is about. So editors look at your pitches, and from those, you know, 150, 300 words that you send them, and especially if you send them more words, they think this writer doesn’t know what they’re pitching me. So by making a perfect balance in the things that you include in your basket of kittens roundup pitch, the editor understands that you have authority over this subject. You have authority over the concept of writing, of putting together a piece and it creates instant trust.

So again, this is the rules of Set. Like I told you, you want to match the color, the number, the shading, but let’s look at the actual game. So somebody had mentioned, “Is this like Uno?” And I said no because the thing is that you need to create the perfect set. So what you’ll see here is that we’ve got a green that’s got three and four. A green that’s shaded of, again, three, and a green that’s empty three, and those create a set. This one has three that are all the same shape, all the same shading, but different number. That’s a set. Same for this one.

So these are all sets that are like those kittens. They’re very, very similar, but here, I want to show you the type of set that’s a little more like what you’re gonna do in your pieces. We’ve got a diamond which is a single diamond and shaded, and then we’ve got these squiggles that are empty, and then we’ve got these three bars that are full. So these are ones that are all totally different. This is more similar to what you’re gonna be doing with your articles. I know it’s kind of a weird concept, so bear with me, but the idea is that as you are doing your articles, you need to be 100% balanced on making sure that each of the things you’ve included in your basket of kittens is actually different in that characteristic, in that variable.

So here, we said there’s four variables. So what might that mean for an article? It might mean that you’re doing a roundup, and I’m gonna take an example that’s kind of like the one that I’m gonna show you in a minute. But it might mean that you’re doing a roundup feature where all of the things that you’re showing have to be in a certain geographic area. Okay? So they all have to be in the United States. So that’s one variable. But then another variable is their more specific location, what state they’re in. Okay? Then another variable might be what the topic is, generally. So let’s say that they’re gonna be food tours, but then the next variable which is related to that might be what type of food. It could be coffee, it could be beer, it could be sweets, it could be, you know, fine dining. So those can be four variables for a random feature that you’re doing which is on food tours.

So again, so this has four variables. We’ve got the color and the shading. So that could be that they’re all food tours, but that they’re different types of food tours. And then we’ve got the number and the shape, and that could be that they’re all in the United States, but that they’re all gonna be in different locations. So let me know if that makes sense. Okay, I took another sneeze break. It seems like at least one of you has got it. So hopefully, this is making sense to most of you.

So again, the reason I’m harping so much on this is that with these basket of kittens pieces, both in your pitch and in writing the article, the writing is almost secondary to making sure you have a really solid creation in the first place. But that doesn’t mean the writing doesn’t matter. So hold on, Jade’s got a question here. It makes sense but it seems like it’s not easy to come up with the right terms, i.e., it’s easy to mess this up with other type of pitches. That’s very interesting. So with all of these types of articles, how do you know what you’re pitching?

I see very often that pitches the editors get have, you know, a topic, but they don’t outline what the type of piece is that they’re pitching. You know, so somebody might have gone to…I think I’ve been using this example a lot lately, but I’ll just use it again. Somebody might have gone to Rwanda and done a very special experience with gorillas in Rwanda where they have hiked, you know, perhaps eight hours to get to see the gorillas. The slide before this one is the components. I hope that’s the one you want, Lee. So somebody might have gone to Rwanda to see these different gorillas.

So I see people pitch editors where they just talk about this experience, but the editor doesn’t know what the piece is. Is it a narrative piece where they talk in first person about their experience in a chronological way? Is it a profile piece on the company? Is it a piece where they’re rounding up the different types of companies that can take you there and comparing them to different pieces or comparing them to each other? Is it a story where they are talking about, perhaps for a bit, in first person, about this Rwandan gorilla experience, but then they also have a component where they’re comparing it to other gorilla hikes in other countries?

So not specifying very clearly in your pitch the format that you’re pitching is one of these things that makes editors say, “I don’t think this writer knows what they’re pitching me.” Or, “I don’t think this writer knows what the piece is about.” So this is one of those things that can be very confusing to you as a writer, is that you’re like, “Well, I know what this piece is about. It’s about these Rwandan gorillas.” But what the editor is really saying is, “How does this look on the page? Like what article are you really pitching me?”

So singing very clearly in your pitch, “I am pitching you a roundup with five sections each covering a different type of food tour,” that is crucial to have in your pitch. And what if you don’t know what type of story that editor wants? Well, that’s why we have the Travel Magazine Database. That’s really why we started it, so that you don’t have to think about, you know, what type of shape should the story be? What type of story might this editor want? You just look at the database or you look at the magazine and you see what type of stories is the editor already publishing in this section?

Yeah, Marissa, so we’re gonna look at a piece, in just one second, I’m gonna talk about how the components of the piece are put together. And then you’ll have a better sense of this. So I hopefully answered Jade’s question, and Marissa’s question, we’re getting into now. So like I said, in an earlier webinar, we looked really in-depth at how these pieces work in a front of book format. So in those short pieces that come early on in the magazine, but what about in a feature? How are they different? So I spent a lot of time talking about Set and about the basket of kittens and these things, but as I mentioned, in a feature, the selection of your basket is really one of the paramount things. And part of it is so that you can show, in your pitch and in the eventual peace, authority, so that you can show the editor and the reader that you really understand this topic and that you’re giving them the best information, but also so that you can give them different options.

So a couple of things on this. Once you’ve been assigned a piece, it’s always useful to ask your editor what parts of this balance? So Jade was saying, how do you figure out what characteristics to take in account? Ask your editor because your editor knows what’s important to them. And if they don’t, then they should think about it, or they’ll just give you a piece that they’ve done in the past that they like. And this is something that I really like to always ask an editor that I’m working with for the first time, first section that has repeating formats. I like to always ask them, you know, to say like, “I’ve looked at a couple back issues, but is there a specific article in this department in this section that you really like that I should use as an example for myself?” Because you don’t want to get into a situation where you are copying an article that you’ve seen in the magazine, but it’s one that the editor didn’t like. You don’t want to do that.

So it’s always great to ask the editor. They might, you know, say anyone or something like that, but you need to preface it by saying, you know, “I’ve looked at some back issues, but is there one you really like?” Because you don’t want them to just think that you’re asking them to do the work for you. You want them to see it as you really value their opinion and their insights. Okay? So then as you’re doing the mix, as you’re choosing the characteristics for your basket, here are a couple different ones to take into account: geography, type of business, diversity of characters.

So this might mean that as you were covering in each section of your roundup different businesses, that you want to choose ones that have been started in different ways. So maybe one was started by a couple as a passion project. Maybe one was started by the city government. Maybe one is an offshoot of a large corporation. This is another different type of variable that you can look at. Okay? So in each of those sections, you almost have a mini-article in and of itself.

So I’m actually gonna go now to a piece, to show you a piece, and then we’ll come back and go through each of these things here because I feel like I’ve been talking at you for a really long time and I want to show you an example so you can see the type of thing that we are talking about here. Okay? So I’ve got two that are actually by me that are in this format that I’ve pulled up for you guys, and one of the reasons that I’m using some pieces that I wrote today is that I used to write so many of these. I would write like not a hundred a year, but I would write dozens and dozens of these pieces every year. So I really spent a lot of time writing this particular type of piece, so that’s why I’m showing you guys some articles that I’ve done today.

So let’s switch screens, and we’ll have a look at some of those. So I’ve actually got two different food-focused pieces for you today. So I’m not gonna read through the whole article like we usually do because, as I mentioned, and what we’re gonna really dig into right now is that each of these mini-sections in these roundup features is like an article in and of itself. So what I want to show you in these two articles that we’re gonna break down today is how that basket-of-kittens concept translates over, and then how I put together a single section in each of these articles.

So this one is called “Taste the Heartland.” So this is part of a package. So a package means several different articles that are related. It’s very common to have roundup features that are part of a package. So that listicle type thing that Lee had asked about earlier or where you see, you know, like on Cosmo, 77 ways to spice up your sex life, if you’ve ever opened an article on the newsstand or a magazine on the newsstand to find that article, you’re usually disappointed because it’s not one article with 77 ways. The magazine has 10 articles on each of them say a different number of ways. That’s usually how these packages of many, many, many roundups are created.

And so what happens is that I used to have to do these packages where I would have, for instance, the Heartland, which is like central part of the U.S. that’s a bit west of the Midwest, weirdly, and I would have all the states in the Heartland and I would have three articles. And I would have two have each state mentioned twice among these three articles and cover, you know, five to seven different locations on these five to tell them different topics. So I would do all this research to figure out, how do I balance these different things among these articles? And then once that’s set, I start to do the interviews. And then I start to do the writing.

So what that means is that this piece that you see here, this “Taste the Heartlands,” this has five things that have been selected and it hasn’t just been balanced within this piece, but it’s actually also been balanced to two or maybe even three other pieces in this whole package. So we’ve got here, I’m gonna open the second page in another tab so we can switch over easily. So we’ve got here for this Heartland’s piece and then I’ve also got one pulled up which is “Culinary Experiences in the Carolinas.” So this is a smaller area, this is just in one state.

But what we’ve got in both of these pieces is an automatic geographic distribution. They all have to be in the Heartlands, but they all have to be in different states. So you’ll see here, the first one is in Wisconsin. We’ve got something in Michigan. I’ve got something in Missouri, something in Iowa, and something in Minneapolis, Minnesota. But then beyond that, we know that they’re all food experiences, but they’re all gonna be different. So this one is a barbecue tour. This one is a French Icarian Village. What does that mean? It’s like one of these historic settlements, and it has a food-focused experience.

This one is another food tour, but unlike the barbecue tours, this one is a general food tour about the whole city. Here, another food blog, but this one, rather than being about a city or a specific type of food, this one is about agriculture, agritourism, and it goes into a large area of the lakefront. And then this one here, again, is a place, but this one is a cheesemaking center. So I do have three things in here, like I said, that are food tours, but they’re all quite different. So what’s unified these is that they’re all in experience, they’re all something that you can do in a couple hours or an afternoon, but they’re cheese, they’re agriculture, they’re barbecue, they’re ethnic heritage of a city, they are…what’s the last one? Oh, they’re historic food heritage of an area.

So that’s the way that these different characteristics balance in this piece. And then in this Carolina piece that I’ve got, they’re all in the Carolinas, but we’ve got both North and South Carolinas. So we’ve got Charlotte, North Carolina, Asheville, North Carolina. In this second one, whenever it gets to us, we’ve got Greenville, South Carolina, Charleston, South Carolina. So we’ve got two for each Carolina, so that’s perfectly balanced. And then we’ve got different major cities in each Carolina as well. This one, we’ve got…it’s a fine dining food tour. This one is a culinary tour of Charleston. So it’s like a celebrity chef tour. This one we’ve got is a cooking class with a chef. Oh sorry, this one is cooking class with a chef, and this one is a foraging tour. So again, they’re all food experiences. They’re all something that you can do in a couple hours, but they all have a different take on what a food experience is.

So for instance, I wouldn’t have two foraging tours, or I wouldn’t have two cooking classes unless there was something quite different about them. Okay? So let’s look at one individual piece here. So in the background for this magazine that I want to give you just so you can understand what’s in here, is that this is a magazine which is for group tour operators. So it’s people who, for various reasons, are organizing a tour for a group of people and they would be reading this magazine to get ideas either about maybe where to take their tours, maybe different things to include in their tours, maybe advice on how to run their tours.

So when we do a piece like this, so right now, we have the Heartlands package, right? This might be read by people who are doing tours in that area or thinking about doing tours in that area and they’re saying, “Oh, okay. So let me see if I can find some new food experiences to include on my tours.” Or, “I hadn’t thought about having food experiences before.” But the end result is that this is for an audience of people who is not just looking to take a tour, but is looking to include a tour, include a food experience, on a larger itinerary that they’re already doing.

So let’s take a look at one specific thing here, but for a second, I want to go back at the slides. Jade says she’s written about that Asheville foraging tour. Yeah, it’s really cool and I was really bummed. I was supposed to go on it one time and my…the person I was traveling with kind of screwed up our schedule and I missed the foraging tour and I was very bummed. So I think I’ve been like blacklisted from them, but he’s a very interesting guy.

So each of the sections, in each kitten, let’s say, each individual element of these pieces, has its own mini-article. It’s got a lead. We say why the editor cares. We give the background on how it was created. We flesh out the offerings, and we give service information. Okay? So how does that work for these pieces? So let’s look at this guy. I’m highlighting him because I haven’t taken his story yet, but he’s really great. So I’m giving him a little publicity here. So this is a really kind of interesting, slightly…you know, the type of person who runs a food tour that just has a lot of character. So he has been leading wine food and history tours in Europe. And then he moved his base of operations from Detroit to west Michigan to take advantage of the lakefront’s natural beauty, but he realized how unique the area’s offerings were, not only in the United States but the world, and began offering food and farm tours of his area.

So this is a great establishment of why this reader cares. You might be like, “West Michigan.” Like these people are coming to see Chicago, like, why would I take them there? He explains very clearly that this guy has been leading tours in like the top areas in Europe. And when he moved to this area, he was so struck that it was on par, not only with what’s in the United States, but also on what he sees when he’s in Europe, and he had to start leading tourists there. So that’s the lead and that’s also the why the reader cares.

And then we go into a little more background from him about why that matters. Well, also expanding on what it is that he does. So the arts present makes it a really idyllic place. Geen said of the lakefront that he promotes, is the second-most agriculturally diverse region in the country due to its diverse mix of orchards, farms, wineries, and cheese producers. His goal is to provide “the hands-on personalized experience of meeting niche producers and winery owners, so visitors get the impact of the whole region being the food center of Lake Michigan.”

So you’ll notice here that I use not one but two quotes. And when you do these roundups for magazines, one of the big things that makes them really different from a roundup for the web is that you need to have an interview. And these interviews can take 10 or 15 minutes, but you need to get those quotes to include. And one of the big reasons is to say something like this. I, as the writer couldn’t say this, that the arts present makes it an idyllic place. I could say this thing, you know, the hands-on personalized experience of meeting niche blah, blah, blah, but it’s much better to have it coming from him.

Anything that has a subjective element, like, makes it really this or this is really great, you always want to have somebody else say that. It’s also really great if you can have somebody else say the why, say why they are doing that. Okay? So in this part, I’ve expanded on why the reader cares while also giving some background on what he does and why he got into it. This is kind of the origin story, so to say. When you do these roundup type pieces, it tends to work out that the…you say either at the end of that first paragraph or at the beginning of the next paragraph why the reader cares, usually at the end of the first paragraph. And then in this next paragraph, you give that background. Why does this thing actually exist and what can you expect when you’re there? Okay?

Let’s finish up this “Hungry Village Tours.” So then I get into more about what you can expect and the service information. So I say Geen offers custom itineraries of the lakefront’s food producers based on a groups interests and available time, and has a signature three-hour walking tour and six-hour walking tour that he offers to the public. “Variety is key,” he said.” That’s why we go to places that are different sizes. Every place we go to has a different story. Maybe at the goat place, there’s a couple that moved from Chicago to produce artisan goat cheese, and on another one, an artist lives on the farm and grows her own food.”

So you’ll see I did something a little meta here. He’s actually talking about how to create a great basket of kittens here in this piece that I’m showing you as well, but I’m not just ending this with service pieces. Okay? For those of you who have joined us for the earlier ones in this series, you always want to also have that little bit at the end, include that little oomph, a little bit of why this is important. So that’s why I’ve got this quote from him there as well.

So let me just go back to the slide, and I see Stephanie’s got a question here because we need quotes. Does the article have to have sources secured for interviews before we pitch them? Absolutely not. The rule of thumb on securing sources is that you only need to secure a source before you write a piece if the whole story hinges on that thing. So for instance, because this is a roundup, you could always substitute out something else in that roundup if you can’t get a specific source, but usually, by virtue of having the assignment, you’ll be able to get somebody to talk to you. And even if it feels like you can’t get somebody, like, sometimes I’ll just call and get the random customer service person who answers the phone somewhere and just ask them a couple questions, and then I can pull some quotes from there. So it’s pretty much always possible to get quotes.

I’ve gotten quotes from super media shy places like casinos that really just hate talking to the press because they think everything’s gonna be spun the wrong way. You can always get some kind of quote from somebody about something. So the only time you need to secure the interviews in advance is if it’s a piece that hinges on one person, like it is an interview piece itself or it’s a profile of a celebrity, somebody that it’ll be hard for you to get.

So I’m gonna wrap this up so that we have…oops, actually, this is the slide from last week. So I’m gonna wrap this up so that we have a chance to have a little break before the next webinar. We already talked a bit about how to pitch these pieces, and I just want to elaborate a little more. So you want to not pitch a roundup feature unless you are sure that the magazine publishes roundup features. Like I said, these are lovely. A lot of magazines do them. Editors really love them. And often, there will be magazines where they might do narrative features and they will also do roundup features, but make sure before you pitch it that the editor does do them because otherwise, you will get in the editor’s bad graces because she only publishes long-form narrative blah, blah, blah features, and why on earth would you deign to send her a roundup feature?

But some places do both. So in the Travel Magazine Database, when we talk about what type of features a magazine does, we will tell you, “Usually, they do this, but they’re also available for roundup features.” So this is something that I notice happens a lot, is that magazines will usually do narrative features or something like that. And sometimes, they also do roundup features, but there are some magazines that nearly always do roundup features like this group travel and that I was telling you. But there’s a lot of other ones out there and they do that for the reason that I told you, which is that their readers have a lot of different interests and the editors want to make sure that they cater to all those interests and as many of their features as possible.

So when you pitch them, nobody’s asked this yet that I’ve seen, but this is the usual question. Do you need to mention all of the kittens in your basket in your pitch? And the answer is no, absolutely not. But you should mention somewhere in the ratio of two out of five, two out of three, something like that. You want to mention more than one to show them that you’ve thought about what is in there, but you should not tell them all of the different things. Okay? Keep your pitch short, but show them that you’ve thought about what’s gonna go in there, and more than tell them which things are gonna include, tell them how you’re balancing your basket. What are the characteristics that you’re balancing? That, in many ways, is more important. And with the two that you have decided to share with them, give them a little bit about why that thing is important, why that thing is interesting, why it belongs in your basket.

So thank you guys so much for joining me, and again, I’m so sorry that I had to postpone this webinar last week, but I’m glad that we got it in. Bye, guys.

Mastering AP Style: The Grammar Style of Choice for Publications Transcript

Download (PDF, 232KB)

You should see a slide now that says, “Mastering AP Style: The Grammar Style of Choice for Publications,” which is what we’re gonna talk about today. So, as I mentioned, capitalization is very apropos for our topic right now, because that’s actually one of the sticking points about AP style that I often see coming through people who only have web writing training. And I’m gonna talk in a little bit once we get started officially about why you should even care about AP style, especially if you’re only writing online. I think if you know that you wanna write for publications, it seems evident that it’s something you should probably learn. But you wanna learn it before you get assignments, and I’ll tell you why as well.

So, what we’re gonna cover today is… I said, “Why does this dusty book matter to you?” It’s got some high tech, sort of not high tech, but some technical ways of viewing it now that I’ll go over, at the end of the call as well, how to find it, but, first and foremost, we’re gonna talk about why this matters. And then we’re gonna go over some of the basic tenets that are less, you know, “You need to use this word rather than this word,” but philosophical shifts to make in how you put your words and your writing on the page to make sure that you’re properly tending to these tenets of AP style. And then I’m gonna talk about some of the things that are just sort of plain old wrong that you might not even suspect. But the thing, and I’m gonna talk about this when we talk about why AP style matters, is that, similar to the folks who translate “Harry Potter” books from one language to another, and then we all get the codified American English version rather than the British English version, some people somewhere sit around in a room and have several meetings, deciding not just that this is the way that everyone will do it, but this is the way that everyone will do it for a reason. And so that’s one of the reasons that it’s good, not only to learn AP style because it does, in fact, make your writing easier, but also these sort of tricky conventions, so to say, it’s good to know them because it shows your editors that you keep up on these trends. And, like I said, we’ll wrap up at the end by showing where you can find in full or in parts when you needed the guides for AP Style.

So, one of the reasons that this topic came up is that I have been encountering a lot, whether in submissions that I get, or in emails, or especially in pitches that I’m reviewing, various things that pop out as red flags to editors. And when we talk about pitching, we talk about how there’s two different things that you need to think about when you’re putting the words on the page for your pitch. On the one hand, it’s best practices, it’s the best way to go about what it is you’re trying to do. And then on the other hand, it’s just sort of I call them obnoxious editor pet peeves that you just need to know because you just have to do it this way, and there’s no good explanation, and it’s just how it is. And these AP style guidelines can often seem like one of those, and a lot of these, on their own, just seem like, “Well, why do I have to remember all these rules?” But then when you look at it together, it’s because they all form part of this framework, which is conveniently located in one book that you can read, and learn, and reference as needed. But one of the things that I see when I have my editor hat on, either editing things that are being submitted to us or looking at pitches that you guys are looking at submitting to editors, is that there’s been a disconcerting rise in these numbers of red flags that really just go back to whether it’s AP style or kind of, let’s call it, learned and official grammar rather than what flies on the web.

So, you’ll see me do it, and even when I was teaching web writing, I was very clear about this, you can use partial sentences when you’re writing on the web. You can start sentences with “and.” You can start sentences with “but.” You can have sentences that are just one word. But that doesn’t fly… The majority of the time in print it can. But, correspondingly, it also doesn’t fly always in corporate writing. And one of the things, as I was looking up the origins of AP style and how it’s used today, is that a lot of corporations have adopted that, and you’ll see, when we talk in a little bit, about the secret things hiding in the AP style book that are very useful for you to know, that some of that has to do with businesses and how businesses are described.

And so, as I get a lot of these submissions for the database, what happens is that we, like many publications, use a certain standard set of styles, and then we have our own things on top of that. And so what typically happens, and any of you guys that have worked with online markets, websites that have a lot of content going around, especially any of the third-party content organizations, whether Demand Media back in the day or Contently now, you tend to get these like 13-page to 15-page style guides. And, like I said, some of that is gonna be specific to that organization and what they cover, and some of that is gonna be just the standard stuff. And so knowing it in advance can help you from having to learn it over and over again each time.

So, one of the things that AP style does that I think a lot of us don’t realize is that it actually has the “correct way,” the standard way to talk about a lot of new stuff as well, and I’m gonna tell you a couple of funny things about that. But AP style guide is more than just where to put your commas, it’s more than just how to spell certain words if the spelling is disputed, it’s redone every single year, and its aim is really to keep a standard across the board. Like I mentioned, it’s Associated Press, so that’s America-specific, but you do see a similar thing in a lot of other English language markets. So, if you’re writing in a different English language market, it’s worth seeking out what is the AP style equivalent there as well, just as a side note. But it’s meant to make the press corps, the American English press corps, have a standardized way of writing. And part of that is to make editors’ lives easier, but part of that is also for the readers, it’s so that the newspaper reader who might read, say, “The Washington Post,” “The New York Times,” the “L.A. Times,” and the “Chicago Tribune” as part of their…whether it’s a Sunday morning tradition of actually holding the newspapers or just the apps that they have on their phone or the websites they peruse in the morning, so that they can have a seamless reading experience. So that what they are reading from one place to another is understandable as the same thing, is not sort of jumping voice overtly when you go from one news outlet to another. It’s meant to create a standard news voice.

And to that end, like I said, they will have the correct way to capitalize or spell the latest memes, much to many people’s amusement. Part of the AP style guide is just a very long list of words and their correct usages. And one of the things, like I said, the reason that this impacts your pitches is that it’s a very quick and very clear signal to editors that you speak their language, that you are not going to take a lot of their time on the editing side of things that they expect a standard journalist to know. And this is something that I’ve had a lot of discussions with my husband, who also co-owns the business, about this recently, when we’ve been looking at hiring writers, which is that when you’re looking at hiring a writer today, you are looking for different things than just writing obviously. You’re looking at, you know, being able to use WordPress, for instance, or being able to do research online, as opposed to just being able to do research over the phone. So, these are ways that things might be different from standard journalism. But what I’ve seen is that there’s essentially, forgetting about WordPress, which everybody seems much better within these other two things, there’s two basic things. There’s that research reporting side, where people are increasingly stopping several paces away from where they should get, and then there’s just the writing. So, I’ve had a lot of instances recently where I’ve been going over something, and I feel like I’m not able to give it a proper edit in terms of the content, because I’ve gotten so mired in fixing various little things in terms of commas, or sentences not being legible in these ways that you might not think about, but which we’re gonna talk about a little bit more next week, or simply just not following the style conventions that have been very clearly outlined.

So, this quote that I pulled here for you is very telling and interesting, because, as I was looking up, just a very simple search query of why use AP style or why is AP style important, something very unexpected for me happened, which was pretty much all of the things that came up were not for writers, they were for PR people. I saw very few blogs about journalism, or about blogging for that matter, or even about content marketing, talking about why you use AP style. I saw a lot of PR people, an overwhelming number of PR people, harping on why it is important to learn and use AP style. And the reason why is this quote right here, that more of her press releases are answered, more of her op-eds are published. I saw so many quotes like this. A lot of press releases, you may or may not know or notice this, but in a lot of markets, magazine editors will essentially publish press releases verbatim in the final book news sections of their publications, and other PR people said their press releases were published with fewer changes. This is really important, because we, as writers, as freelance writers, are only a piece of the pie of who is pitching editors, and the majority, I would say, of pitches that editors get are not the ones from writers at all, they are the ones from PR people.

So, in terms of techniques for pitching editors, how to pitch editors better, we can take a lot from these PR blogs. And often there’s really great guides on PR blogs, but not on journalism blogs, about what types of things editors of different magazines are looking for, and what they need, and what they are trying to do for their audience. And this, I think, is a really great thing that, as I mentioned, I’m seeing a lot of these issues, and PR people are talking about it a lot, this is the division. People who work in an office, and their job is to pitch journalists, know this. They care about it, they work hard to improve it, but the majority of freelancers or content marketers aren’t thinking about this. So, by thinking about, and using, and really understanding, and imbibing AP style, that’s gonna set you ahead of a lot of other freelancers. And so, like I said, AP style is not just something that is gonna help you if you are working for publications, and here’s why.

AP style, because of that standardization aspect of it that I mentioned before, that it’s really meant to make writing easier for readers of all kinds, has been adopted by a large number of corporations. And so that means that a lot of company websites or government websites, like a lot of CBBs are connected to the government, that you might write for, do, in fact, have this in mind. And even further than that, I’ve met a large number of editors for company sites who have a journalism background, whether that’s a journalism degree, and then they decided to go into content marketing because it’s easier, or they worked in a newsroom for several years, their newsroom closed, they weren’t good at pitching, and so they went and became an editor for a company, because editing is what they know. And so this is also gonna really help you if you are working for different companies, or, like I mentioned, governmental organizations, or other nonprofit organizations and CBBs in that writing as well, because a lot of those editors have this background. And if they don’t, it’s a major selling point that you know these things, because you can bring that standard to that online publication.

So, like I mentioned, there’s a lot of things that you wouldn’t expect. There’s even sports terminology, because sports journalism is actually a huge amount of the things that are created. There’s financial and business terminology. But then there’s actually things that are more instructive to us as writers that are really great, such as how to write photo captions the right way, media law guidelines. And then, as I mentioned, they have things that are very much just the right way to spell this particular word that is often used. So, there are various things in there, like I said, media law, financial terms, but there are things in there that are just how to be a journalist. So, I mentioned that they talk about the right way to put photo captions. They also talk about the right way to attribute quotations, the right way to use abbreviations. But then they also say things like this, and this is why I wanted to put this in here, because it’s worth one time in your life just sitting down and reading the whole AP style guide, even though I’m gonna tell you kind of the most important and most often screwed up sections today, but here’s one of those things that’s really, like I said, about how to “do journalism.”

“Women should receive the same treatment as men in all areas of coverage. Physical descriptions, sexist references, demeaning stereotypes, and condescending phrases should not be used.” Now, especially in this day and age, this can seem very like taking a stance, like the AP style guide is defending women. However, this and a lot of the other things in there are just showing what is good journalism, what is unbiased, balanced coverage. In terms of quotations, they advocate something which is less and less prevalent, which is to very much leave any quotation that you receive from a quote source as is, to not clean it up, if you need to remove some words, to just put in ellipses, if there’s a gross error, to put in sic in parentheses. So, some of those things, like I said, are less used today, especially online. But a lot of the things that they have in there are just good journalism.

Now, another thing that happens, I mentioned a lot, like the right way to spell the latest memes, are that things change. And while editors are keeping up with this, they expect you to as well. I’ve had some editors who very nicely remind us in the annual kind of update to their own style guides that things have changed. But some of them won’t, and some of them will just start seeing errors in your submissions, which weren’t errors before, and won’t say anything to you about it, and will just get increasingly annoyed that they need to make more changes to your work. So, some of the things like that that have come up is it used to be quite annoying that the word “internet” needed to be capitalized every time you used it. And in 2016, AP style finally changed that “internet” could be said with the lower case “i.” However, “Wi-Fi,” and you may have noticed this around, “Wi-Fi” should always be spelled with a capital “W” and a capital “F” and a dash in between. But then there are some other things that have changed which are more sweeping. So, for instance, I think it was two, three years back, it used to be that when you wrote a city and a state, AP style had a different set of abbreviations that aren’t the standard postal code ones, like MN for Minnesota. And part of this is because, very handily, like I said, a lot of readers don’t actually know those. And so they were slightly more descriptive abbreviations that made it quite clear which state they were talking about. And perhaps a sign of the times, or perhaps for clarity, recently, AP style has changed so that you actually spell out all states. So, rather than writing, before, you would never have written “Tallahassee, FL,” you would have written “Tallahassee, FLA,” but now, you would write “Tallahassee, Florida.”

So, another change that happened recently, which has not been well-received, is “over” versus “more than.” I’m sorry, I’m missing a parenthesis there. Are any of you familiar with this “over” versus “more than” debate? So, this is something that has been, just in your average writing and even kind of your average speaking, a pet peeve for grammar geeks for many years, is people mincing the usage of “over” and “more than.” However, recently, AP style, you could sort of call it caved, and said that they could be used relatively interchangeably. And my favorite protest in that debate was an editor saying, “More than my dead body.” And what she meant was like, “Over my dead body,” but she was showing how you can’t really interchange “over” and “more than.” And this is one of these cases, and “fewer” versus “less than,” there are several other ones that are quite similar, that you’ve probably misused, at least one of these, for ages. There are some that I forget about and still use wrong until I glance upon it on a grammar site and I’m reminded. But you’ve probably misused a lot of these just because you were taught wrong by somebody at some point. And so these ones, like “over” versus “more than,” even though they’ve said they’re interchangeable now, and “fewer” versus “less than,” and different things like that, are definitely worth a look. And, like I said, there’s anything sort of in that area of the er versus the spelled-out version, they tend to have different uses. And I like to use this example, which comes from Italian, and we don’t have quite a word that works the same way in English, so I have to explain it to you in Italian.

So, in Italian, there’s two different words that mean share, like you share a meal, you share a couch, you know, like you share a cab ride, okay. Now, the two different words are “dividere,” like divide, and “condividere.” And this is the thing, we don’t have this other word in English. Now, the way that it works in Italian is that the simpler word, “dividere,” can only be used for things that could be physically broken apart. So, you can “dividere,” divide a croissant, but you can’t “dividere” a cab ride, or a car, or a couch, because you can’t just saw it in half. In those cases, you need to “condividere,” the other type of share. So, these are the types of grammatical nuances that AP style, very similar to its unequivocal words about how to describe women, just cuts through all the crap, all the nonsense, and gives very, very clear descriptions for. So, that’s one of the other reasons, like I said, where it’s worth just sitting and reading through once in your life, because it will reset you on all of these tendencies.

Now, let’s get into kind of the basic pieces, and, like I said, you can almost think of them as philosophical, about the AP style guide that a lot of folks, either, like I mentioned, have mislearned somewhere along the line, have just always done in a certain way, or that you may have learned from a different style system. So, I don’t have a slide on all the different style systems in here, but if you have an academic background, there are some different ones, like MLA is a very major one. I also came up, when I was working in academia, using something called the Chicago Manual of Style, simply because the institution that I worked at, and specifically the president of the university who we wrote for, kind of had a sense of being more elegant, and Chicago was kind of thought of as a bit more, not for boast per se, but AP style, at its core, is meant to keep things brief. AP style was actually created in 1953, and, as I mentioned, it’s now updated annually. At the time, it was updated biannually, but the purpose was initially, like I said, to standardize, but that was back when a lot of things were coming in on wires.

So, things were coming in with different abbreviations just to save space in the wire or to save space, save type space, in the newsprint. And so standardizing these abbreviations created a code that everyone can understand instead of the many, many different types of abbreviations that were used at the time. And one of those things that was abbreviated, but we don’t think of it as abbreviated, because we think of words as being abbreviated, but one of those things that were being abbreviated was numbers, in terms of how numbers were being spelled out. So, a very, very basic thing about AP style is when you use a numeral versus when you write out the number.

So, tenet number one of AP style, and this is one of these things that, and I’m sure every editor has a different stance on this, but I am very hard to convince that I should hire, engage with somebody if they send me an email where, a pitch email of some kind, and a pitch email in which there are numbers in different places, and either there’s a numeral for one or four or two repeatedly. Like, “I have been working for two years,” and they say the numeral “2.” Or they mince, and they have some numerals for one, and sometimes they spell out one, and there is absolutely no rhyme or reason to what is in that pitch and how they have done it that way or what background they have that may have influenced this.

Now, it seems like an editor pet peeve, but let me explain why. I do this, or I have this in this unmistakable and unignorable feeling, because if somebody is using, especially if they’re starting sentences with numerals, it looks sloppy to me. And this is the case to a lot of editors, and it goes back a little bit to what I was saying about Chicago just being cleaner. But it looks like text messages, or it looks like tweets but more so like text messages, and so that gives you as the editor the sense that all of this person’s text is gonna come in sloppy, that the sentences won’t be complete, more importantly, that there will be holes in the research. But the second thing, the more insidious thing, like I said, when there’s some numerals and some spelled-out numbers, and there’s no rhyme or reason, to me, that shows that this person doesn’t even have their own style code that they live by, and they probably haven’t even thought of having one, and that it will be very hard to teach them one. So, like I said, these are some of the reasons why these tiny, tiny tweaks in your pitch can broadcast very big and often, like I said, red flag, insidious kind of things to editors.

So, numerals above nine, but spell out the numbers below nine. Now, there are some exceptions to that. So, if a number begins a sentence, we get a lot of these in the database, because we have the demographic section, where we talk about who the typical reader of each publication is, and we pull statistics from a media kit, so we’re often saying like, “Fifty-nine percent of readers are women.” But if you begin that sentence with that “fifty-nine percent,” it doesn’t get to be a numeral anymore, it needs to be spelled out “fifty-nine.” And, again, that’s just this kind of “cleanliness” bit to the writing in the way it looks on the page. However, ages are always in numerals. Likewise, feet and miles, but miles are only in numerals over 10, whereas feet and ages are in numerals all the time. This is, like I said, there are little nuances in here, and editors will see if you know them or not, or like I said about considering people for the database, they will think about if you have ever thought about this. And if you haven’t thought about this, if impossibly I knew about it or if it’s a lost cause and not worth their time to work with you.

So, two other important things on the numbers here. Percent, so you always spell out the word percent, and this is another one where it seems like an odd exchange between saving space and being clean, but the AP style has decided on percent, and, honestly, I agree. I think it looks…it somehow just looks more elegant, it looks nicer, it looks more newsy. So, whatever number you’re writing for percent, you always need to write out the word “percent.” And then the other weird one about numbers, and this is actually a bit about dates, but since it’s numbers, I’ve kept it in here. So, you need to offset years in your dates. So, if you’re saying, “January 17th, 1987,” there needs to be a comma after “1987.” But if you’re just saying, “January 17th,” you don’t need a comma. So, why is that? Because “1987,” in this case, is essentially another modifier on that date. So, it’s like when you’re saying, “It’s a big, blue, boisterous bunny,” and you would put commas in between “big” and, well, maybe not between “big,” but you put a comma in between “blue” and “boisterous.” So, “1987” is another adjective, in a way, easier to think of it as a modifier that’s modifying that date.

Okay, so let’s get away from numbers, because they’re quite technical. This one is much easier, but it’s like one of these philosophical things that you just need to wrap your head around, and then you will do it much better/perfect forever going forward. So, this is one of these things that PR people have mentioned a lot that it’s difficult for them to get a handle on but it makes them much happier.

The thing about AP style is that they are very judicious about capitalization. And so what I mean by that is that I’ve been getting a lot of work from people, either who are paid contractors for us in a certain way, or I see it in pitches where there’s an odd amount of capitalization, and then sometimes things that I know should be capitalized aren’t. So, this is like that numerals thing, where I, with my editor hat on, am saying, “What is the rule book that this person thinks that they’re following by capitalizing some things and not others?” And this is very similar to the numbers, one of those red flags to editors that’s gonna make them have some serious doubts about working with you even if the content of what you’ve submitted seems great, just because they’re not sure that they can reteach this, and they don’t wanna spend a bunch of time editing it or trying to explain it to you.

So, a very, very easy one is names. So, names, of course, should always be capitalized, as should companies. So, a company name would be, like Dream of Travel Writing, in our case, okay, so that would be capitalized. However, what I often see happening is that then people will say, you know, say they’re talking about, for instance, the Travel Magazine Database that we produce, so that would be in all caps. It is the official name of the website of the resource. But so what if somebody’s writing about it, and they say in the beginning, “the Travel Magazine Database?” They capitalize it all. And then, you know, in a good abbreviated fashion, they’re trying to not use the full name throughout with their writing, and they start limiting it to being just “the Database.” So, they’re saying, “the Database.”

Now, a lot of people believe, and I’m not quite sure how this got out there, that when you sort of narrow something down like that, you would continue to capitalize “the Database,” like not “the” but “Database.” You would say lower case “t” and then capital “D.” And this might be, from the very, very limited times that we do these with titles, which are things like “the President” and “the Pope,” that’s pretty much the only times that you would say somebody’s title. So, after saying, you know, “President…” I actually forgot his first name for a second. That was really lovely. After saying, “President Donald Trump,” you might go on to just say, “the President.” In those cases, the “P” of “President” would continue to be capitalized, but for anything else, if it’s the president of a corporation, if it’s the database, if you’ve said the name of a building, and you know, it’s like “Parkside Condos” is the proper name, and then you go on in the future to say, “the condos,” you would not continue to capitalize. That “P” for the corporation president, that “D” for the Travel Magazine Database, or that “C” for the condos, in those cases, it becomes lower case.

Now, I see this happen also with things, let’s call them ideas or movements. So, an example might be, like when I am talking about something in a webinar, and I talk about a blog post that somebody wrote or philosophy that is called Blah, and then its central tenets are Blah, Blah, and Blah. But it’s not a religious philosophy. The names, you know, have been made up by this person for the purpose of this blog post. The proper nouns or the proper names are really just created subheads of a blog post in this setting. So, as you would go on and continue to say, you know, “the law of different sentence lengths,” let’s go back to the web writing webinar I did, for instance, that wouldn’t be capitalized. It’s not an official proper noun. It’s not an official name. It doesn’t count. So, that would need to become lower-cased.

Now, some people, and I do this, I do it for our own kind of internal style guide, will offset things like that with quotation marks, and that’s another thing that in AP style is technically not the case. And so, when you’re talking to someone, it may be at a museum or some other institution, and they’re telling you about some programs that they’re running, and they are telling you the names of these things, but those aren’t names that, you know, the program publicly goes by or that you would find on their website, they’re just the names that they’re using to refer to things. So, for instance, I recently announced that we are starting for a coaching program a knowledge base, which is really like the technical term, but we have a different proper name for it. It’s the On-Demand Coaching Concierge. But if somebody was quoting me, interviewing me, talking about how we set that up and why, they shouldn’t be going around and capitalizing “knowledge base” throughout, because that’s not actually the proper name of it, or if we hadn’t come up with an official name yet, or we were just calling it our knowledge base and it didn’t have a name, you still wouldn’t capitalize “knowledge base” throughout.

So, the quote that I have on here, I really love, and this comes from a PR website again. But she says, “Company presidents are, no doubt, very important people. However…” And this is something that you see come up a lot when you’re doing interviews, is that people will have very long and convoluted titles, and when I say, “long and convoluted,” I don’t do so many of these anymore, but it wasn’t uncommon to interview people whose titles are like seven or eight words. And in those cases, I have actually had, when I sent the quotes to people to review, not the whole story, but just their quotes review, I’ve had people write back and correct their title to be in capitals, because in their signature, or when they describe themselves internally, they capitalize their title. However, for AP style and for journalism, their title doesn’t get to be capitalized.

So, as I mentioned, this is the case a lot with titles, whether it’s the title of a person or, you know, a title which is actually the name of an entity, an enterprise, a business, an initiative. But another thing to watch out for is when you are referring to people in ways that… I’ve seen this come up a lot. Like if you are on a tour, and there is a live action element, and say there’s a witch. So, people might go on in their blog post, writing about that experience, just say “the Witch” in capital letters. So, you never got this person’s name, it’s not really her title, but it’s how she’s being referred to at the present time. And this is similar to when I was talking about the knowledge base that we’re starting to do. So, just because she is, for the purposes of this live action play, a witch, doesn’t mean that “the witch” is her proper name. So, “witch” would not be capitalized there. So, that would be another case where it’s not an official title but it’s more of kind of name that’s being used to describe a person that you wouldn’t capitalize. Okay. So, that’s the second sort of philosophical thing.

Now, here is another philosophical thing that I wanna touch on. So, the Oxford comma, have you guys heard the term “Oxford comma?” I’ll explain briefly what it is for those of you who haven’t. But the idea of the Oxford comma, and I didn’t look into why this is called the Oxford comma unfortunately, I’m sorry about that, but the idea of the Oxford comma is that when you have a list of things, the Oxford comma is the comma that comes before the last item. So, if you say, “I need to go to the grocery store to get bread, milk, cheese, eggs, and beer,” that comma that comes before “and beer,” the comma that comes before the “and” and the last item on the list, that’s the Oxford comma.

Now, this is a huge point of debate among any type of editing cohort, whether it’s, you know, in the AP style selection committee itself or in different publications. And so, even when I was looking at PR people talking about why they use AP style, very interestingly, one person who was writing the blog post for this PR website said, “I love that it’s very clear you just don’t do the Oxford comma.” And then the editor of the blog post, the editor of the website heard, and editors aside in that part of the blog, and she said, “Just as a note, here at whatever it is our PR name, we do use the Oxford comma just for clarity purposes.” And I feel like that exchange right there kind of sums up the Oxford comma dilemma, as I’m calling it here, is that a lot of publications do use the Oxford comma, and they should tell you, and you can always ask them. But AP style doesn’t use it. And the idea for AP style not using it is, like I said, in terms of saving space, and this blog post that I referenced, she said like, “How great is it that I can take that out of a tweet, you know, and it helps me save one of those precious characters?”

But the reason that I personally always use the Oxford comma is this example, which I think I learned when I was working in-house at the university, but Chicago Manual of Style uses the Oxford comma anyway. But this is an example. It’s the kind of sentence you might get in a class on ambiguity. So, in logic programs, you sometimes spend a whole semester taking a class on ambiguity. And I’ve taken some logic courses where we had whole piles of these sentences that were ambiguous, and you had to explain all of the different ways that this sentence can be interpreted. So, let me know in the chat box if you see what’s wrong with this sentence, and I’ll read it out loud for those of you who are just listening in and not here on the live call. So, this sentence goes, “I’d like to thank my parents, Mother Teresa and the Pope.” Now, this is absolutely correct in terms of AP style, okay. There is no comma before the last “and.” And someone very elegantly said in the chat box, “The problem with this sentence is that they shouldn’t be procreating.”

So, what it looks like if you read this sentence, especially on the page, it’s a little harder if I just read it to you out loud if you’re not here looking at the slides, is that the comma offsets “my parents.” So, the person says, “I’d like to thank my parents,” and so then it can look like they are saying that their parents are Mother Teresa and the Pope. So, because I don’t work in the age of newsprint, where some poor soul has to physically move all of the little numbers and characters to put together our newspaper every day, I always use the Oxford comma, because I feel like, for instance in this case, there are some ambiguity. But, also, there’s a lot of times where the sentence is just long, and it’s become convoluted, and I feel like those commas help to give the reader a little breath of fresh air. In this case, it’s quite a short sentence, so the issue is more the ambiguity. But I like it for that opportunity to pause and know that the previous thought has ended. So, the Oxford comma, like I said, is not technically used by AP, but it is used by a lot of publications for this very simple clarity note. And, hopefully, you will always remember, from this day forward, the potential problems with the Oxford comma by remembering that Mother Teresa and the Pope should not be anyone’s parents, at least, you know, not together or probably not individually.

So, let’s look at quickly some of the most common very specific errors that pop up in AP style, and a lot of these are like general grammar notes. I’ve got one question in here. So, would a strict AP adherent object the Oxford comma here? And I assume that’s in the Mother Teresa and the Pope thing. And they would. So, I’m just gonna go back. So, publications that are really strict about AP, which should be, you know, I think “The New York Times” is probably more about clarity than strictness, but it is “Chicago Tribune.” They would object to the comma here, and they would say that it should be clear to people that they are thanking these three individuals and not that it’s Mother Teresa and the Pope, which I find, like I said, to be unfortunate, which is why I do tend to use the Oxford comma regardless of the situation. Okay.

So, most common errors, these are like nuancey things or spelling things that I wanna fill you in on quickly. And, as I mentioned, it’s really good one time in your life to read through the whole AP style book, but the ones that I’m telling you now are the ones that come up quite frequently and that might come up in your pitches that can give the editor that whiff of, “Hmm, is this the person that I wanna work with?” So, one of them is “on Saturday.” So, let me explain this. So, “on Saturday,” “on Tuesday,” “on Monday,” is commonly used when you say, for instance, “I do this webinar on Thursday,” or, “I try to do this webinar on Thursday,” “I aim every week to do this webinar on Thursday,” when you are discussing with somebody an act, a habit, an event that happens, you know, whether it’s on Saturday or… Months are different, actually, for AP purposes, so it’s gotta be the days. So, there, it’s “on Saturday,” or “on Tuesday or Monday.” Technically, for AP purposes, it should just be “Saturday.” So, “I do the webinar Thursday.” You don’t have to say, “Thursdays,” you just say, “I do the webinar Thursday,” or, for instance, “My husband calls his mother, you know, Monday,” or something in India, something like that. So, technically, you’re not supposed to say “on” and then the proper name of the day.

Another thing that has to do with days and dates is that… Remember I was talking about how months are used differently. So, one of the ways that months are used differently is that they can be abbreviated, day names should never be abbreviated, but months can be abbreviated but only for dates. So, that January date that I told you earlier, which I can’t… Let me just go back and find it. Okay, January 17th, okay. So, you can write “Jan. 17, 1987,” but if you were saying, “It happened in January 1987,” you would need to say the whole month. So, you can only abbreviate a month if it comes with a date attached. If you’re saying, “It happened in January 1987,” then two things happen. First, you need to spell out the month, and then the year also isn’t offset. So, those are the differences. So, you can say, “It happened Jan. 17, 1987,” or you say, “It happened in January 1987.”

Now, here is a couple other ones I’m gonna get into that are this kind of spelling this word rather than that word thing. So, it is always “toward,” and, likewise, it is always “forward,” rather than “towards” or “forwards.” I couldn’t quite understand the “forwards” use, which is why I didn’t put it in here, but I just wanted to mention it. But “toward” versus “towards” is one that I personally am sometimes writing, I’m like, “Oh, my God, I can’t remember which one it is.” So, it’s always singular, it’s always “toward,” it’s always “to something,” not “towards,” which should make it… It seems like that would make more sense for an adverb, which “toward” is, because it modifies a verb, but that is not actually the case. It’s always “toward.”

Similarly, in terms of movement, “further” and “farther,” these are things that I think some of us do sign writing, but I caught myself last night, talking to my husband, not even in any context to this webinar, just saying the wrong one. So, you can take something further, but you would walk farther. So, like once I tell you it seems pretty simple, but the thing is it’s just one of these things that slips out that it’s worth looking at. So, like an idea can be developed further, but a distance can only be farther. A distance can never be further. So, another way to think about it is that “further” is for kind of abstract and “farther” is for things that are physical.

Now, another weird thing about AP style, and there’s a very technical reason why this is the case, is that books, movies, and television shows are all treated the same. Now, in other settings, especially any of you guys who have academic backgrounds, and I know some of you do, there’s situations where you’re writing a bibliography and you have to look up in MLA style how to do this bibliography, and websites are treated one way, books are treated one way, short stories are treated one way, episodes of a television show are treated one way.

In AP style, we do not have that problem. Everything goes in parentheses, or in quotation marks, it’s very simple. Movies, books, television shows, they all get quotation marks, and the reason for that is that in, again, going back to that poor soul who has to physically move the little metal pieces of type to make the newsprint, back in that time, italics was, you know, if it happened, was a hugely more difficult and painful thing, and it also had different purposes in different newspapers. Sometimes the italics would be used, you know, for the subheads, or sometimes not, or they didn’t have those available. The whole concept of italics was actually made up to save space, but because people find it harder to read, it’s also less used in news, where the type is already made very, very small and readability is important. So, books, movies, and television shows all being in quotation marks also goes back to that idea that, while saving space is important, we do only have a certain number of letters available. So, it’s much easier to just put the quotation marks around these things rather than drum up the italics, you know, pieces, the italics little metal type keys. So, that is something that you don’t need to look up anymore. It makes your whole life easier. Just put everything in quotation marks.

Now, here’s a couple other spelling ones. So, “entitled” versus “titled.” Now, at first, I looked at this and I couldn’t even understand the confusion, because I thought they were talking about entitled people, but then I realized. So, this is talking about the book is titled “Food in Jars” or the book is titled “Game of Thrones.” The book is never entitled. “Entitled” is only for spoiled children that go to private school here in New York City, or something like that. So, “entitled,” you can think of as for people, but “titled” is for objects, or can also be like, you know, “He was titled the president of the corporation,” but that “president” is in a small P to go back to where we were talking about capitalization. Now, here’s a weird one that I actually didn’t know and I think I have been spelling wrong for years, is that “adviser” in AP style is not spelled S-O-R, it is spelled S-E-R. So, that’s another one to remember.

And, unfortunately, there’s no setting in Microsoft word that I know of where you can switch it between different style guides, because wouldn’t that be grand. So, some of these things, like I said, Microsoft Word won’t catch, and I mentioned in the email and the blog post leading up to this webinar, but Grammarly is sadly very much not your friend. I was really excited when I saw this thing come out, and I was personally, like, gonna start using it for some things. And then somebody did a coaching call with me, and she sent me some pitches to look at. And there were some very glaring grammatical issues, and she said she had run it through Grammarly.

And then, because we know somebody, my husband used to work with somebody who now works with Grammarly that we know very well, played board games with, I wrote this whole email about all of these things that I had tested and caught, because what the person that we know does is he develops the algorithm that decides whether to tell you your grammar is wrong or not, that makes all these complicated decisions. And the answer that I got from him was like long delay, because he had to talk to some other people, and really disappointing. And it was basically along the lines of like, “It’s a very difficult thing, and we’ve only gotten so far.” And so, if you do use Grammarly, you’ll notice that there’s a lot of…like, they’ll ping you on a lot of things, but there are things like using really, they don’t even tell you if there’s a word missing from your sentence.

So, Grammarly, unfortunately, is not the answer in the same way that we’ve become accustomed to Microsoft Word catching things. So, it’s quite young, and it might someday get to the point where I’ll recommend it to people. But right now, please, please don’t rely on it, because it will let you through a lot of things that are unintelligible that you won’t notice, because you’re just trusting this app.

So, the last one on here, in terms of common errors that I wanted to mention, is no courtesy titles. So, what do I mean by that? So, for instance, my husband has a Ph.D., so he’s technically a doctor. So, that would be, if we were being interviewed, and throughout the rest of the article, they called him Dr. Kale instead of just Kale, which is his last name, which is spelled like “kale,” which people find really funny because we have a farm. So, it’s the difference between mentioning in the article, you know, Dr. Satyen Kale and then later on just calling him Dr. Kale versus just calling him Kale. But the other thing is that, while you should just use people’s last names later on in every other mention of them, this courtesy titles extends also to that first mentioned. So, remember when I said calling him Dr. Satyen Kale in the beginning. You actually wouldn’t do that even though he has a Ph.D., and you wouldn’t do it in most cases.

So, there might be some very, very specific times when the background of that person is relevant, and then you would expand upon it, you know, like Dr. Oz, or somebody like that. But in the vast majority of cases, you don’t get a courtesy title. So, that’s why if it’s a necessary title, then it should be there, but if it’s a title that the person has, and I use “Dr.” here because we think that is earned, but it’s the same for “Mr.” and “Ms.” and all of these things, they just don’t belong in your article. So, you don’t need to further down say, you know, like “Mrs. Burns,” it should just be “Burns.” And it sounds a bit brusque, but when you read it, it probably doesn’t bother you. It feels brusque to you when you write it, and once you get used to it, it’s very easy. It makes your writing very easy and very quick. And, personally, it makes me much happier, because I just color code everybody, and then I just have to go through and match the color codes of the quotes up to the names that I’ve put on the side.

So, some quick notes about where to find AP style. If I just need to check a really quick thing, I will say it like the word “adviser” or “Wi-Fi” and “AP style” into Google, and it doesn’t always give me results about that specific thing, but here’s another thing to watch out for. Unless you have specifically set Google in this search to tell you things from the last year, you might get something that comes from a different version of AP style, as in I mentioned earlier how “internet” is now lower case, there’s also like the state abbreviations have changed. So, if you just Google, you might also get something that is from an earlier version.

So, in fact, one of the resources that I wanted to recommend to you on here, the Purdue OWL site. I noticed after I had prepared the slides, when I was just checking on some things and getting ready for the call, that they do have some of those older notations. So, for years and years, I’ve used this Purdue site, because it’s free to check on AP style, but it seems like they haven’t been updating it. So, do use that with a bit of caution if you’re gonna use it. But if you have a smartphone, which is the technical term for smartphones, all lower case, “smartphone,” then there is an app for that. So, you can get the AP style app, which will be your own little personal AP style with Google to look up all these things.

The AP Style Twitter account also announces changes, and I found, actually, I was quite delighted, that when I was looking up some of these things to test how well they came up in Google, that they are often serving the Twitter messages directly from the AP Style account in Google if there is an appropriate one. Now, the annual print version, I say, it’s a great desktop reference for those who actually use a home office, because many of us don’t have a home base, or aren’t there often, or simply work in cafes, as I often do. But I always had one of these when I worked in-house and even when I started freelancing, and there’s something really nice about having it, like I said, obviously, to read through it one time, but also having it on your desk to just flip through the alphabetical listings if you just need to look up a certain word.

So, if you do use a home office, I actually do recommend just having the physical copy on your desk. Now, one other thing that isn’t specific to AP style but covers grammar more generally that you might wanna check out if you haven’t heard about it is Grammar Girl and her Quick and Dirty Tips, and she also has a podcast. And she talks about a lot of these things, like “further” and “farther,” and “over” and “more than,” and all of these little nuancey things that people often get wrong. And she talks about all of the specific situations in which it should be one versus the other.

And thank you so much, you guys. Have a great weekend.

The Art of the Essay and How to Find Them Everywhere Transcript

Download (PDF, 224KB)

As you may just have heard, there’s an excessive amount of noise in the background right now because I’m actually doing this webinar from the airport just before I am boarding a flight. So it turned out that yesterday when we usually have the webinar, I had postponed it because I had a flight that day and got canceled. And so, now this is the only flight that I can get out, and so, now we’re gonna talk from the airport.

So if you have any trouble hearing me over the sound of the airport at any point, let me know. And we will just roll with it and hopefully my mic is good enough that you’re mostly just hearing me.

So what we were talking about today similarly to last week when we talked about narrative…thanks Alicia for putting your name on there. Similarly to last week when I talked about narrative forms in story structure, it’s something very near and dear to my heart that I spend a lot of time studying these days, and that is the art of the essay. And for those of you that read either the newsletter or the blog post preceding this call, you probably heard or saw me mention that you’re likely already writing essays without realizing it on your own blogs if you do in fact have a blog. And you may even be writing essays for clients. Especially those of you that do ghostblogging or other forms of writing for other business owners, you might be writing essays in their newsletters. Newsletters are a really common place to find essays as well.

And a dear friend of mine who now is a multiple New York Times bestselling author, when he first started he was like, “I wanna be a writer and I wanna be an essayist.” And he did that by starting a blog, and he would say, “I publish essays two days a week or three days a week.” And he always very clearly classified his blog posts as essays. So one of the things we’re gonna talk about today is what exactly does that mean if you’re calling something that you’re writing an essay? What does that mean? What does that look like? How is that different from other types of writing?

So first we’re gonna talk about what that distinction is and then we’re gonna talk about a couple of different approaches to the process of writing essays. And what I mean by that in terms of approaches is actually the, sort of, structural elements as well as things like different topics that you can take that are unique to the essay market. So, yeah, so it’s interesting. I see there’s about…it’s seems like maybe two-thirds of those of you on the call, your names aren’t showing up. So if you wanna just drop in the chat box like I said, like Alicia did right here. If your name isn’t showing up when you ask a question just drop your name in because it will help me with context, as I do know many of you.

So at the end, we’re gonna talk a little bit about the different markets for personal essays in terms of where you can sell them, but we’re also gonna talk about how they fit into the greater marketplace. And it might be unsurprising to those of you who follow this particular outlet, but one of the touch zones that I’m gonna talk about several points during this call, both in terms of learning the essay style and structure as well as publication, is “The New York Times” because they also secretly have some things to help you write essays besides just get them published.

So one of the things that I’ve noticed on here…of course, we say the Travel Magazine database which is a big cornerstone of what Dream of Travel Writing does. And something that I’ve noticed in putting together the Travel Magazine database is that a lot of this type of thing, such as essays, or what we talked about last week, narrative features, these are things that a lot of you come and tell, “I really wanna write things like this, but I just don’t know where to publish them.” And I’ve really been shocked, to be honest, about how many markets are out there for this type of thing. And in fact, one of the reasons in the Travel Magazine database that we have so, so many magazines is that a lot of these stories that you would write that are travel-oriented stories, whether features or essays, actually appear in magazines that aren’t strictly about travel.

So we’ll talk, of course, like I said, later in the call about markets, but one of the best places to place your first-person essays about travel is actually in women’s magazines which pay very, very, very well. They pay, you know, $2 a word if not $1 a word. But you can definitely get $2-word rates even as a first-time writer for those outlets. And those are magazines…like “Red” in the U.K. is a great one. “Town and Country” in America publishes quite a bit of travel as well. So we’ll talk more about that.

And in terms of my background for what we’re talking about today, those of you that were here at the top of the call, I said that this is something that’s near and dear to my heart, but I really go out of my way because I have noticed that it’s something that a lot of you are interested in. I’m not so much of an essayist myself, but because it’s something that you guys are really interested in, whenever I go to the big writing conferences that are for, I don’t wanna say writers, like we’re all not writers, but they’re for these more, you know, foofoo-y writers like novelists and fiction and people who wanna be starving artists just to create really artsy writing.

I go to a lot of these workshops on essays because it’s really very eye-opening how this type of form as in, you know, an essay versus a narrative feature versus a poem versus a piece of journalism, how this type of form seems quite esoteric or hard to pinpoint how to do it. But it’s actually one of the easier ones. And so, I’m gonna share with you a lot of tips and tricks that that I have picked up over the past couple of years of checking out those resources, and also I’m gonna show you some names and some specific places for you to check out if essay is a type of writing that really appeals to you.

So before we dive into that, before we dive into how to do it, where to do it, let’s really zero in on what is an essay, and particularly, personal essays are what we’re gonna talk about today. So it’s very easy, especially if you look in, you know, say a newspaper. Or a really good example also is something less read now, but it’s the Saturday…oh no, it’s escaping me. “Saturday Evening Post” or something like that. But there’s these magazines that I see less now that the “People” weeklies of the world have taken over.

But about, you know, 10, 15 years ago when you were in line at the grocery store, the magazines that you would see on the stand right at the checkout were more of these ones that are small, they’re book-sized, they’re quite thick and they’re weekly, and they would include a mix of fiction and non-fiction, and writing on all sorts of different topics. And if you were to look at something like that or something like a newspaper, you’re gonna see a mix of all of these different pieces that are inherently non-fiction and inherently first-person that could be thought of or referred to by some people perhaps as essays, but they aren’t all essays. So I wanna really zero in on some things that aren’t essays because that can help you understand what an essay is. Because like I said, it is a bit amorphous and diffuse, that definition.

So somebody, I think it was Carol…I’m trying to match. If you don’t write your name in the same question then I’m not always sure if that was you. So somebody had asked, “How long is an essay?” And that’s a great question because it really doesn’t matter. There’s not a, sort of, fixed length. Like I would say that feature, like a narrative feature wouldn’t usually take place below 700 words, but I wouldn’t say the same thing about an essay. An essay can be 10,000 words, and you can probably even do it in 250 words. So it’s less about the length at hand.

So let’s look at another thing here, an op-ed. So this, you know, comes more than anything from newspapers, but this concept of an op-ed is something that I see a lot of people confusing for an essay. And this is really important to note because an essay should not be something in which you are opining, in which you are very vehemently and aggressively stating your opinion. That is an opinion piece, that is not an essay.

And this is really important because I was doing, you know, some refreshing background for today’s call, one of the things that I was reading quite about, that they talk about in several different articles in “The New York Times” in fact, is the death of the modern essay. There was something of a Renaissance of the modern essay when writing online came about, and “The New York Times” as they love to do has proclaimed the death of it.

And I’m gonna get a little bit more into that trajectory in a bit, but one of the reasons is because of this opining, because of this opinion-expressing and vehemence in essays. And that’s the thing, is that they aren’t. And so we can look at what “The New York Times” has called the death of the essay as the loss of the craft of the essay, which we’re gonna talk about, and the diversions into things that are more opinion-spouting than original essays.

So are all first-person thought pieces essays? Not necessarily, and we’re gonna look superficially on the next slide about the difference between journalism and narrative first-person pieces in this vein. But one of the things I wanna look at here is this concept of the non-fiction short story. As you might be led astray if you go out on your own to do some research and say, “Hey, I wanna start these essays, let me read some, let me see what other people are writing.” You might be led astray by book-length works or works published as books as a collection of essays that end up being more non-fiction short stories. So this is because the short story as a name, as a term has been rather appropriated by fiction writers as something that they do that we non-fiction writers do not. So occasionally you’ll see things that are called a book of essays, but they’re actually a book of short stories, but they are short stories that are all true.

So another question that we had, “Are essays good for newspapers?” I would say that newspapers are one of the places that you’ll commonly see essays, but it’s not necessarily the only thing that you should be pitching to a newspaper. And we’re gonna talk a little bit, like I said, at the end about markets, but one of things that I just wanna add on that note, and thanks for this question Carrie, is that a lot of places for you guys to write essays, especially to get your first few essays out there, are going to be your local, not necessarily papers, so not necessarily like the Chicago Tribune affiliate or The Sun affiliate or The Times affiliate that’s the main newspaper in your market, but the alternative weeklies that are printed on newsprint that are available for free in your city. That’s gonna be a really great source of opportunities for essays.

And, likewise, I actually just serendipitously had a coaching call with somebody yesterday or the day before who has a very cushy gig of writing essays every issue just about, you know, what’s on her mind or the change of the seasons for a regional magazine. So regional magazines, special-interest magazines, even trade magazines also can be a good place for that.

So somebody has asked, and I’ll mention this because it goes back to the last slide, “So creative non-fiction, is that an essay form?” So creative non-fiction is, sort of, similar to narrative non-fiction, I would say it can be an essay, but it’s typically not. Creative non-fiction is usually a term that’s used more for those things that are, like I was saying, short stories that happen to be true. So they’re more for narrative short stories is what the realm of creative non-fiction encases, let’s just say.

So I pulled this quote out and this comes from a New York Times piece which is actually reviewing a book by one of the really major essayists of our time. And I love this quote because it, just in that first sentence of this New York Times piece, they really encapsulate a lot of the issue with essays. And for those of you who are working on improving your writing and especially working on improving your pitching and getting your point across quickly, this is also really important. This sentence, like I said, began this New York Times article, but it is inherently very factual, very foundation-setting. It’s not flowery, okay?

And this is the way not just a lot of writing is going, but especially in essays. Essays are not meant to be places for you to take descriptive diatribes where you talk about what exists in a place through a lens of the senses. It’s more meant to be through the mind. And I’ll show this on another slide, but very poignantly, one of the main works today on essays and on essay writing and how to physically do it is called “To Show and to Tell,” as opposed to “Show, Don’t Tell,” which is something you hear me mention a lot. Even though it’s quite a trite phrase, it is still true and very useful.

So here in the beginning of “The New York Times” piece that I mentioned, they say, “The personal essay has always been a stepchild of serious literature, seemingly formless, hard to classify, lacking the tight construction of a short story or the narrative arc of a novel or memoir.” Important, memoir here they’re using as a stand-in for something that is not a novel, but is a first-person narrative which happens to be true. Okay, so this is narrative non-fiction that they’re talking about here.

“So lacking the lacking the tight construction of a short story or the narrative arc of a novel or memoir, such essays have given readers pleasure without winning cultural respect.” So, like I said, I love this because it encapsulates really what we need to know about essays. They have been around for a long time, they are a very legitimate and institutionalized way of writing. However, they aren’t given as much play, so to say, even though people really like them. And this, in part, is why blogging has so much with to do with essays and why if you have had a really good run with your blog and people really like it, that you are well-positioned to move into the world of essays, okay.

Because an essay on your blog, or rather a blog post, does satisfy many of these things that we’re talking about, right. It’s like the stepchild of serious writing, it can seem formless and hard to classify, right, we just call it a blog post, we don’t call it…sometimes we call it a round-up, but otherwise what is it if it’s not a round-up or a narrative and it’s on your blog, right? And it lacks this tight construction in terms of how a short story or a longer piece of the narrative arc would follow those tropes, those pathways that we talked about last week, like that 17-step incredibly detailed hero’s journey. But readers really like them without the greater, sort of, editorial, you know, ivory tower understanding why or really giving them credit for that.

So somebody has a question on the side about explaining what third person and first person is, and if that’s something you’re not clear on I really recommend reading about it more in-depth. But just a short answer is first person is when you’re writing as “I” and third person is when you are writing as omniscient or as, you know, everybody has a name and there’s no “I” character. Second person is when you are writing with the dominant person as “you,” but I really recommend reading more about that because that’s kind of outside to the scope of what we’re talking about now.

So let’s look at a couple of different ways that essays are not certain things because I know this is something, as several of you have put in your questions, it’s a little hard to grasp onto. So an essay, as opposed to what I’m always telling you about your other writing, that you need to make sure for instance, that when you put in together a pitch, when you’re working on a piece that there is a point, that there is something that you are convincing your reader of, and that every single detail in your pitch, in your eventual piece is in service of convincing the reader of that thing.

Essays are quite the opposite, really. So essays are not only the lack of a point that you’re trying to convince people of and an assemblage of unrelated things. But they go even further…and we’re gonna talk about this in a second. They go even further in that they shouldn’t have a point. It’s not even that they don’t have one, it’s that they shouldn’t. It’s that you should not lead the reader to a specific conclusion, but rather present information to them that offers them the opportunity to themselves think in the same way that you have been thinking on the page and come to their own personal conclusion, not one that you’ve lead them to by offering examples, but their own personal opinion on the situation. So this is why it’s really important, like I was talking about, that your opinion is not prevalent, aggressive, dominating, and dictating the flow of your essay. Because the point of the essay is for the reader to come to their own.

So we’ve talked about how it’s different than opinion pieces, but let’s talk about it’s different than narrative. So narrative, as we looked at last week, and that was why I looked at the narrative last week before we talked about this essay market this week, even though you might think of the features as, sort of, higher on the rung of articles, is that you need to understand the idea, the tenets of narrative, how narratives work, why they work before you break that, right. It’s like learning the rules of cooking or construction…my friends like to say that they have no idea why I’m constructing the things the way that I do, but they work, before you break them.

So the whole idea of writing an essay that isn’t driven by narrative means that you need to keep the reader interested throughout with each of the things that you are saying, but that you aren’t following that strict narrative path that we looked at last week where you set the scene, you present an obstacle, you try to overcome that obstacle, you encounter another obstacle, and another obstacle, and then things get really terrible, and then there’s the triumphant success. And then the story resolves, and the hero or the protagonist or the main subject of the piece is in a different better place at the end than they were at the beginning, right? That’s the very short form for those of you who weren’t with us last week of what a narrative arc entails.

So in that, like an opinion piece where, by the end, I want you to also believe something that I have set to prove to you, a narrative arc sets out that the conditions at the beginning of the piece by the end have changed in a positive way most likely, but there has been some transformation. However, in an essay you might be presenting scenes or anecdotes. You might only be presenting your thoughts, you might only be presenting statistics or other types of analytical evidence…we’ll get to that in a little bit. But the idea, like I said, is that you do not arrive somewhere. So it’s as if you are taking the reader on the journey with you, but then you stop before you get to the end. That’s, kind of, one way of thinking about it.

Okay, so let’s look at journalism. So how is an essay different than journalism? I had, on a coaching call this week, somebody tell me not that it stresses her out per se, but she just doesn’t love when she’s writing pieces that are about other people or telling other people stories and she has to make sure that she has completely fact-checked everything, that she’s got all these details, that they are absolutely right, and that she is faithfully representing the people that she’s discussed.

In essays, you don’t have to worry about that faithful representation. Now I’m not telling you, again, that this is the place to be aggressive about your opinions and so on, but that this is place where the important thing is what you think, he important thing is your observations or your take on this topic. And that is actually, kind of, the key to unlocking how you can write an essay about anything because you have your own personal opinion on every single thing that you come across, you know, in the world.

Like, for instance, right now, I’m in the San Francisco Airport so in California where they’re eco-conscious. And here we have not just a trash and recycling, but they also have a compost here in the airport. And I just got into a very unusual spat with my typically very tranquil best friend over throwing something in the trash can that she said should be recycling, and it was a type of plastic that we can’t even recycle in my building in New York. And that the point of me, sort of, treading together all of these disparate things….right, I’m in San Francisco, then I’m in Boston with my friend last week, then I’m thinking back to my building in New York, is that this is how essays work. They take these disparate moments that are around a theme and they are viewed through the lens of your experience with them.

And this is why, like I was saying, essays can be hard to really put your finger on because they are all about your opinion and your experience. They are inherently different to every writer. The essays that come from every writer are different in how they come out because different writers remember things differently, or their memories, not just that they remember an experience differently, but the way that they jump from one memory to another, the way that they make associations are inherently different. And that’s why essays are such a personal form of writing. So unlike journalism where your job is to faithfully represent the facts, the “objective reality” of the world, in an essay you are endeavoring to present your personal take on things.

So then how is that different than a diary, right? Somebody who is or was predominantly a fiction writer and has now moved into, let’s call it the creative non-fiction memoir, narrative non-fiction world, her first book of that take was called “A Diary.” And she was talking at a conference about how she came up with that title. And it was, in part, because in a book-length form, narrative non-fiction is somewhat new, but also because it was essentially one long essay that she was writing, and she didn’t really know the name for a book-length essay was. But here’s the thing, is that a diary inherently has, yes, your take on different things, your thoughts. But what diaries also have much more than essays and even much more than this person’s book who I just referred to is a play-by-play of what happened.

So I have a good friend who, when we lived in Italy, would journal every night and then she would read her book for a while. And so, I knew that if we were sharing a room together somewhere, you know, going to bed meant about 45 minutes from when she was actually gonna be able to turn the light out. And that’s because she would sit there and write down in her diary what had happened that day. And then I noticed when weren’t living in Italy anymore and I was staying with her one time that she didn’t journal. And I asked her, I said, “Why aren’t you writing in your journal or your diary?” And she said, “Because interesting things aren’t happening now.”

So this is what I mean by a diary much more than an essay is about the play-by-play. It’s about the recording of events that have taken place. But that’s not something that we’re looking to do in an essay. Can you just hold on one moment, guys? Okay great, got it, okay. So what you’re doing in a diary is much more about recording the facts as they have happened than sharing your opinions. Sharing your opinions is something that happens in your diary, but it’s not the gist of it. Whereas what the essay should be, as opposed to a diary, is it should be all the opinions and observations, and just that modicum, just the tiniest bit of…you could call it narration, but I just like to think of it as events, of relaying of events, the smallest bit of relaying of events possible and the most your observation and your connections.

So as we’ve talked about what essays aren’t, what this is really boiling down to is that the essay is about your observations and the connections that you draw between those things and things that have happened in the past or other things that you know about. So I took a workshop on the personal essay with this lovely, lovely gentleman who is the editor of “The Traveler’s Tales” books which put out a book of, you know, non-fiction short stories, let’s call it, having to with travel every year. They do the best women’s travel writing and some other collections. He also publishes book-length works. And he has been a newspaper writer for a long time. He’s written features. He’s done lots and lots of different writing, but now he specifically teaches personal essays.

And I remember the first day in his workshop, I was just flabbergasted because he basically got up there and wrote out loud for us a personal essay that came from him sitting on the highway on the way to the workshop venue that morning. And he talked about how he was there and this reminded him of this other thing and then he jumped back in time with this thing that had happened with his son, and that reminded him of this other thing that happened with his son, and so on and so forth until he came back at the end to that initial moment of sitting in the car after this journey. But the journey didn’t necessarily go somewhere, right? It came back to him sitting in the car, and it wasn’t that he wasn’t a different person.

And we’re gonna get into now, we’re gonna start talking about ways of constructing essays, but I just wanted to share that as we’re talking about what essays aren’t. Because, like I said, essays are gonna be slightly different for each of you, but what that means is that part of them is the freedom. So narrative has arcs, journalism has roles. Diaries are also free but that also means that they are free from the need to keep readers interested, which is not the case when you are writing essays for the greater market.

So I mentioned these names before but I just want to give these to you so that you have to look up later. And I’m gonna drop here in the chat box…this is the actual link to that New York Times page that I was talking about, which is “The New York Times” page where they really give you a lot of tools, and they give you particular essays to look at. And this page from “The New York Times” was put together in response to essays that are pitched to “The New York Times.” So this is really great because it’s from editors who know why they reject things and have put together a list of tips to help you to not get rejected in the same way.

These two at the top, “The Art of the Personal Essay” and “To Show and to Tell,” these books are by that gentleman that I mentioned who is really, kind of, one of the leading figures of personal essays today. And “To Show and to Tell,” even though “The Art of the Personal Essay” sounds like it should be the title which is telling you how to do it, “To Show and to Tell” is much more of that how-to manual about how to go about doing it. And this gentleman, I’ve seen him speak, he’s really lovely, but quite academic. So if academic style of information dispensation is your style, check out these items by Phillip. If you like something that’s a little more web-based and quick, check out “The New York Times.” They’ve got a very round-up style list of their favorite tips on writing essays, and a lot, a lot, a lot of links for you to read as well. Both of Phillip’s books also have many essay examples for you to look at as well.

And another great resource is the salon.com essay section. And I’ve seen the woman who used to be the essay editor at “Salon” speak several times, and she’s just lovely and a really great…her name is Kim. And a really great essay of hers to look up to see what essays are like today, even though it’s not within the realm of travel, is her essay on when she left her child in her car. And I mentioned this, and there’s another place I’m gonna type here in the chat box called “Granta”. “Granta” is a literary magazine, but they have many articles available online. But it’s non-fiction and it has a lot of these essays similar to the one of Kim’s on “Salon” that I had mentioned.

So let’s get into actual ways to put these “formless” essays together, all right? I’ve got five for you that I wanna look at in particular. And, like I mentioned, don’t forget that “The New York Times” also offers a lot of exercises and starting points for writing essays as well. So that link that I put there in the chat box is definitely worth checking out. So here are five approaches.

The first one, I’ve already mentioned to you, this time dilation to give weight to the present. This is what Larry did in his car on the highway that day before he presented the verbal version of his essay to us. So I remember after leaving his workshop that I was home in New York and I was crossing the street between about the Guggenheim and Central Park, which is across the street from the Guggenheim, and I was just waiting at the stoplight. And sitting there at the stoplight, I couldn’t tell what it is now because I wrote this essay years ago, but this entire essay just came to me from sitting at the stoplight.

So this time dilation thing is really a useful technique that you can be sitting somewhere looking at something and that reminds you of something which reminds of something which reminds you of something. And then from that you get not, like I said, a conclusion. But from that you get this thought piece, this essay. So somebody said they’re not seeing the link. It should be right here in the chat box. I just put it two chats back. It’s the mobile.nytimes.com link.

So the second way that I wanna invite you to look at personal essays is this one that I mentioned with Kim and her piece about leaving her child in the car and getting arrested. And this is something that “Granta,” which I mentioned also in the chat box, particularly specializes in. These are essays where you take an anecdote, you take something that happened, and then you examine through the lens of larger societal complications.

So for instance, in this piece about leaving her child in the car, Kim uses it to talk about parenting has changed from when she was young and you could just go run around in the neighborhood and your parents had no idea where you were…you might have gotten kidnapped, you might have gotten hit by a car, or you might have run down the street, and the concept of the good Samaritan. And the person who called the police when she was in the store for exactly a minute and a half and took a picture of her child sitting in the car without her there, what is that role? What does it say about that person or about society, that somebody did that? And this is where, like I said, it’s very important to avoid opinions and even to avoid presenting the details in your essay in a way that makes the reader be pushed towards one opinion or another.

Now a, sort of, complication or an extension of the larger societal complications of a single incident is something called an object lesson, which is the larger implications of a single object. So again, I’m gonna take a non-travel example here. So there’s actually a series of small books called “Object Lessons.” And I saw this delightful panel in Reykjavik over the summer of some people who have written object lesson books. There’s entire books just about socks, about trash.

Those of you who are foodies are probably familiar with Michael Pollan. One of my favorite books of his is called “The Botany of Desire.” And he takes four foods and essentially gives you four quite long essays about these foods, about their place in history, about what they mean to people. A newer book of his called “Cooked” does the same thing with four different cooking methods. These object lessons essentially take something as a point of departure and then dig and dig and dig both through the lens of your own observations and your own experiences beside them, as well as how other people experience them. But always digging, going below the surface and never settling on a specific conclusion.

Now another thing that’s sort of related to these object lessons is this concept of vignettes. So these are the essays that are most commonly miscategorized as non-fiction short stories. So this is when…and these are some quotes that I pulled a New York Times piece about Phillip’s work. But these are ones where the essays themselves are almost like snapshots. And this is a word that you’ve probably heard me use before to talk about different types of articles that you can be writing.

So these snapshots are just tiny scenes that are designed to give you a glimpse of something. However, they should be giving you a glimpse not just in a purely descriptive way. They should give you a glimpse in a way that makes you wonder. And I’ve mentioned this in the past, but a really great example of this is in Don George’s book “The Way of Wanderlust,” which is a collection of his own past published pieces. And he has one that takes place in art museum on the French Riviera that I absolutely recommend reading if you wanna get into this snapshots style of writing essays.

Now the last one is the question. So rather than taking a specific object as a point of departure or a moment or the larger implications of that moment, as opposed to the historical lead-up to that moment, you can take a question. So in this case, I’ve pulled out this quote which really shows the types of questions that are useful for a departure point for an essay. So, in this case, it says, “The ultimate question may not be, ‘What is the correct critical judgment to make a particular film?’ but, ‘What are our different needs and understanding at various stages in life?’”

And so what this means is that if you’re gonna write an essay which starts from a question as a point of departure, that question needs to be open-ended. The same as when we talked about doing interviews, that you wanna give people questions that are not yes or no questions, as an essayist, you need to give yourself open-ended questions if you are going to use a question as a point of departure for an essay.

So someone’s asked me to repeat. So “The Way of Wanderlust” by Don George is the book that contains the story about the art museum, which I was saying is a great example of this vignette style.

So just one more point on this question process. So question essays can be things, like, you know, “Why do different airlines board differently?” And you could talk about some different airlines that you’ve taken and some hilarious incidents or harrowing incidents that happened during the boarding process, and how different airlines give different reasons that they board in different ways. And, you know end…and I’m gonna talk, again, about endings and how to do them in this soft-landing way. And end with saying something akin to that, you know, each airline gives its own psychological rationale for the boarding process, but humans inherently defy logical categorization, or something like that where you’re showing that there is no definitive answer to the boarding process, to how to board correctly, or even why different airlines do it differently.

So I said we’re gonna talk about landing. So just a, sort of, funny clip on this…I don’t have the link readily available to drop in the chat box. But if you look up the anniversary of Shakespeare, there was a major Shakespearean anniversary recently, and there was a delightful collection of really, really top British actors and even Prince Charles who did a very funny skit about the “Hamlet” phrase “To be or not to be, that is the question.”

And this skit was all about which word you should land on, which word you should emphasize, and how that emphasis means different things and what is correct. So it’s a really delightful little YouTube video, and I invite you all to watch it because it really talks a lot about this concept of landing and makes you understand how what you emphasize in your piece, even at the smallest level, can have a really big impact on how that piece is perceived.

And so, one of the big actors talk about how it’s very important to land. But in essays, it’s quite the opposite, as I mentioned a few times. But in essays, the key is not to land. So it’s not to land or it’s not where to land or where not to land, it’s not to land, period. So what that means, and this is the delicacy of writing essays, is that if your essay goes along with this wonderful exploration, your own observations like a pastiche of different scenes, but then you come to a conclusion at the end, it’s gonna feel flat. That essay is not going to have accomplished its form as an essay because you’ve, by making a conclusion at the end, turned it more into a different type of piece.

So if you write an essay and you read it, or if you write an essay and you send it out and you’re not getting good feedback, check your ending because you may have tried to give it a trite little wrap-up rather than just letting it sit there. And this is really key both with the ending and with the whole piece itself. And this is actually something that I’ve stolen…oh, there’s an extra “it” in there. But this is something that I’ve stolen from Kim who is the former “Salon” essay editor that I’ve mentioned, which is that “If the piece doesn’t make you uncomfortable, it’s not honest.” You know, “writers” in air quotes are really big about honesty in your writing. But this is one of the best ways to know, is that if you are not uncomfortable, then you are not, then your essay is lacking some details.

So I talked about five different points of departure. If you’ve got an idea already, now what do you do with it? Where are some places that you can publish that as an essay? So first and foremost, somebody had asked something early on, “If my submission is considerably less words that suggested in the guideline, should I send it anyway?” And this is a great point that I wanna make sure to clarify, is that essays are the only time that you absolutely have to write the piece before you send it in, before the editor can possibly consider it. Because like I said the ending and just the observations that you make along the way are what makes the essay. So the editor needs to see all of it there on the page to decide it if they like or not.

So this is not question of treating you as a professional or not. All essayists must write the complete essay before they turn it in. So if a particular essay section has asked for essays of a certain word length, I would recommend writing the editor before you send the piece and saying, “You know, I have a finished essay of this length for your section. I know this section is typically this many words, would you accept a submission that’s less than that?” And they’ll let you know, and that way you have the opportunity to change the essay before you send it in.

Now Carrie had asked earlier about newspapers, “Are newspapers good place for essays?” They can be, and we talked about that quite a bit, so I’m gonna leave that one be for now. The women’s magazines, this the big place, guys. A lot of the women’s magazines have annual contests for essays. “Real Simple” has one quite famously. But all of the women’s magazines accept essays. They all do. They are very well-paid clips and they can be a really great way to get into a magazine that has a lot of cachet that you wouldn’t get into otherwise. And even more importantly, these essays that you have about travel, their home is most likely not in a travel magazine. It is in a magazine that publishes essays, and that is something like the women’s magazines, okay?

Another one is columns. So I gave you an example already of somebody that I coach who does have a delightful column that she does, but these are the types of things that come up once you have written for an editor for a certain amount of time, okay? So you can’t just go to an editor that you don’t work with and pitch her a column of your essays. The only caveat there is if you already are a column essayist and you have a back catalog of essays that you have had published in other places and a record. But otherwise, you’ll need to work with an editor for a while before you pitch them for you to do a column for them.

Another really big gold mine of essay sections is back-of-the-book. So this is the articles that come after the feature. These are really often overlooked, but I’m seeing a lot of essays these days come up in that portion of the magazine, and especially with airline magazines as well. So as you’re looking at magazines, especially when you’re on a flight, make sure to flip to the back because that’s where a lot of these essays live right now.

And then the main place, in fact the easiest place to get these essays published is in independent magazines. We talked about these quite in-depth during the workshop over the weekend for those of you considering whether or not to get the replay. We talked quite in-depth about how to pitch and what they are looking for and how to know if they pay. But the thing about the independent magazines is that they tend to be…I usually call it “all feature,” but they’re just really open. They don’t have any rubricked formats about what they publish and they to publish a mix of narrative features, essays, and photo essays, okay?

So thank you so much for joining us. We’ve got one question, “What is a photo essay?” A photo essay is completely different than what we talked about today. It’s not an essay in structure at all, like what we’ve talked about. It’s a series of photos with short captions that tell a story.

And that actually might be a topic for a future webinar. So thanks for asking that question. I’ll look into doing a webinar on photo essays in the new year.

So thank you guys so much for joining me for this a-little-bit-short-today webinar, but hopefully you were able to hear me okay and not too many airline announcements in the background, and I’m really glad that we were able to get this to work out.

So thank you guys so much and have a really, really lovely weekend. Bye-bye.

Taking Control of Your Freelance Travel Writing Finances Transcript

Download (PDF, 279KB)

I had put this caveat at the end of the call last week that we’re gonna be specifically talking about preparing your taxes as a freelancer for U.S. based or for U.S. citizens who are based elsewhere. So some of those of you who are on the call, I recognize U.S. being folks from Canada, so just be aware that what we’re talking about is primarily gonna be U.S. tax code here and how that plays out.

Because what happens, and I mentioned this quite a bit in various discussions that have come up, either with freelancers who I coach or folks who have attended our workshops, is that the way that finances, when it comes to taxes, work for freelance food and travel writers is, unfortunately, very different than a lot of other small businesses. Not because the tax code is different. Obviously, the tax code is the same for everybody. But just in terms of what counts for us as business and what does not for others.

And I know a lot of people who have perhaps, you know, an accountant that they’ve used for a long time or they’ve been told that if they’re gonna be a business or a freelancer, then they should be having an accountant who knows this better prepare their taxes. But what I’ve seen by a merge is that the tax accountants of the world, just like every other person that you run into in your non-travel writing daily life are not super familiar with travel writers or food writers and the particularities of that tax situation. And we’re gonna talk way more about this.

If you have very general questions, like how does it work to write off my food or travel, that’s obviously something that we’re gonna cover in the slides. So the things that would be great to get questions on here and what else you guys need to learn about would be specific things. If you have a specific situation, if you have something specific that you have been wondering if you can write off.

So what we’re gonna do today is that I’ve kind of got a trajectory for us, but it’s a little bit shorter in terms of the number of slides that I have than I usually do because I wanna leave a lot of time for the specific questions that I know a lot of you probably have.

So what we’re gonna cover today, like I said, is we’re going to start by laying the groundwork in terms of what are expense categories? What should we even be thinking about expensing in the first place? What are the big buckets and what is everything else? So I’ve got a Schedule C, which is the tax reporting form for self-employed individuals or…that’s the same thing if you are a self-employed individual versus if you have an LLC or another type of solo business. That’s all called a flow-through tax.

So it goes on your personal individual taxes and you use the Schedule C for your business expenses. If you are registered as a corporation, which I doubt any of you are, the difference is an LLC is a limited liability corporation as opposed to an S corp, which is the type of corporation that, you know, Merrill Lynch, Bank of America, McDonald’s, those types of things are. So I would imagine that any of you who are registered would be an LLC or nothing and we can talk if you people have questions about which one you should be and why. Go ahead and drop that in the chat box and I’ll address that if that’s something that is of interest to people.

But so we’re gonna look at what are the categories from a legal tax code perspective for people who are self-employed in terms of your business expenses. And, obviously, there are similar categories for large corporations, but just how they’re handled on taxes is a bit different. It’s not on the same form, which is the Schedule C that I had mentioned earlier. So we’re gonna spend a lot of time talking about that and then we’re gonna look at how this plays out in terms of, obviously, the day-to-day, what you can and can’t write off, how that should affect your decision making processes about what you spend and how that goes against your income, and how to do that on a day-to-day level. So that’s what we’re gonna talk about today.

So on the top of what we’re gonna talk about today, I just wanna say that… Two things. Obviously, I have been running my own freelance writing business and done all of these taxes myself for many years, but also, I had the privilege of ghostwriting for a business professor for several years for her website which was about freelancing. So I’ve been writing about this stuff for quite a while. But even before that, even when I was in a full-time position, I was able to take a workshop that specifically covered finances, not just as a freelance business, but as a freelance food and travel writer.

So what I’m talking to you about today comes from that as well as a gentleman who himself is both a professional tax preparer, he does 700 tax returns every year, and a food writer. He gave a great talk recently at the conference I was at over the weekend and was very generous in sharing his slides and his brain for me to pick in preparing this talk for you guys today with you guys as a resource. So I have got my own slides, I’ve also got some slides of his that I might go through if we start to get into some nitty-gritty questions that are more specifically answered by his slides.

But what I really wanna teach you today is to think about the principles that guide what you should or should not do with your own tax reporting, the way that you spend money. Because, often, this can change the way you spend money when you better understand what you can put on your taxes. So I wanna give you the guiding principle so that you really understand with any expense that you come to whether that counts for business or not and how you should approach it. So we’re talking a lot about principles today and so that’s why I wanted to give a lot of time at the end to talk about specific situations that you may find yourself in.

But with that, I must also give the caveat that I will probably…I’ve put in all of the materials leading up to this webinar, and I wanna say now, and I will probably say again at the end of the webinar, please keep in mind that while I am drawing on the information of a professional tax preparer and other resources, that even the professional tax preparer would tell you, and I’ll tell it to you in his own words, because he’s got a great little caveat about this, even he would tell you that all tax information, all financial information that you’re hearing about how to prepare your taxes, your finances for a freelance business is meant for educational purposes and that your own situation is unique and that you should consult a professional.

But like I said, you wanna know what your options are. You wanna know what to ask that professional, but you should consult a professional about your specific situation. So everything that we’re saying today is meant for education purposes and not to be taken in the vein of professional tax advice from a licensed consultant in that area.

So before we get rolling today, I wanna hear two things from you guys. I wanna hear number one, have you done or started your 2017 taxes? This is number one. You can reply in the chat box. You can write number one and yes, no, partially, something like that. So that’s number one. Have you started your 2017 freelance business taxes?

Number two, where are you or how do you or do you at all regularly track your income expenses, expenses within specific categories, things like that? So, again, number one is where are you with your 2017 taxes? Yes, no, in process, something like that. Have you started them? And number two is do you have a system for regularly tracking your business expenses, your business finances? And do you do expense reports?

I feel like there’s one or two people on here that I know are just super with it in terms of the way that they run their freelance businesses. So some might also do expense reports. And expense reports and per diems are these fantastic things that freelancers don’t often talk about that I’m excited to also spend some time chatting about today. So thank you guys so much for sharing that.

Again, number one is for have you started your 2017 taxes? And number two is for do you regularly track your business expenses? Do you do expense reports? Okay, great. I’m just gonna read through the responses here. A lot of you have finished your taxes or started them. I’m so impressed with you guys. Every year I tell myself over the holidays, “I’m gonna do it now,” and that absolutely never happens.

And I wanted to expand on… I’ll just take a second while you guys are still responding to expand on what Stacy asked here. She said, “I’m wondering about quarterly taxes.” So this question actually has two pieces. “I’m wondering about quarterly taxes. If you have a spouse who has a traditional salaried job, does it make sense to withhold extra money from your spouse’s paycheck so you can avoid paying quarterly taxes?”

So incumbent I believe here is that they are filing jointly as opposed to filing as married but individuals, which is something that if you are in the States and you have a spouse who has a traditional salaried job, you should most definitely file jointly. Because what happens is there is a certain tax rate for couples that more or less assumes that both members of that couple are working in a way that has a certain amount of taxation burden and when you are a freelance food and travel writer, your tax burden should effectively be zero. It should be very, very low and we’ll talk way more about why going forward.

But when you file your tax return with a spouse who is traditionally employed, you bring their tax burden down quite a bit and you end up getting a lot of money back. And this is something that I discovered when I was married very quickly and it’s fantastic. And we basically take that extra money that we get back and split it in half and I call it my freelance bonus for the year. So there’s two things incumbent here though.

She also said, “I’m wondering about quarterly taxes. And does it make sense to withhold extra money from your spouse’s paycheck?” The answer here is no, but there’s a larger question here about quarterly taxes that we’re gonna deal with on the last slide. So I’m gonna hang on to that quarterly tax bit until we get to the end. And, Stacy, check back with me if your question isn’t answered at that point.

Okay, great. So we’ve got people who have started their taxes, some people have started. Bless people who haven’t started like me. It’s kind of like on my list that I’m gonna set aside a week to get it done. And okay, in terms of tracking expenses, I’m really intrigued that a lot of you do have systems in place for doing that. And I’d love for you to drop in the chat box as I start going through the big me talking section of the call, to be dropping into the chat box of how you are tracking your expenses now.

If you track them in a spreadsheet, are you doing it by the categories on the Schedule C? Are you doing it by categories that make sense to you? Somebody says they’ve started using QuickBooks Self-employed. I actually had problems with this and I’ll tell you why and you’ll probably understand more once I get to the big bulky part of this presentation. So I wanna get into that because that will answer a lot of questions and lay a lot of groundwork for us. But Jade has said, “I owe so much more money since getting married. How do I get my freelance bonus?” So we’ll, hopefully, have answered this by the time we go through, but if not, Jade, when we get to the end, circle back with me on that.

So a lot of the answers to a lot of different questions which are around I owe so much taxes as a freelance writer or how can I owe less taxes as a freelance writer, they come down to what you are writing off and writing off more things. But before we talk about writing off things, we need to talk about something important, which is, as I’ve said on this slide, keeping it professional for the IRS.

Now have any of you guys… I hate the word audit. Like I’m like touching the wood at the table that I’m sitting at right now. How many of you guys feel like you’re not writing off things on your taxes because you’re afraid that you will trigger an audit? Let me know in the chat box if you feel like you’re not writing off a lot of stuff because you feel like it’s gonna be a red flag for the IRS and trigger an audit because this is something that I hear really quite a lot.

And the key here, the linchpin here is really, are you writing off the right things, right, on the one hand, which we’re gonna talk all about, but it’s also, it should not… God, I’m so superstitious about this one thing. I’m touching wood like the whole time I’m talking to you. It should not be an issue even if you get audited if you are writing off the right things and you are operating your business properly. So let me explain what I mean by that. Anany, I think you probably need to write off more things, though.

Okay, so let me explain what I mean by that, running your business properly and what that means to the IRS. So there’s a lot of, let’s call it, business operations that freelance writers tend not to externalize. Now, when I say externalize here, I mean have written-out processes for how your business is run or putting things like how many pitches you sent each week on a calendar or having a spreadsheet where you track how many expenses…oh, sorry, how many pitches you have sent on a week over week basis. Or having the level of finance tracking where you are forecasting your income and listing your cash flow, the clients that you have completed work for, but have not received money from, where things are in terms of invoicing.

Now, a lot of you, I have no doubt, had a different business of some kind of before you started freelancing and you may have started your freelance writing as a part-time occupation. And some of you are gonna be still in that state. I know a lot of you on the call today, just from knowing you, are relatively full-time in terms of your freelance. It might be that those of you that join us later are the ones who are not full-time, so you are not able to join us at 3.30. So more of you who join us later might be in a part-time situation.

So it’s very common to come in, especially if you’re in travel writing and especially if you have a blog, it’s very common to come in as a part-time time expenditure, that part of your business life. Okay? So it’s also very common then, and this situation might apply to several of you at this moment, that what you think of as your freelance writing business or your blog or something like that would really technically for IRS purposes be considered a hobby.

Now, you might not think it’s a hobby. You might think you’re putting tons of time into it, you’re spending money on professional development, you’re spending hours listening to me or being coached by me or something like that. So what makes it…for tax purposes, what makes it a business rather than a hobby? It’s really all about intent and that’s what I’m gonna show you for a lot of the things we’re gonna look at, is that it’s more about intent than technicalities on a lot of the stuff.

So even if you are not making money, okay, this is very important, even if you are, this year and next year or last year and this year, making absolutely zero money, I have several coaching students who are in this situation. They have come from careers doing wildly different things and they’re in a very big education point right now of their travel writing journey and they are making sure to take the right steps and develop the right techniques before they start throwing themselves into the marketplace. So they’re in a position where they have a certain amount of time where they’re making no money or perhaps very little money, right? That doesn’t mean that it’s a hobby for tax purposes. That’s not what makes it a hobby.

What makes it a hobby is the degree to which you are pursuing this business. Okay? So what that means is if you are spending a lot of time learning, you need to be capturing that. You need to have on your calendar this webinar that you are attending. You need to have on your calendar three hours in the Travel Magazine Database learning about magazines. You need to capture on your calendar those three hours that you spent working on a pitch. If you have a time tracker, as you’ve no doubt heard me extol the gospel of, and we’re gonna talk much more about time trackers in one of the upcoming webinars in the series. If you have a time tracker, great.

Time tracker can kind of sub for a calendar in this thing here. But what’s important is that you are tracking. You’re tracking your time, you’re tracking your marketing efforts. Okay? And we’re gonna talk much more about tracking expenses as well. But it’s very important for the IRS, for the purpose of showing that this is not a hobby, that this is a business that should be on a Schedule C, that you are pursuing this professionally, and that comes down to professional organization and tracking just like a business would, and having meetings on your calendar with yourself that are strategy sessions to review where you are with these things. Okay?

So the very, very, very first step, even though we’re talking about finances today, we’re gonna talk about a lot more about tracking your time and all of that down the line, is that for your taxes, if you are not 100% full-time doing this, if you have another job, if you’re going to be writing off your travel stuff, you need to be showing a demonstrable paper trail fashion that this is a profession that you are pursuing. Okay? So part of that is, obviously, gonna be education development that we talked about. Part of it is going to be expenses. And I find that a lot of people think, “I’m not earning money yet, so I can’t write this stuff off,” and that’s absolutely not true.

But there’s also something I don’t wanna take too much time to talk about right now because it’s a little bit advanced, let’s call it advanced taxes for freelancers. Is that if you choose, if you are in a situation where you choose to not write anything off or you are in a situation where you haven’t written anything off for a few past tax cycles, but you definitely did have expenses in prior years that go towards this profession of travel writing, those things can be put on your taxes in a big lump sum called start-up costs. There’s a section on U.S. taxes where you can write off prior things in previous years, I believe it’s up to five years, that you have not written off before this point as start-up costs.

So if you are kind of like, “Oh, my God,” at the end of this call, “There’s so many things I should’ve written off last year and the year before that,” and like you’re kicking yourself, you can redo your taxes. You can redo your taxes and still get that refund or you can also write them off as start-up expenses. So if you’re in the position like Jade where you are a full-time freelance writer and you’ve been a full-time freelancer for a few years and you find at the end of this call that there’s just a crap ton of stuff you should have written off in previous years, you might want to pursue refiling your taxes and that’s something that you can do at any time. It’s quite easy to do.

So I just wanna put that out there. That this is really the linchpin. You don’t have to wait until you are making money, but you just need to be methodical and clear and professional about the paper trail of how, not just your money, but your time is being spent because that’s really how they define what is professional pursuit and what is not. All right? So let’s move on.

This is very tiny, don’t worry, I have the words of this written on another slide. This is the Schedule C. When you look at it on paper… And I can make it smaller, so you can see the whole thing. When you look at it on paper, this is kind of the defining document of the finances of a small business or a solo business as far as IRS is concerned. So you’ll see here, there’s about two pages… And I don’t wanna make it so, so, so small. But you’ll see we’ve got two pages here and on this side, there’s a lot of tiny, tiny, tiny sections.

Then over here, there’s this whole thing which is probably too small for you guys to see, so I’m gonna read it, but here, what I’m circling right now is cost of goods sold, and then there’s a part, information on your vehicles, and then there’s another the part, other expenses. Obviously, there’s a short part here about income, but this is expenses, this is expenses, this is expenses, this is expenses. It’s all about expenses. Okay? So let me go back so you can see a little bit bigger that expenses part.

And part of this is because as small business owners, we have a lot of expenses. We really do. And I don’t know if there’s like a cultural message that’s gotten drilled into our head or if it’s just by being afraid of auditing or what it is that people are very reluctant to…instead of owning up, but to write off those expenses on their taxes. So a lot of what we’re gonna talk about today, and I probably have about 10 or 15 minutes that we’ll do on this, is about expenses. Okay? And it’s because I want you to be familiar with what they are so that you aren’t missing them. And I’m gonna give you some tricks because there’s gonna be a lot of information that we talk about today so that you don’t need to necessarily remember everything I say.

And some of those tricks revolve around something that I use to prepare my taxes which is TurboTax. There’s no marketing for TurboTax in this webinar, it’s just what I use to prepare my taxes and has for a very long time. Tell me, though, in the chat box, how many of you guys use TurboTax. Just you can say TurboTax, yes or no or just say yes or no because I haven’t asked any other questions in a while. So you can just say yes or no. So, again, tell me if you have used or currently use TurboTax. Or if you have a tax preparer is another thing to drop in the chat box at this time.

So the thing that I found was that when I first started doing my taxes, I used to do professional theater, some of you may have heard me say this, so I pretty much always had a full-time “day job” that was a W2. For those of you that don’t know the difference, a common industry shorthand is a W2 is like a salaried or exempt but like a full-time position and a 1099 is a contract position. So most of you who do freelance writing will receive 1099s from your clients although that is something that is changing a little bit this year.

So 1099s used to always come from clients. Now, as things like Stripe and PayPal and Venmo and different things become used to transmit money between entities and the freelance writers they’re employing, a lot of the 1099s or the tax documents that you used to receive at the end of the year from the person who is paying you, will now be coming from PayPal, particularly PayPal, but from also the credit card companies, different things like that.

So when I started to do my taxes… I’ve pretty much always had my full-time thing which is very easy, my W2 thing, and then also this 1099 Schedule C situation because I was doing professional theater. And when I started doing theater as a professional, there were certain expenses that everybody talked about, that everybody was very good about tracking, and one of the biggest ones was mileage.

How many of you guys as freelancers track your mileage? So tell me in the chat box. Mileage, yes or no. I’m just from reviewing what everybody said about TurboTax on here. Okay, great. It’s kind of split 50/50 on the TurboTax here. So mileage, yes or no. Mileage is something that I wanna make sure that we talk about because when you prepare your taxes, whether you do it on paper or with your accountant or on TurboTax, this is something that’s separate from all the other expenses, so I wanted to talk about it as its own entity and also separate from travel because it is the way that it is done for tax purposes. It is separate from travel.

So there’s a couple of different ways that you can approach mileage. So if you are an individual who has your own car, say you live in a certain area… I’m gonna take Annalisa, for instance. So Annalisa is somebody that I coach. She lives in Portland and she’s in the position to do a lot of writing about Oregon, about her state, about generally the northwest and her area. So she’s in a position where she might be driving to different places that she’s covering.

There’s a couple of different ways that you can go about this mileage tracking for expense purposes. When I did theater, a director that I worked with was super meticulous about it. He had a little notebook that he kept in his car and every time he was driving to and from rehearsal, he would record the odometer number when he started and when he got back and he was just the best at it. He was so good at doing it every single day.

If you live in a city, this might be that you are taking the subway to meetings. I used to buy different subway sort of tickets, so to say, for meetings that I was going to versus for personal getting around the city. So I had a different metro card for the trips that I was using that were going to meetings and I used to have a lot of meetings in the city when I first moved there that were related to work. You should also be doing this when you go, of course, to networking events. So if you are in your own city going to a Travel Massive or a similar networking event like that, you can be either tracking your mileage or using a separate subway pass or something like that that you use for work.

So let’s talk about a different approach, though. This is the day-to-day tracking all the time. I don’t know about you guys, but most people, a lot of people, especially freelance travel writers, are not necessarily going to be that systems-oriented around it. So something that we do is that we don’t necessarily write down the odometer from here to there, but what we do is we look at the number of trips. So for instance, I have the retreat house. I’m either up there doing things for the firm, they go to the CSA, which is something that we sell, or I’m preparing for our writing events. I don’t really go up to the retreat house for any other purpose besides work.

So what that means is that I know from my calendar every time I’ve gone to the house, I know how many miles it is, and I just put those into different buckets. Is this for this type of work or that type of work? And then at the end of the year, I can total up those miles. I used to do a lot of very long road trips for work, so I would drive, for instance, from New York all the way down to Virginia, and I would drive all the way out to Arkansas, and then down to Florida, and all the way back up and go through all the states along the way because I covered them for magazines that I was writing for. And in those cases, it made much more sense to just write down my odometer at the beginning of that big long road trip and then again at the end because that entire road trip was for work purposes.

But typically, for back and forths of places that I go regularly for work, I know what that mileage is, and then I just do tick marks. I just take that number of miles and I multiply it. So those are two different approaches for doing your mileage. Kerry has mentioned something which is different that I wanna mention. I said we’re gonna talk about travel later. So receipts for parking and things like that, that’s a little bit different. That’s different than this mileage statement. So mileage is specifically for driving your own vehicle, okay, and it’s related also to the wear and tear on the car.

So what happens is you put your total expenses related to your vehicle for the year and the mileage relates to that. It also relates to, and I wanna make sure that you guys know this, the total mileage driven on your car for the whole year. So you wanna make sure that you have that odometer reading at the beginning of the year and at the end for all mileage because you need to put in the percentage of use of the car for work purposes versus non, just like for a home office, which are also gonna talk about in a minute.

Yeah, Catherine, I’m totally with you about being terrible at tracking mileage. I would say that’s the one thing that I give away money on my taxes every year, that I’m just not good enough about because to me, the onus of tracking that is just something that on a day-to day-level, I just can’t get my head around. So in addition to mileage, in the part of your taxes, like I said, where you’re doing vehicle-related expenses, which is over here on the far right of the thing, you’re also gonna be including oil changes, licensing registration for your car, things like that. So those are things that you will need to pull up when you prepare your taxes, well, if you use your vehicle for work purposes.

But now I wanna get into this midsection here. I wanna get into all of the specific categories. So let’s take a look at that. So these are the basic Schedule C sections. All right? They’re a little bit small for you guys. Let me see if I can make two columns and make them a little bit bigger. But I wanna go through each of these, just a little bit one by one and see if you guys have any questions on specific ones. So take a look at these. Like I said, I’m gonna blow them up right now. But I want us to just go through these a little bit one by one so you’re super clear because some of these have weird overlaps and, obviously, some of these just don’t apply to you guys.

Like you’ll see the second column now begins with pension. That’s not something that applies to you guys, right? But if you guys have a Roth IRA, like if you have IRAs that you’ve set up as freelancers for your own retirement purposes, that’s something that also will factor into your taxes. So Jade says, “I think I always take the standard deduction for car versus actual. Can you speak to the differences between those?” So Jade is in the situation where she lives in an area where it’s not an area where she would be taking a lot of public transit and she would use her car for pretty much anything that she’s doing for work.

She came to our recent retreat and, you know, obviously, the vehicle is what got her to our retreat house. So in her case her car is her primary mode of transportation. And so in that case, I would… Again, not a tax advisor, seek, you know, licensed advice. But I would say that you would probably be wanting to do your actual because the amount of driving that you would do that would be work-related probably more than the standard deduction.

So when I used to be primarily in the city and only using my car here and there for work stuff, then I might be taking the standard deduction. But if you go through it with TurboTax and you go through it with TurboTax Self-employed, and also if you go through the nitty-gritty on the tax form yourself, you’ll see that it’s a bit more complicated in terms of how they figure out the deduction for you. And I have just found for myself that if I’m not driving tons, this is just like your personal standard deduction, right? If you’re not doing tons of individual deductions, then the standard deduction is gonna be more. If you are doing a lot of stuff and you’ve been tracking it well, then what you’ve actually tracked is usually going to be more. So that’s my sort of quick two cents about that, but it’s very situational.

Okay, so let’s get back to this. So advertising. What are you guys gonna have that would fall into advertising? A couple of things that you might be aware of, business cards, of course. But this isn’t just if you’re running a banner ad or if you’re sponsoring conferences like we do. This is also for your entire website, all of your hosting fees, if you buy a premium theme, you know, if you have to pay somebody to help you get that theme working. All of those things go under advertising. You can think of if you use a social media scheduling app, that also goes under advertising. Everything that is a piece of content or a medium that connects a piece of content between you and the marketplace goes under advertising. All right?

So car and truck is gonna be different than those vehicle expenses that we talked about. This is something that wouldn’t come up so much for you guys. And likewise, commissions and fees. Those are not things that you would see very often. But contract labor, I wanna talk about this because you’ll see that there’s contract labor… I’m gonna highlight these for now. There is contract labor and then there is… I guess I’m gonna make it red instead of highlighting. There’s contract labor and then there’s legal and professional services.

These are two different things and I wanna talk a little bit about why because I think it’s not always so clear and also there’s other types of professional development that would not go in any of these categories, but would instead go in other expenses. There’s quite a lot of things that go into that other expenses category and it’s really useful for you to be cognizant of what they are and that they don’t just fall off the map. They don’t just disappear. So let’s talk about contract labor versus legal and professional services.

An easy sort of way to think about that, which is, again, a very facile difference, okay, but an easy way to think about that is that the things that are contract labor are people who you would be paying on a 1099 capacity and the things that are legal and professional services are things that you would, say, buy through a company. So that, like I said, is a very, very facile way of looking at that, but if you have specific situations, let me know.

I just get the sense that most of you are not in a position where you would necessarily be having contract labor. So if I’m wrong about that, let me know. But I think most things that you guys might have, and you probably don’t have a ton of these with where you are in your businesses, but I feel like the majority of those things would be in that legal and professional services category. But if I’m wrong, let me know in the chat box. So let’s move on.

So depletion depreciation are two other things that are quite technical and quite finance-y and you guys probably don’t have coming up quite so much. So I am not gonna spend too much time on those for that reason. The electrician for your home office, we’re gonna get to that in a second. That’s a different category. That’s why I wanna go through these because they’re a little wonky. So depletion and depreciation, you’re not gonna have quite so much. What if you buy an asset, which is like a computer, for your business? Is that something that you should be depreciating?

Depreciating, if you’re not familiar, it means that you buy something at a certain cost and its value to your business as an asset changes over time as the item ages and with wear and tear. So most assets that we as freelance writers have are things that are small enough in price that we do not need to be depreciating. So if you buy a laptop, you can write that off just in the same year that you bought it. You don’t need to be writing off a small portion of that each year. Okay?

So employee benefits. Again, like I said, I don’t think that many of you are in the position that you have contract labor, let alone employees, so that’s not something you would necessarily be writing off here. But if you do, this is where it goes. Insurance other than… Oops, not halth, health. Insurance other than health, this is one where if you have…we’ve talked about this in the past, the MNR, which is a misprints insurance for journalists. So if you’re in a position where you have a type of business insurance as opposed to your health insurance, that’s something that would go here in the insurance category.

Hold on, I see a question about an earlier section. “Every now and then,” Catherine says, “I ask a colleague to help me accommodate clients who have a surge in ghostwriting/byline free work.” Catherine, can you let me know if you’re taking a cut of that or if it’s just overflow and how that works and then you are paying.

So for Catherine’s situation, I feel like there are definitely, you know, a subset of you that find yourselves in the situation that someone assigns you work and you can’t take it, so you might assign it off to someone else. Now, it counts as contract labor if you are being paid by the client and then from your own personal financial situation, you are paying that person you have outsourced to.

In that case, you are subcontracting, would be the correct word there, and it’s important for you to know, if you’re in that situation, that if you are subcontracting to the tune of more than $600, I’ll write that in the chat box, $600, then that equals 1099s. So any time you are subcontracting out, not just in a single sum, but over the course of the year, to somebody that you pay more than $600, then you need to be creating a 1099 for that person.

A very, very quick and very short thing about creating 1099s. You can buy them obnoxiously only in sums of $10 or $15 at Staples, some places like that, and they’re not inexpensive, which is a bit annoying, and then you have to mail them yourself and not be sure if they got there. So I use an online service, which I believe is through Intuit, which also owns, you know, Quick and TurboTax and all of these things. I use an online service through Intuit to create and distribute and file with the IRS my 1099s that I create. Okay?

So all right, so we were on insurance. So hopefully insurance is pretty clear. I wanna talk about interest. Now, I don’t really… This isn’t gonna be something where I’m gonna ask you all to share, but I feel like there’s often situations, and especially if you wanna be playing the points in miles game, which we talked about in some earlier webinars, there’s often situations where you’re putting a lot of your business expenses on credit cards and you might not pay that interest off right away. Every bit of interest related to a business expense should be put on your Schedule C. It is deductible. That’s a really important thing to remember to deduct when you are preparing your business taxes.

Now, if you have separate cards for business and personal, this is ideal because then it’s very clear what the interest on those items are. Even if you don’t have separate cards for business and personal, you might wanna consider that you have made the commitment to yourself that you’re paying off at least your personal bit of that card every month, but not your business bit so that it’s more clear what that interest is related to. So that’s kind of a couple strategies on that. Again, not professional tax advice.

So back to legal and professional services. We talked about this. There’s a lot of different things. This could be…professional services can be somebody who reviews your portfolio or your pitches, it can be coaching, it can be somebody that you have… Tax preparation is a separate area, but it could be, for instance, somebody that you have set up an LLC for you or different things like that.

Now, office expenses, this is a weird one because there’s gonna be things that come up in our home office portion of our taxes. So in the office expenses section, this is very specific. This is like paper, staples, you know, if you buy yourself a planner. Those are the type of things that factor into office expenses. But a lot of other things, obviously, utilities have their own section. You’ll see it here at the bottom, but obviously… Lindsey had a real… Oh, sorry, Jade had a really great example of this earlier that I wanted to come back to, which is what about the electrician for my home office wiring?

This is something that falls into typically either that home office area that we’re gonna talk about or the part over here on repairs and maintenance on the second column. Okay? So office expenses, really think about it like if you ever worked in a big office, like the cabinet of those things that stay in there like pens, paper, or things like that. Pension, again, is something that’s not gonna come up for most of you, but I wanna make sure I also clarify rent or lease.

The rent or lease section of the Schedule C is not for a home office. If you have a home office, that’s gonna go in the home office section. But rent or lease here is specifically if you rent an office outside. If you belong to a co-working space, you can certainly put that here. So repairs and maintenance, these can be things on your computer or they could be things that happen in your office such as an electrician kind of situation as Jade described.

So what’s the difference between office expenses… I’m gonna color-code these again. Office expenses, and then this next category that we’re about to look at, which is supplies, and then a totally different category, which I had mentioned earlier, which is advertising. So like when I think of…just internally, when I think of my business cards, I kind of think of them as supplies in a certain way, but they are advertising. So what counts as supplies is gonna be different for each of you depending on what you write about, but, for instance, if you are in the food world and you do recipe development, then that supplies could be cooking utensils, it could be food.

If you are somebody who travels quite a lot as part of what you cover or your nomadic lifestyle, then those supplies could be things that are, you know, organization of your cords or a MiFi device. There’s a lot of different things that could factor under supplies. And it does look in many ways quite similar to office expenses. So, like I said, it really delves down to what type of work you individually do. This is interesting. This should be taxes. This should be taxes. So taxes and licenses. This is quite specifically for business licensing and things like that.

Travel is something that we are going to… Well, so many typos in this thing. Travel is something that I have a whole slide about, so I don’t wanna talk too much about it here. But utilities, I wanna touch on this. And wages, again, is something for those of you who would have people that you are employing in a W2 environment, which I don’t think applies to very many of you. But utilities, this is something where… Your utilities can be if you have something separate that is only for your home office.

For instance, we have a very, very fast files dedicated line in New York City that I use because I do so much video work. That’s something that we have specifically for my business. So I would write that off as a utility here. But other utilities like your electrics or water, things like that, that are supplied to your whole home and, obviously, you also need for your home office, those are things are gonna go under the home office section. So Annalisa had asked, “Where does the computer go?” And that is the kind of thing that would go in the supplies section actually even though that seems a bit weird. That’s where that goes.

So to home office or not to home office? This is kind of a big discussion, but the basic rationale behind whether you can or cannot write your home office off on your taxes is if it is a place where only business is done. So, for instance, in my apartment in New York, we have literally the carpet changes color. There’s a very clear line. All of the bookshelves on the other side of that carpet line, I use only for work-related books, nothing else. Nothing else is stored over there. I do have a second seat over there, but it’s not something that we ever use apart from me using it, you know, with people if I’m having a meeting in my home.

So the home office, it’s really important that there’s a clear line and that if a tax auditor showed up at your house, that it would be obvious that this is something that is not also…you know, your kids also sleep in this room, which is your home office, or something like that. It needs to have a dedicated purpose.

Now, the way that it works… Yes, someone says a home office must be in a space where you can close the door and in New York City, that’s, you know, not feasible. And I definitely know a number of people in urban settings where that’s not the case. So in terms of what you write off with your home office, there’s various things that you need to keep track of to put together the expense for your home office. One of them is you need the total square footage for your entire home and then the square footage for the home office space so that the percentages can be calculated.

And then you’ll need things such as your utilities for the whole year, which is your water or your heat, whatever it is that you have in your domicile. So you gather all those things together and then the percentage of that is deducted. There’s something else really important that I just wanna say about home offices, though, which is that a home office deduction carries over on your taxes from year to year quite differently than a lot of these other Schedule C deductions that we’re looking at.

So when you put together your income and your expenses and you have, for instance, say there’s a negative, say it ends up that your expenses are greater than your income, then what happens is you have a loss that you can carry over into the next year that reduces your tax burden. But your home office deduction does not count as that loss, but the weird thing is that your home office deduction individually, if you didn’t write it off in one year, you might be able to write it off the next year if you’re not running a loss.

So it’s kind of like bowling and the pin carries over, you know, as a spare, but not as a strike if you follow bowling. But the basic thing is if you use TurboTax, it will do it for you automatically. If you’re doing it on your own, the home office deduction can either be used in that year or carried over to the next year if you don’t use it whereas your overall business loss is something that can run a lot longer.

So Annalisa asked the question, “If an auditor comes, a few years will have passed, so the space room set up may have changed. Does that protect me?” That’s a great question actually. And I think they’ll probably look at the set up that you have now. If you live in a totally different home, I’m not sure how they would audit it. That’s the kind of question that you would wanna ask somebody who’s a professional specifically in auditing because… Oh, my God, you’re freaking me out now. I’m touching the table again. I have not been in that situation.

So let’s talk about food. Okay, this is a big one. I actually have travel after this because food is the most misunderstood thing. So I’m sure that this is gonna be a section where a lot of people have told you a certain thing, so let’s try to keep so and so told me this out of the chat box just for this purpose because I wanna tell you what it means for us. So there is this concept of 50% food and entertainment. If you ever work for a company that you travel for that company, when you submit your expense reports, that company has to eat half of the cost of whatever you spent on food when you’re away, and half of it, they can write off on their business expenses.

For us, it is very, very different. So I’ve been talking a lot about trends and knowing trends and knowing what’s going on in the industry and how it’s very important that you’re able to have a high-level view of what’s happening in travel in order to pitch your pieces properly. And people have asked a lot about this. How do I obtain that view? Some of it is that you need to travel or you need to eat, you need to be exposed to things. And so what counts for us as travel writers as research is a very wide swath of things. What’s the guiding line for something that for you as an individual does or doesn’t count as research?

If it’s something that you would write about, not necessarily today, but let’s say you want to pitch it later, or it is something that informs a topic that you would write about? So, for instance, a very simple one here for most of you is that when you are in an airport and you go to the little shop in the airport to buy maybe a magazine, maybe a bottle of water because they took your bottle or when you can’t find a fountain anywhere to refill water into your bottle, and maybe like a little chocolate-covered peanut butter cup or something like that, do you write that off as 50% or do you write that off as 100% research?

I really love this example because it’s quite cut and dry. If you are a person who writes about airport travel, so I wrote about air travel for many years and I read about points and miles travel and I read about lounges in airports and different airports and things like that. In those cases, I would often be able as a 100% research expense… And I just wanna point out, research expenses go in this wonky other expenses part of our Schedule C. Okay? So every time I say research expense, that’s where they go. They go in other expenses. Okay?

So every time I was in an airport and I did those things, as long as it wasn’t an airport that I go to all the time, like JFK, I’m researching. As I’m exploring the amenities of that airport, that counts as research. Okay? But for most of you, and now for me because I don’t write about air travel, those things that you purchase in the airport wouldn’t necessarily count as research. But let’s say…let’s take another example of where this line exists.

Let’s say I am in Stockholm and I have an Airbnb and I am familiarizing myself with Stockholm. I don’t yet have story ideas, I’ve never been there before, I’m trying to figure this out. So I’m trying to experience as much of Stockholm as possible, but I also have to do my writing assignments. I have various work that I need to get done. So there’s a cafe in my neighborhood that I’m going to…perhaps I’m gonna go there seven times over the course of my trip and the first couple of times, I might order different things. I wanna try them. I wanna try the different Swedish pastries. I wanna get a feel for the neighborhood.

But after I’ve been there two or three times, I’m going there as if it’s Starbucks. I’m going there because I need coffee in the morning, because I wanna have a place to sit. So I will switch after two or three visits…when it becomes less research and more mechanical in terms of just me going for coffee rather than me having an experience by going to this cafe, I will switch that from a 100% research expense over to a 50% travel-related food expense.

Let’s take another example of where this line exists. so I live in New York City. New York City is a very big place. When I first moved there, I was already travel writing and I didn’t know it very well. So every time I experienced things, again, not if it’s a Starbucks, but every time I experienced something new somewhere in the city that was informing my writing, that was informing my ability, a year, or two, or three years down the line to be able to write about New York City. But, again, if it’s a cafe that I’m trying to go to all the time, if it’s a place that we’re going for dinner which is really not super interesting, it’s just our neighborhood pie place, that’s not something that I’m gonna write off.

So this means that those of you that are in Portland, the Hudson Valley, I’m trying to look through and see where people are, Phoenix, there are some other New Yorkers. I’m kind of running out of where I know people live. So all of you that are in places like this, if you have any inclination at any point to be writing about things in your area, when you are going out for dinner with your spouse or with your friends, if it is a place you have not been before and if it is significant to the culture or cuisine of your area, that is a research expense. This is the explosion moment. Okay?

So when people tell me that they are travel writers and that they owe a lot on their taxes, the very first thing I think is what is happening with their food expenses? This is literally the hugest one. What is happening with your food expenses? So, for instance, right now, this week, I’m up in Vermont. I’m in an area of Vermont that’s quite interesting. I’ve been here in the past for a wedding. Usually, a great place to find a place that you might wanna to write about the future is to have to go there for family commitments. So I’ve been here in the past, but not as a travel writer.

When I was here before, it was very much I’m doing things with my friends and my family and I have to kind of follow this agenda, where we’re going. You know, I tried to get some business cards when I was at the farmer’s market, but I wasn’t here researching as a writer. So this morning, I went to a place where they have all sorts of different food products and alcohol products and all sorts of things from the region. I’m only here for a couple of days. I don’t have a lot of time to try it. So I’m buying those things to take home and try later and I’m getting business cards and I’m taking pictures of the names of the producers to look those things up later.

So I’ve got a couple of questions on meals here as expected. Do we deduct our whole bill or a portion? Great question. Jade, great question. So when restaurant reviewers go to a restaurant, they will take three to four people with them and they will order a lot of things off the menu and they will expense all of it and that’s because you as the writer need to be trying all of these things to be writing about it. So it depends, again, on intent. So if you and your partner are ordering things with the intention of sharing them so everyone can try things, then yes, you should write off the whole meal.

So if you are going, though, and everyone’s kind of ordering their own separate things and it’s really that you’re there, you know, thinking through the ideas, but maybe you’re with a group of people who aren’t, then you would just write off your own portion. Catherine has a very similar question here. So I think that I’ve answered both of that. But, again, especially if you’re going out with friends, it really should be that the meal has been gone to in the intent of you are trying that place and you are trying what all of them order and you guys are testing out the experience.

Now, the one variant on this, which I don’t know completely applies to a lot of you, is that… Let’s take me and Sat. So many of you guys have met Sat. He’s my husband and also partner. He runs the company. He does a lot of the security stuff that I call the black screen tech stuff. We quite frequently, just because he works at Google during the day and I’m out of the country a lot of the time, we’ll have meals where we go somewhere in our neighborhood and all we do is discuss work. We discuss client situations we need to deal with, we discuss project plans for different things that we’re rolling out. And so that meal might be something where we’re just discussing work and it’s really a 50% expense.

And you might be having these, though, with your friends without realizing it, and that’s why I wanna say this. So I learned this from a friend of mine in the city who’s been a travel writer for longer than I do. When he and I would meet up for coffee, dinner, or lunch, or whatever, say before going to Travel Massive to meet and discuss what was going on with our business and we’re kind of giving each other a bit of advice here and there. Like yeah, we’re friends, but we’re work friends and we’re talking about work over our dinner. We are each writing that dinner off and if it’s something that neither of us would write about, we would both write it off as a 50% expense. And if it’s something that would inform our writing, inform our knowledge of trends in the industry, then we would write it off as 100% expense.

Marjorie has a great question. How do you deal with foreign exchange for expenses? So what I do in this case is that I put…because it makes expensing much easier, I put everything on credit cards humanly possible so that I have all that stuff in a very cut and dry fashion. Because when you do it with cash, everything gets a bit wonky. So what I do is I take the U.S. dollar amount that my credit card company bills the charge as. Foreign exchange is… The specific foreign exchange fees are things that I tally up that go into this section here. So fees that I pay for PayPal and fees that I pay for foreign exchange, fees that I pay for credit cards, all of those go into this fees section of my taxes. Okay?

I think there was one more question on this. Okay. Yeah, and if it’s a meal or if it’s something that I need to pay with cash, what I do is I try to take out… Even though, you know, it helps with exchange rates to maybe hang on to some euros when they crash, but I try to take out cash in the beginning of each trip and then any things that I need to pay in cash… Like if I’m in Italy, you can just go and pay in the bar with your credit card to get your coffee in the morning. So I pay for things in cash and then I try to make sure that I’ve taken out exactly what I’m gonna use up and then that is what I’m using for my out of pocket, out of hand food expenses.

So let’s just get through because I know that we’re close to the end and I wanna make sure that we cover a couple more bases here. But I know you guys had a lot of questions in line about that food cost. So we talked about how if you are just going somewhere and it’s not something that’s informing your understanding of the industry, but it’s still work-related, for instance, you are traveling or you’re meeting a friend, that is something that you would write off as a 50%. Okay?

So let’s go through. So expense reports. So this is this travel portion of it. So travel on our taxes is actually classed a couple of different ways. I’m just gonna go back up to this earlier slide here for a second. Travel is classed a couple of different ways. You’ll see in the travel meals and entertainment section, there’s travel, and then there’s deductible meals, there’s that 50% meals.

But then there’s this weird thing that happens, which is that on the other expenses category, there’s a separate section for professional development and your travel, which means flights, transfers, hotels that are related to conferences, that are related to professional development should actually go on that other expenses portion of your Schedule C. So I just wanna keep that out there.

So everything that is educational will go on the other expenses portion of your Schedule C rather than travel. What goes in travel is, like I said, the transfers, you know, if it’s a taxi or a bus, the hotel, Airbnb, campground fee, whatever it is that you have. This is where tolls, parking fees, rental car charges, gas receipts, that’s where all of these things go in here.

Now, again, this is advanced tactics and I just wanna take a second to talk about this. The strange and magical world of per diems. The government publishes for their own purposes a list of per diems that are a daily total expense or expenses about hotels rate by city. A very advanced taxes for freelancers, expenses, finances for freelancers tactic is that when you go somewhere, you are paying yourself the per diem for that city and then using it as you see fit and returning the receipts to yourself, aka the company, which is something that larger corporations do.

So rather than tracking everything in a more minute way, you can also do a per diem approach, but, again, that is more an advanced level. It’s something that I’ve thought about getting into a few times. I’ve had some friends that get into it, but I just find for the amount of time that I have to do it and do my taxes on my finances, which is the next question, it’s just easier for me to just pull off my credit cards and do everything that way.

So let’s look at tracking your finances in the long term. So now that I’ve told you the different categories, we’ve walked through the different categories on this Schedule C in a lot of detail, what I want you to know is that there’s two approaches to this. You don’t have to feel like you need to take 5, 6, 10, 12 hours every month to sort through all your receipts and do this. Because, as you’ve noticed now, as I’ve told you the whole wide world of writing off your food and how much you should be writing off there, there is a lot that will bring down your tax burden. So you might actually not owe as many taxes as you think you do.

So if you are in a situation where you do owe taxes, which probably means that you’re not eating out or traveling or something a lot or your income is already quite high, then you do quarterly taxes. And TurboTax plus QuickBooks Self-employed has a way to calculate those for you sort of quickly. The caveat that I wanna say on using QuickBooks Self-employed plus TurboTax is that QuickBooks automatically will class all of your food expenses into that 50% category and you will need to create an artificial category to force it to classify the things that are food as research into a 100% category or your tax burden will be incorrect when calculated through QuickBooks Self-employed in concert with TurboTax. So please keep that in mind.

I know a couple of people said this. If you’re using QuickBooks Self-employed, it will misfile your food and you will need to manually change that to a different category which is written off 100%. So then your QuickBooks won’t track correctly into your taxes later. So this is one of the reasons I no longer use QuickBooks Self-employed and I just do it all through spreadsheets.

Now, there’s a way to do if you don’t have enough of a tax burden, then you have to pay quarterly taxes. There’s a relatively quick and easy and dirty, and I get it done every year in about five to eight hours, way to do all of your finances for the year with a very minimal time commitment. And what that is, what I do is that you export all of the credit cards and debit statements, everything that are applicable to your business expenses and business income. You have them in one place. You total by category.

So what I do is I put everything in and then I sort it by provider. This makes it really fast. I pull out my cellphone. Cellphone is weirdly not a utility. It is in other expense. There are several things that are other expenses. Those are, again, kind of weird things. So, like I said, education training, so professional development, that goes with the other expense. Research, all of our food which counts as research, that goes under other expense. Okay? So your cellphone, your internet related fees, that could go under other expense if you have like a MiFi which is kind of a cellphone.

Again, there’s a lot of things that go under other expenses. Subscriptions, such as a subscription to the Travel Magazine Database, which you would call subscription or educational. We have a lot of subscriptions, such as we have subscriptions for our social media software, but, like I said, that’s advertising, but then we have a subscription, for instance, to something that I use to track business processes called Suite Process. That’s something that is not advertising, so that would go in here.
Okay, so the other expense… Yes, books and magazines, exactly. That’s other expense.

Donna says, “Why would I not put those in office expenses?” The office expenses, like I said, those are more physical office supplies even though there’s a separate supplies category. Like I said, there’s a little bit of duplication on these and it’s not gonna be the end of the world if you mince those two. But the point, what I wanted to say here is that I take those spreadsheets, I throw all of the different credit card statements, all of the debit card statements, everything together into one spreadsheet, and then I sort it by T-Mobile, by hotels.com, by Airbnb, things like that.

And then it’s great because I can see in a big chunk. I can see all the Airbnbs. I can see all the T-Mobile. I can see all the insurance. I can see all of the gas. And then I move all of those over to their correct sections in my file which has all the different Schedule C sections and then I total them. It makes things so much faster. The thing that does take a bit of a while is food and, of course, that’s something that I do recommend that you have some sort of, if not tracking, at least calendar-level tracking of that as you go so that as you go through your credit card statements, whether you do that at the end of the month or once a year, then it’s easy to see which of those food ones are 50% versus 100%. And, again, 50% is any time you’re in the airport. You’re meeting a friend in your own city to have a business melding of the minds, you are going to a networking event, all sorts of things like that.

So that’s what I got for you. I’m gonna go back and see a little bit if there are some other questions that we didn’t answer, but let me know if you guys think of any off the top of your head.

So Stacy had a question about quarterly taxes that I said that I wanted to come back to. So, like I said, now your tax burden, as you’ve seen, should be much, much, much, much lower, and that will bring down the total tax burden of your family. So you will see when you file your taxes now with this new improved knowing what you’re gonna write off way that you may have to pay quarterly taxes or you may not have to pay quarterly taxes.

It’s not something that withholding extra money from your spouse’s paycheck will help because you, as the sole proprietor, as the individual, need to be the one sending out your quarterly taxes under your own name. So the withholding that you do from your spouse’s paycheck will only make a difference at the end of the year in terms of what you get back.

Somebody had a question about the pros and cons of LLC, S corp or DBA. DBA is Doing Business As. LLC, again, is Limited Liability Corporation, and S corp is a big corporation. So I don’t think any of you guys should for any reason be an S corp. You probably also don’t need to be an LLC. The main reason for that is if you wanna do business, for instance, with the government or with some other entity that requires you for legal reasons to be licensed in that way. I’m just going back through to see if there are more questions, but, again, drop them…if I missed them, drop them in the chat.

Somebody has questions about incorporating yourself offshore versus…to get lower tax rates. That’s not apropos to the subject of this talk because, like I said, most people are not incorporated. They are going to be individual proprietors. All right, I think I’ve pretty much got everything. I’m not sure if I completely answered Catherine’s question earlier about outsourcing things to her friends, but let me know.

Can I talk more about MMNR insurance? That’s something that I really recommend that you look up online. It’s something that is more…depends on how you negotiate your contracts because you should be able to get an indemnification clause in there where any liability for issues in the text comes out of the publisher and not on you. And we have a blog post on the blog. If you look at freelance contracts on the blog, we have a lot of content around that.

The name of my source, that’s a great question. He is Stephen Hoffman and let me just make sure I spell it for you correctly. So Steve Hoffman is a food writer. Sorry, it’s all caps because that’s how it was in his slides. Steve Hoffman is a food writer and tax preparer, so he’s a great guy to go to if you want to have somebody do your taxes for you that really understands the food area and all of these operations of a freelance business correctly. I could not tell you though where he’s based because I met him in New York.

So I think I’ve got everybody. I think I’ve got everything. So we covered a lot today. Thank you guys so much for bearing with me and tackling this huge, huge topic and I look forward to next week, talking to you about time. This is huge, right? I can’t even talk about taxes, talking about how you track your time and…but what we’re really gonna dig into is how this allows you to expand the amount of work that you’re doing, both in terms of marketing and just doing the work without losing your mind.

I’m just gonna switch to the last slide with our email if you have any other questions and have a great weekend you guys. Cheers.

Taking Control of Your Freelance Travel Writing Time Transcript

Download (PDF, 288KB)

With your time, whether it’s time tracking or just how you approach your time, this is something that we’re gonna talk about today. We’ll talk for an hour. I’ll go a little bit past for those of you who are able to stay since we’ve had some technical issues here at the beginning. But this hour is just the jumping-off point. This is something that I literally spend months on with our coaching students because it’s so fundamental.

And the thing is that so many of the different issues that you encounter with your travel writing often trace back to how you are tracking, managing, thinking about your time. These can be issues as diverse as having a lot of different things on your plate. Jade had mentioned in the chat box that she’s bouncing between different things and she is somebody who’s bouncing between different writing projects. There’s other people that I coach who have very disparate things they’re doing. I have one person that I coach who is becoming certified as a Zumba instructor, another one who’s becoming certified as a yoga instructor. And then they both have other commitments that they do as well.

And the one who’s a Zumba instructor had told me recently she’s doing that. She also has a conference that she’s helping organize, and that she feels like she does work on those other ones because it’s easier because she already knows what to do for those because she’s further along and she feels closer to seeing a reality from those, as opposed to travel writing which she’s completely new to and doing a lot of learning. And that can be a time dilation of fact that we don’t always notice. We don’t always separate the fact that we are making choices about how to spend our time that are based on feelings and priorities, and that time equals money as a business equation is way over simplified but also true.

And so we have to figure out what that equation is for all of us, and that’s what we’re gonna look at today. Because if you caught the newsletter or the blog post related to today’s call, so much of the…whether it’s emotion or fear, you know, avoidance, so many of these different things that we have that affect our ability to reach our travel writing goals and to accomplish things that we wanna accomplish relating to our travel writing, whether that’s pitching big publications or getting big stories done that we’re not accustomed to. So much of that is inherently an issue of time management.

But time management, I hate that term. I think it’s something that’s really gotten a lot of definitions and sentiments associated with it that divorce it from the way that we actually need to look at it, which is that we, our managers of the resources available to us as small business owners. And when we don’t have a lot of other assets our most important resource is our time.

So let’s just look at what we’re gonna look at today. Obviously a lot of things that you guys have dropped in the chat box. I’ll just go back through those again now that you guys can hear me. We talked about bouncing between different priorities, different things that are on your plate in terms of things outside of travel writing, which I know many, many, if not most or really nearly all of you have things that you do besides travel writing. And everything that we’re gonna talk about today obviously extends past just your travel writing. This is about how you approach your philosophy for time in all of your business life. Obviously your personal life should be different, and we should have a less structured approach to time in our personal lives.

Some of the other things that you guys had mentioned in the chat box that we’re definitely gonna look at is the balance between recurring work and long-term projects and short-term work, right? I feel like this recurring work versus one-off dichotomy is something that everybody struggles with because it’s constantly changing. It’s constantly changing because the type of work that you enjoy changes. The relationships that you have with your clients change. Your clients might change because some of them have gone under. There’s a lot of different things regarding that balance which affect your time but also comes back to priorities, right?

So as we’re talking about time management there’s gonna be some other little psychological business oriented things that creep in here as well. A couple other great things that people said that we’re gonna incorporate as well as are somebody said, “My own wheels spinning,” that’s a great one. And I’ve got some really nice little exercises that I do with coaching students that you guys can pick and choose from what’s the best one for you to get a handle on that wheels spinning kind of thing. Somebody says they have recurring income, or sorry, recurring assignments that they do every week, but they make it hard to find time to pitch outside. And we’ll look at how to make sure that you’re being really clear about that.

And then a lot of people had questions about ideas and selecting the right publication to pitch. And what I mean by questions, not questions about how to do it but they were saying that that’s something that is a big point of either too much time or stress for them right now, so we’ll look at that as well. So specifically what I’ve got on the agenda, and I’m gonna incorporate those things that you guys had mentioned as well. And if any of you have joined us later just let me know in the chat box. So any time something that you feel like is a big, if not time suck, as in it simply takes up a lot of your time, or something that you just feel like is taking way more time than it should, and that might be something that you have to do that is keeping you from doing other things, like Lisa said, or it might be something that you are trying to do and it’s just taking so much time you can’t get it done.

So the first thing I wanna talk about, like I mentioned, is your philosophy on time as relates to your business. We’re gonna talk about this. This is really the important starting point here, because we often don’t realize that we have a philosophy on time. You might think, “Oh, well, perhaps I should get one,” but you already do have one. It’s how you are deciding how to use your time and choose how to use your time presently. So I’m gonna ask you some questions and you can do some thinking of that on your own. You don’t have to share it in the chat box unless you want to.

And then we’re gonna look at the big offenders, so some of these are the ones that you guys mentioned earlier. I’ve got a couple on slides for us to look at. Some of them are similar but we’ll also attack some other tones. And then we’re gonna look at some approaches to time tracking. And when I say approaches I mean both physical method, software, but really also the organization methods because this is where people get hung up. I’ve had a lot of coaching students that I send off to do time tracking as a super starting point, as the very, very first time they’re ever doing time tracking in their freelance life to bring me back something that we can look at together and start to dig in now that we have that data, and see what time savings we can make. Or what insights that gives us about other things like priorities that could be shifted, clients that you really didn’t realize were really not worth your time, things like that.

So we’ll talk about approaches from both the system way as well as the technological standpoint, as well as the physical organization thereof.

And I wanted to take a little bit of time to say that today because the stuff about time is all about that. Dealing with how you spend your time, really looking it in the face and dealing with it is scary and painful, and often creates avoidance and procrastination, which is funny because the idea of tracking your time is to avoid procrastination, right? But often confronting the issues that you are really running into and seeing that you do need to change your priorities is not the easiest thing to go through.

So that being said, let’s talk about philosophy. But go ahead and share with us, if you don’t mind, what you think your philosophy about how you use your time is as a small business owner, as a freelance travel writer at this moment.

So to expand about that a little bit, so what I mean by that, what I mean about your philosophy is how do you…do you think time is money, period? Simply, that’s your philosophy. Do you feel like your time is your greatest resource, which means it is the most valuable thing to you and you wanna use it to the best of your ability?

There’s all these cliches about time, right? Time is money, time is my greatest resource, and they play out into a lot of different things. Donna M. has a question, what I think or say versus what I actually do, which is great. Donna, put both. Put what you think and say as well as what you actually do, or tell us what the difference is, or you can keep that to yourself if it’s a little too personal.

So the philosophy that I mean here is it can be one of these trite, little expressions. You can have some deeper thoughts about it, but it does usually come down or come back to something pretty simple, which is, for instance, for me, I always feel like there’s never enough time. And what I mean by that is not that I feel like, “Oh, I’m not gonna get through everything by the end of the day, so why not?” I feel like I know that everything that I would like to do is not going to happen, so I need to make sure that each moment of my time is being spent on the thing that I can best make progress on in that minute. I wanna make sure that I’m creating things, that I am actually accomplishing, finishing things as soon as I can. Because there’s not enough time. I won’t finish everything.

So for instance, that might be one that I could say about myself. Let’s see what some other people have to say. So some people have, “My true philosophy is that time equals quality.” I like that. “The more time I spend actively writing a piece, the better that it is.” That second part is interesting and I think that’s a great thing for us to dig into. Someone else said, “Time is a major commodity, so I’m trying to focus only on work that is worth my time and I enjoy.” That’s another really great thing, things that are worth your time and that you enjoy. That’s a great way to look at it. Let me see some other ones that we’ve got in here.

Engaging in activities that work towards an end product. There’s never enough time, including enough time to do what I want to do. That’s something that we can definitely work on. “I think I’m too much of a perfectionist and spend too much time on everything.” Yeah, I think that’s a great observation, but think about kind of what…perhaps you, the person who said that, Patty, perhaps you’re in the same vein as Donna as you feel the more time you actively spend on something, the better it is. That could be a philosophy on time that you have.

Laurie says it’s her greatest resource but she doesn’t always behave like that’s her philosophy. Yeah, and I think that’s very true. Let’s see what Stephanie says. “I feel like value equals time. I spend some time educating clients on the value of my services/writing.” I think that’s a great one. I wanna see which Stephanie this is. Oh, great, okay, yeah.

So I think that what, I believe it was Laurie, what Laurie said here, “I don’t always behave like that’s my philosophy.” I feel like I’ve definitely seen a couple of you guys say that, and that’s often really true. And this is why I wanted to start this discussion before I tell you tactics, before I tell you, you know, I could just write a blog post and tell you to set up this time tracker and use it in this way. But if you don’t think about what is the philosophy you have behind how you spend your time right now, even if you start tracking your time, even if you have that data you won’t either learn from it or make changes based on it, because you won’t see the gap between what it is that you want to achieve and how your approach to your time right now is limiting that for you.

Annalise has also added she has a huge scarcity around time, yet she wastes it herself all the time and then she hates herself. I think that’s a really great thing also that is really important, back to what Laurie said about not feeling like she always behaves like that’s her approach. I think this is really common to have a sense of hypocrisy around our time philosophy that we think of ourselves, perhaps like Patty said, as perfectionists, but we also think of ourselves as people who deliver. We think of ourselves as people who create things and get them out there. And you know that if you have a blog you deliver regularly, and you also deliver to your clients.

And those two things are in counterpoint, right? Feeling like the more time you put into something the better it is, but also feeling like you’re a person who creates often and creates regularly. So that’s why this philosophy is a really important point to start with. And I might have said this in the part when the sound wasn’t on, so I apologize if I’m repeating, but it’s really important, with all these discussions we’re having around time,” to check in with yourself regularly about this. So that doesn’t just mean your time tracker, it also means your philosophy about time.

And how do we check in? This is the great thing, you gather data. You look at the data. You look at what’s happening in the world, specifically the world about how you use your time, and you see if that aligns with your thoughts. You see if your philosophy, your thoughts, your position, your values actually are coming out on the page. And in this case when I say on the page I mean in the data of your time tracker. And if they’re not that’s a sign that you actually have a different value that you’re not being honest with yourself about, and that’s huge. It’s so difficult often for people who don’t have a coach or some other person who’s mirroring at them what they’re really doing to learn those things.

And so one of the biggest reasons that I harp, and harp, and harp about time tracking is that it is the absolute simplest way to come up against those things on your own that are the difference, the disconnect between what you do and what you say you wanna do. And to me, that’s literally the reason why time tracking is quote, unquote, “the answer to everything.” I really feel like that, and that’s why we’re gonna talk after this webinar about goals. And we’re gonna talk after that webinar about pitches, because all of these things build on each other.

So let’s get back to these snags. We talked about this for those of you who joined us later in the call. We talked about at the very beginning, I had a slide up. I’ll just go back and show you. About what takes you quote, unquote, “too much time,” in your freelance travel writing business. And that could be things that you have to do. That can be things like client work or things of that nature that you’re being paid for that you just have to do. Or it could be things, you know, I believe somebody mentioned social media. It could be things that you don’t necessarily have to do or don’t have to spend as much time for.

But I had asked earlier on in the call about what takes you personally too much time? So I’ve got some pulled up from the chat box from earlier that I’m gonna look at, and I’ve also got some that I put on the slides. And I wanna go through and look at these snags. But first, I feel like they more or less fall into these three categories. You’ll notice I don’t have writing on here, which is because, I think, a lot of the snags that you have in writing are actually within these other areas, largely research. Because I know a couple had come to me feeling like they are a bit of a perfectionist at times. But I think the work of actual writing, what I have seen by and large in the time trackers of myself and other people, the part that tends to be outsized in the time that it takes is actually this research area.

So I’ve collected a lot of snags from you. I’ve got some here that I wanna talk about but before that, what do I mean when I say tracking your time, or knowing about your time, being aware on your time? What am I really talking about here? There’s a very, very facile sort of way of doing it, which I don’t have a slide on this because I’m sure you’re all familiar. Just to say hours. Just to say three hours on X blog post, two hours on preparing slides for a webinar. Six hours of work today. Those are all blocks, they’re task-based blocks. They are a way of tracking that’s related, say, to a deliverable about something, and they definitely are a form of tracking.

But for what we are gonna talk about, I’m gonna challenge you to look at it differently. So the very first thing that I wanna talk about is a productivity heat map. I’m gonna actually pull this up on the full screen so you guys can see it in larger glory. Great, so you should be seeing this productivity heat map. I’m gonna zoom it down so you can see the whole thing.

Some of you guys may have seen this. This is a link that we have on our blog. We also have it in our book. Productivity heat maps are something that are a very good starting point to time tracking. So if you are new to time tracking I don’t recommend that you just jump in right away with the type of thing that I was just talking about, because that’s often what people think about as time tracking. They think about writing down I spent two and a half hours making slides, or, you know, researching this blog post. Or this whole blog post took me five hours.

We want something much more…you could call it granular, but I actually wanna call it telling. We want something. We wanna collect data that gives us actionable intel on our freelance lives, and that starts with productivity. Because it’s very easy to think of time in terms of minute, and hours, and the tick of the clock as something that looks the same no matter how you’re spending it. But we all know in reality that sometimes time feels like it moves faster. Sometimes it feels like it moves slowly. Sometimes it feels like it’s not moving at all. And that time is, in many ways, relative, but what is it relative to? It’s relative to how motivated you feel. That’s kind of, I think, a good gauge of how productive one is. When you feel very motivated you have your eye on the goal. You work briskly, as briskly as possible through the task at hand, and you avoid temptation for distraction.

So this heat map right here, the link to it…I’m gonna give you the link to download directly and the blog post about this topic. So if you wanna download this heat map to yourself you can find it here. And we’ve got a larger blog specifically on this topic about how to use the heat map, which you can find here. This heat map is designed to be used, you could do it once but it’s better to do it a couple times. But it’s designed to be used to track not just the dimension of work being completed or of which type of work is being completed, but of how you feel in relation to that time.

Because as we spoke about a lot at the beginning of the call, many issues related to time and how time is employed in your business, and how it affects your business and what you’re able to accomplish in your business actually tie back to that feeling about that time, that relativity about that time, which is really actually productivity, right? So productivity and time management are often deployed as sort of synonyms, but they’re quite different, right? Managing your time is the act of keeping an eye on it and using it effectively, whereas productivity is a mode of working in which you are being your best self and bringing your most presentness to the task at hand.

So what you do with this heat map, and this is why I recommend starting here because it will really inform what you do with your other time tracking, is to write down your average day by beginning with a real day. Again, we wanna always with time tracking begin with reality in order for us to have the best information. So for instance, I’m not a morning person. Even when I’m in Europe I kind of work on relatively North American hours, and because I have to stay up late at night doing phone calls I have coaching calls that start, like, at 12:30 often when I’m in Europe.

So on this heat map, for me, this whole section is gonna be pretty empty. I have somebody else that I coach who I don’t know that she’s still doing this but she had a really inspiring and exuberant program of early morning work that she was pursuing. She would get up somewhere around here. She would have her Bulletproof Coffee, she’d sit down, and she’d have an uninterrupted block of work time from here. And that would be her prime work time. Whereas for me, I know my hours where I’ll sit down and be able to write three completely finished blog posts in an hour if I don’t have other work to do. That all happens more like over here for me.

So this is what is going to be different for each of you. This map is not just about how you deploy your time, what your time is attached to, what task is being completed or worked on at least in that time, but this is about how you feel during that time, so you can color code this if you want. You can make it red when it’s really hot and you’re getting a lot done. You can make it blue when you’re feeling really low energy. But this is really the starting point to tracking your time. Don’t start tracking your time by looking at your day just as it is and marking what you get done. Mark your day as it is and what you get done, yes, but also how you feel about it. Are you getting highly creative work done? Are you working very fast? Are you very focused?

So this is the very first step to tracking your time as a freelancer. Let me go back over to the slides. So that’s your very first step, okay? Tracking doesn’t begin just with logging of time, it begins with the contemplation of the efficacy of the time that you’re currently spending. That will give you a sense of zones. When I say zones I mean blocks. I wanted to pull this back out so you can see the whole thing. I mean blocks where you’re red hot and blocks where you’re blue cool, where you could get really, really boring stuff done. You can do a lot of cut and pasting, but you would not be the ideal person to write a blog post on a quick timeline at that hour.

Why does this matter? Because if you don’t have that information about when you work best at different types of work, and it’s important to keep in mind that they are different types of work. There are different types of work that you need to accomplish. Let’s go back up here. Each of these things are different types of work. Emails, this is a reactive type of work. Research, this is not a creative type of work in terms of generating new ideas creative, but it can be a type of creative work in terms of asking smart interview questions, you know, finding neat directions for your stories.

And then pitching is seen as one task. It’s seen as this type of very creative work. You have to pull things out of nowhere, but it’s composed of different types of work. There’s the more passive familiarizing yourself with magazines, then there’s the creative and hard decision making period of deciding on an idea or matching it to a magazine. But then there’s the more low-key fact checking, and the kind of creative but not generative creative figuring out what information needs to go into your pitch.

So what will happen is that when you do this productivity map, when you find when you’re red hot and blue cool, and when you’re just black, like don’t try to make me do work right now, you’ll find that knowing that and then setting up a time tracking practice, which I’m gonna go into, things will jump out at you immediately. But if you don’t do that heat mapping of your productivity and your energy and how you feel about that time beforehand, they won’t jump out as quick, especially not if you’re doing it on your own, like without me to walk you through it.

So let’s look at time tracking as the physical act of it, okay? So this is my computer level time tracker, which means this isn’t tracking a lot of other things that I would do, like going to conferences or things like that, or teaching. This is my computer level time tracker for all of the month of February. Now a couple interesting things to note here. So sometimes I forget to hit play on my time tracker but I’ve usually got it going most of the time on the computer. So I logged about 100 hours over 4 weeks. I wanted to use February because it’s a four-week month, so it’s a good indicator.

So that means that maybe 25 hours a week I’m working, but that sounds weird because I work all the time. I’m working, like, tons, and tons, and tons of hours. So this doesn’t include the time that I’m on my phone. I don’t have a time tracker on my phone. So I do a lot of emails and sometimes writing on my phone, so that’s not in here. Like I said, it doesn’t include time when I’m teaching. During February I had a week-long bootcamp that I was running, so I had lots of hours that I was teaching, driving, cooking food, being on tours with people. I had a couple conferences that I went to that also aren’t on here.

But when you think of it it’s like, 25 hours a week? Wow, that doesn’t seem like a lot of time. How do you fit all of this stuff into that time? So that’s one of the first stops when you begin tracking your time, is to just look at it in a very high-level way. How much time am I actually spending, and does that number shock me? Does that number make me feel like, oh my God, I need to be more cognizant of the time I’m spending researching. Or if you’re a perfectionist, the number of times that I’m looking over somethings to make sure it’s perfect before it goes out, because my time is way more limited than I possibly thought that it was.

So that’s the first stop when you’re checking your time, when you’re tracking your time. So remember we talked about productivity and how that’s first? It’s first because it comes before you start doing this tracker. It’s a separate process that you wanna do before you start tracking every single thing that you do. But you’ll see on here, you can see the actual, specific physical tracking of every single thing that I do. So I’ve got on here setting up newsletter, it’s the Monday newsletter. I’ve got time interacting with my assistant. I’ve got a meeting that I didn’t put on here what this meeting is, and it immediately makes me curious. I wanna go back to my time tracker and figure out what that is. I probably have to look at my calendar.

But then these other ones are very nicely labeled. So it says different people that I coach. How much time I was on that call.

So we should be seeing my reporting page. Great.All right, so you’ll see on here this pie chart, right? This right now is just on this week, which has just gotten started, but let’s go back to last month like we were looking at, okay? So you’ll see I’ve got this pie chart here, and it’s got so many different colors going on. That’s because right now I have my tracker set to show you projects, but I don’t wanna start with projects. I wanna start by talking about categories, okay? So whatever time tracker you use, if you were doing a physical time tracker on paper, if you’re doing it in Excel, if you’re doing it in an application, and there’s a couple ones that I’ll talk to you guys about, the very, very first step is to decide what areas of responsibility to track. Because it matters, because it matters in the reporting.

So this isn’t something to be taken lightly, how you do the big buckets of responsibility. So when I used to be doing just writing, let me see if I can go back a couple years. When I was doing just writing…well, that month doesn’t have a lot of work in it, does it? My areas of responsibility were built around my clients. They were built around specific names of specific clients. Let’s see if it’ll go all the way back to 2015 now.

And for many of you that will be the case. Here we go. All right, so what you’ll see now is that I have names of specific clients. I have a magazine client. I’ve got working on my book, I decided that was a client. I’ve got admin, and that was the only other client I was working on that month. So like many of you that have a blog, I have some different notes on here for different blogs or other projects that I would be doing. For those of you, I know Jade had mentioned this earlier so I’ll use her as an example, some of you might be familiar when we shared some of the things that Jade is working on in the annual review webinars last year. She was kind enough to let us workshop her goals for the year ahead.

So she’s got a book that she’s working on. She has content marketing work that she does for specific clients, but largely through an agency. And then she has magazine pitching that she’s working on. So for her, she might also have an admin category with just her emails and all those kinds of things. For her, she doesn’t have her own blog. Like, I have Dream of Travel Writing, but she’s got a book that she’s working on, and she has several other clients that she’s working on.

So her categories might be one category for the agency through which she gets a bunch of content marketing work. One category might be a client that she contracts with directly for content marketing work. One category might be her book, but a different category might be marketing her book. It might be working on getting an agent for her book, and then she could have a category for magazine work. But she’s not working largely with any specific magazines right now, so she might just have magazines.

And then over time as she builds a relationship with certain magazine’s editors, those magazines might get their own category. Like, I have one on here for “Group Travel Leader.” Some other folks…let’s take an example of somebody who is running a travel blog. I know a lot of you also have blogs, so you might have different categories that are related to your blog. You might have content creation for this blog. You might have promotion for this blog. You might have admin for this blog. Those might be three different categories that you assign, and then you would have another category that would be magazines. And then you would have another category that would be, say, travel, because you travel a lot, and that travel is gonna be sometimes things for your blog but it’s gonna also be sometimes things that you pitch. But that’s a big category for you.

And so in there you might also bundle travel planning, which is something you’ll see I have on here as a category as well. So the point of categories is that they should be something…I’m gonna go back to last month. They should be something that is large enough that when you look at it in this pie chart, the same way that I said the first step when you had your tracker is to look at this hourly thing up here. So in this particular month that we’re looking at, March 2 years back, I had 110 hours that I tracked that month. After I look at that, the very next thing I’m gonna look at for shock factor is this chart. And I’m gonna see that my book took 30% of my time that month, and that writing for this other client took another 30% of my time that month.

And I’m gonna ask myself, “How do I feel about that? Does that feel right, or does that feel out of whack?” So one of the things that you’re noticing here as I’m telling you how to look at your time is that we don’t start by looking at how much time did I spend on this blog post? How much did I spend on this pitch? How much time did I spend writing for this one magazine? Because that is not where we get big insights that drive decisions.

We can get insights from those that drive decisions, but the changes to your philosophy or how you’re actually implementing your philosophy, or if you’re not implementing your philosophy, come from looking at this much higher level data which requires tracking over time. You can’t just track for one month, or one week, or one day and get this level of insight.

So let’s look again. I’m looking at category level. I’ve got way too many categories now. So this last month for me, this is my time tracker by category. So what are some things that are big? This is all sorts of webinars and things like that that I do for you guys. Admin took a big time because I was training a new assistant. Travel Planning took a big time. I could look at that and be like, “Jesus, like, 14 hours on Travel Planning? That’s insane.” But I batch travel planning, and I’m doing all the travel planning now for between now and October or September. So to me, that’s okay to have that much time on travel planning right now.

Coaching, I’ve got some time in the database and I’ve got some…oh, this is actually where the VA is on management. So I’m looking at this and seeing, does this jive with how I think I’m spending my time? I look at those before I look at individual things. So again, whatever type of time tracker you use, if you’re doing an Excel sheet, for instance, you wanna have a column that’s by category so that you can sort, and so that you can look at it on this level.

But then you also wanna have a category that’s at the level of projects, which is different than specific tasks. So I wanna pull up for you guys, and we’re gonna have to go back to my main tracker. Now we’re gonna exit this report view, so if anybody has any other questions about reports I’m happy to go back to that later. But I’m just gonna exit out of report and go back to the main tracker for now.

So you’ll see here…sorry, Patty had a question. Let me pop over. “How does it know what you’re doing? Do you click on a category before you start a new task?” So Patty, that is a question that depends on which specific time tracking solution you use. And I don’t wanna advocate any. I’ll tell you more about this one that I use and why I use it in a little bit, but literally you don’t need to use technology for this. You can do it. I have somebody that I know does it in her notebook she just writes it down. You can do it in Excel.

I have a lot of clients that just do it in Excel, so don’t worry about how it’s done in this particular app. If you wanna use this app or any other app there will be workflows within that app and their customer support that have videos that show you how to do those things. But the idea is that you wanna make sure that you’re not just tracking the name of the task. You wanna make sure that you’re not just tracking blog posts and you’re not just tracking finding images. You wanna make sure that you have a larger category which would be your blog, or a client’s blog, or something like that, that that goes into first. Because that’s how we get big insights is making sure that we have a category attached to whatever that task is, okay?

So let’s go over here and let’s talk a little bit more about the project level. So the project level. Project could mean, it can be different things, and I wanna encourage you to think of categories and projects which is anything that’s a sub-level below categories. I wanna encourage you to think of those generously. So basically a category is a big bucket. It’s an area of responsibility. It’s something that you do something for pretty much every month, but you have lots of different things you might do for that.

A project can either be something recurring, such as a column that you write for a magazine every month, but it can also be a single thing. It can be one iteration of writing that column for a magazine. It can also be a task. So for instance, here you’ll see I pulled up Fall Trip Planning, which you might think of as a task. It’s an action. It’s a type of action. It does kind of have a beginning and an end, because once I’ve got all those trips planned it’s over. But I also have other categories. For instance, I just have one here that’s Emails. So I have a quote, unquote, “project,” is what they call it in office time. But I have this second-level tier. I have this for Emails. I have it for creating newsletters. I often use this second-level tier for repeatable tasks.

So the thing here is not necessarily to think in a stickler way about, you know, I need a time tracking solution that allows me to do, this, this, or that. Or what does my time tracking solution allow me to do, and to be bounded by that, but to know that you need a high level area of responsibility level check in. And then you have a next level check in. Sorry, I’m just gonna go back to that one we were gonna look at. You have a next level check in below that before you get to tasks.

So there should be three levels, okay? And so this is what I mean. So this is that mid level, we’ll call it, like, the middle manager of our task tracking system, okay, time tracking system. So this middle manager that we’re looking at right now is Fall Trip Planning. So like I said, I batch my travel. I batch how I’m gonna plan it. I get it done all at once so that I don’t have to be stressed about it or think anymore about whether I’m gonna get a good price on a flight, or how I’m gonna use my points, or if I’m gonna have enough points.

So this category here is everything having to do with booking trips for everything that happened last year after the summer and into the winer. So everything in here, you’ll see that there’s different days. It goes over the course of different months. It’s got stuff all the way from July and into October here, and this happens automatically with my time tracker that it fits the time I do the task. But it has the actual time spent on that task. But then this is what I wanna draw your attention to over here is the notes, okay?

So I have either there were two flights that I needed to get, something happened, I was sick and I had to re-plan a whole trip, and so I had to redo it. This is time I spent getting specifically flights to India. This is time that I spent looking at Airbnbs for a certain destination. I’ve got some that aren’t labeled, which I don’t love and I recommend not doing that if you can help it. But sometimes we’re stressed for time and so we turn on our tracker and we don’t write down what we’ve been doing. But you’ll see that each of these things, like I booked three flights.

What else does this say? I booked on three flights. I checked into some other flights, and I worked on the activities for our bootcamp that we had in the fall. This is one where I was looking for places to stay in Sydney. So what I’m seeing here in terms of this category level, project level, task level is that you don’t just track tasks, okay? Your tasks go by certain designations, whether you wanna call that project or it’s an ongoing repeatable thing that you do, like newsletters, or trip planning, or something like that. Each of those specific things can get separated, and it’s very useful that they do get separated.

Because what happens when you’re able to separate them is that say you have something like writing an article, okay? If you are separating the tasks that come under writing that article by writing the pitch, emailing that editor, emailing sources to set up interviews, doing those interviews, incorporating, perhaps you have to transcribe some, those quotes from your interviews into the piece, doing additional research for that piece. If you have separate time trackers for each of those things, that is when the good stuff happens. Carrie, I don’t understand your question but I think that the answer is that it’s not applicable.

So the meat of this, guys, the meat of this tracking is that we want to be detailed, but not in a way that’s onerous to ourselves past what’s actually needed. So for those of you guys that are perfectionists, like I said, if you missed filling in a couple of these it’s fine. But it’s very useful to separate out within writing a specific blog post, or within writing a specific article what you have done in each time segment, and keeping it tight, keeping it specific.

So if I’m, for instance, working on a newsletter and I find that an email came in. I’ve actually stopped and I’m responding to that email instead, and I didn’t change my tracker originally, I will actually go back and I will pause my tracker. I’ll look at how much time I’ve spent more or less on that email, and I’ll go put that in customer emails instead, or something like that, or I’ll put it in event planning, or I’ll put it in coaching students, or I’ll put that time wherever it’s meant to go.

So on the one hand I’m not just letting a bucket of time incorporate lots of different types of tasks. But on the other hand, for instance for this webinar, I wasn’t just tracking the time that I’m spending doing the webinar with you guys. I’m also tracking time that I spend on the slides. I have a different thing where I track writing the blog post related to webinars.

So that being said, let’s go back to the slides because I wanna talk about different time snags and how we’re gonna track those. So let me give you those slides again. So I talked right now specifically about a couple of these time snags. You guys had mentioned a bunch of time snags earlier. I feel like a lot of these fall into here. So let’s look at how we track some of these, okay?

So research, this is something that I think most of you, most people that I talk to, for sure, specifically aren’t either tracking their research at all, or they’re calling their research part of their writing time. And this is one of the biggest things that comes up when you feel like your time isn’t being used effectively. It’s that you’re bundling a lot of these different pieces, like I was talking about, into one, rather than saying, “Well, I actually spent 37 minutes looking things up and then I actually started writing, and the writing only took me about 20 minutes.”

So when you look at the amount of time it took you to do a blog post as 57 minutes, without knowing that 37 minutes of it was research, it’s very easy to say, “It took me 57 minutes to write that post,” but the writing actually took 20 minutes. And we can look at that 37 minutes and see how much of that research did you actually need to do? How did that research actually add to your piece?

So I had one person who had joined us for a retreat that we spent a lot of time talking about this. She has a blog. She has a big blog she’s had for a long time, and she said it takes her about…she had some data for me. She referenced a particular post she’s written recently and she said it took her 4 hours and 10 minutes. And then we started to break that out. How much of that time was spent with her finding the photos? How much of that time was spent with her writing? And what we realized was that there were two different types of research that she was doing.

She was doing research to see what had already been written and she was doing research that was fact checking things that she wanted to add to her piece. And some of that research, primarily the stuff to check what had already been written, she really didn’t need to spend as much time on. A lot of that was her, you know, perfectionist, or just interest in the topic that she was putting time into that.

So I’ve got research on here as one of the top snags that I want you guys to be tracking, because this is literally the number one waste time. And when I say waste time, I mean not that the time is inherently wasted, but the number one source of time that we are not noticing, that we don’t know, it’s essentially like just disappearing. We don’t know how that time is being spent. So whatever type of writing you guys are doing, whether it’s for your own blog, other blog clients for magazines, you’re working on pitches, you’re working on finding editors to pitch your book on, you are doing research.

Sometimes that research is out when you’re traveling. Sometimes that research is on the computer. Sometimes that research is gonna be with physical magazines. This is the very first step for getting control of your time, is accurately, honestly with yourself noticing, being aware of where that time is going. So like I said, you can track this physically in a notebook. I have somebody who does that and she’s great at it. Patricia, I know that you just joined us. We’re gonna touch on that in a little bit.

So like I said, you can do this in a notebook. You can do it in Excel. You can do it in a time tracker. You can have a time tracker that’s on your phone. You can have a time tracker on your laptop, but research is the number one place to start.

Now I have emails on here. I think emails are something that nobody mentioned actually when I asked you guys early on about what you thought was a time suck for you, or what took up too much time. I know for me this is like the number one offender in terms of how much time I spent. Like, I can’t even, like if I answered all of the emails, I just saw six emails that I don’t even know why these people are emailing me inviting me to PR things or different things like that. Like, if I really just was on email it would be the only thing I did. I would get no other work done. And I know a lot of people who feel this way and a lot of people who have big blogs also feel this way. So if you have a blog, you might be in this situation.

Email is something we’re also really bad about tracking, and part of it is because we do some of it on our phone, and some of it on our computer, and you definitely aren’t noticing those little times when you’re doing email on your phone when you’re waiting to pick your kid up from soccer, or when you’re on the subway. And so this can be a really big time suck where the time is just going away. Perhaps it’s time you do need to spend. Perhaps it could be batched into some other time.

But email might be creeping into little gaps of time that you could actually be spending doing other work, and you could just batch all your email into a certain part of your day and it fits into that part of the day. And you’ve just gotta go through all of it then, and that’ll force you to write shorter emails, emails that are more to the point, emails that include enough information that there doesn’t need to be a back and forth thread about it. There’s been books, and books, and books written about how to write emails so that you get fewer of them and so you get through your email more quickly, so I don’t wanna talk too much about that.

But I wanna encourage you that if you are not being cognizant in some way of how you’re tracking emails you need to start, and especially if you have clients. If you are at a point where you are pitching magazine editors and you’re hearing responses, or you do content marketing, or you blog for different clients, you need to be tracking how you do those emails, because that needs to factor into how you think about how much time a specific client takes. I often see writers who just feel like some client is just taking way too much time, more time than they’re being paid for. They just feel like they don’t like working with the client, and it almost inevitably comes back to the amount of time being spent communicating over email with that client, and how it’s not being tracked and not being factored into the rates and your estimation of how the rate aligns with the work that you are doing.

So I don’t have a slide on this because we’ve talked about this in a lot of other webinars in the past, but I like to think of $100 an hour as a great goal to shoot for, much more than $1 a word in terms of something that you should have a goal for yourself in terms of your income. So right now though I know some of you. I’ve worked with you either in person at events or I coach you. I know for a number of you $100 an hour is not a realistic goal at this moment. But if you can set that benchmark for yourself that you want all your clients to be at $100 an hour, or $75 an hour, or $50 an hour, whatever that dollars per hour benchmark is for you.

Then what that means is you take, I’m not gonna pop back over to it now but I’ll just go to the slide. You take this pie chart that we talked about, and at the end of every month you look and you say, “Okay, this magazine paid me this many dollars this month. How many hours did I spend on that? Am I at $50 an hour? Am I at $12 an hour? Am I at $125 an hour?” And you make decisions about who you’re going to continue to work with based on that number, based on that dollars per hour number and your ability to change it.

So it might be that right now you’re doing $22 an hour for a big client of yours, but you can’t afford to just let go of that client. What can you do to bring that $22 per hour number up? You look at your specific task data. You look back at what you tracked. You look back at what actually went into those hours that made your rate $22 an hour. Did you spend a lot of time looking up things to write about your blog posts? Did you spend a lot of time coordinating interviews with sources for that article? Did you spend a lot of time on the phone with sources for that article? Did you spend a lot of time emailing with that editor to clarify things? Or did you spend a lot of time editing, re-editing, writing, re-writing? Did you spend a lot of time structuring that piece? What did you spend a lot of time on?

And then you look at how to minimize that. That’s where the fun work begins. That’s where the work that brings your hourly rate up and makes you feel good about what you’re earning from the clients that you’re working for happens. It happens on your end, and it’s not necessarily related to getting higher rates. It’s related to doing the work at a better per-hour rate. Kenny has a question. “Is this email tracking just for travel writing?” I hate to say I don’t have a personal life but I would say I maybe spent, like, five hours, sorry, five minutes a week maximum on personal emails. So all of my email tracking is related to travel writing, but I have it separated. And I recommend you separate your email tracking as well as much as you can.

So anything that has to do with a client, like if you have a writing client that you work for regularly, I would put it in the project related to either the story you’re writing for that client or that client. If you are doing emails related to something you do emails about a lot, like if you have a blog and you respond to a lot of emails related to your blog, I would have that middle manager level, that project level. I would have a whole project that’s just about responding to emails about your blog. I would have a project or that middle manager level that’s just about emails related to pitching, and then you can include in there also following up on your pitches, right? That’s an amount of time that I think people often just don’t track.

They don’t think about those, like, you know, half-hour spurts where you go through your sent folder and you follow-up on as many pitches that you’ve sent as you can. So you can, I suppose, think of it as just using the email tracking for work related purposes, but I don’t know that I would quite say that it’s just for travel writing. I would say you definitely wanna do it for all work related to clients and your own blog. Anything that you would think of as time that to you equals money, or time that you would like to be earning money. That’s a good, sort of, standard for the emails that you should be tracking.

If it’s like writing to your mom, like an update about what’s going on in your life and you don’t do that by phone, then obviously that’s not something that you should be tracking, unless you’re really, really into making the most of all of your time. Because right now you’re trying to get a big lift in your freelance business. Okay, so let’s go through a couple of these because I wanna get back to talking about some specific time tracking solutions and be able to let you guys go in a reasonable amount of time as well.

So we’ve talked about a few of these things related to pitching. I just wanted to address a couple of these and how to track them and how to approach them. Researching magazines, this is something that conversely people spend tons of time on, and I wish people would spend more time on. So it’s this weird double-edged sword that I wish people would be more familiar with more magazines, but that I know a lot of people spend a lot of time going in-depth with one specific magazine. And the real problem is that people often spend a lot of time going in-depth with one specific magazine and don’t produce a pitch out of that time.

So what I like to say about researching magazines is that if you don’t already, I highly recommend the prescription of spend 15 minutes every day. Take 15 minutes out of your social media time, or take 15 minutes out of your TV time, or take 15 minutes out of your reading what on Earth Trump has gotten up to today time. Whatever that is, take 15 minutes out of that and use that to familiarize yourself with magazines that you didn’t know about before. Even if it’s not in the Travel Magazine Database, go in Zinio. Just be familiar with more magazines for 15 minutes a day, I highly recommend it.

But be very stern with yourself about time that you’re spending not for a clear learning or pitching purpose reading past articles in any magazine, or just skimming that magazine. So unless you have a pitch that you’ve already seen in the database a specific section worked for that pitch idea, and you were looking at the magazine for the sole purpose of refining that particular pitch, you shouldn’t be wasting time just flipping through magazines if it’s not recreational.

So read articles and magazines, great. Flip through them recreationally, great. But know that the time that you are spending working on your pitches, that the way you’re looking at magazines should have a goal. It should have an objective, and that it’s not the moment to just be flipping through reading whatever article interests you. You should only be looking at articles in the specific section that you’re looking at to pitch. And this is a big reason why we created the Travel Magazine Database in the first place, is that it takes minimum, if you’re not familiar with breaking down a magazine, it takes minimum two to three hours to analyze a magazine and figure out which sections are open to freelancers, which one you should pitch, what’s the format of those sections?

And I found for my coaching students that if I had them familiarizing themselves with magazines in that way, doing those breakdowns themselves, they didn’t have time to do any pitching. So I tell you this not because I want you to go buy the Travel Magazine Database but because I want you to understand that if you are trying to analyze magazines yourself en masse in bulk, like more than two a week, even two a week, you won’t have time to pitch those magazines. So you need to either have a lot of time on your hands if you’re gonna be doing analyzation of magazines yourself, or you need to be really, really realistic about what you’re looking at when you look at those magazines so that you don’t just fall down the rabbit hole of reading, and analyzing, and becoming an expert in that magazine and not pitching them. And pitching the crap out of them to make money for yourself with that time that you have spent.

Okay, now I know a lot of people talked about things around ideas. Ideas is also like a huge time suck. And any of you that have traveled with me, I know a couple of the people on the call have been on a bootcamp with me, or perhaps some of you have been on a press trip with me related to a conference or something, have seen that I’ll be on a tour and I’m taking notes on the tour. And every time I hear an idea for a magazine I immediately email it to myself separately, “This is an idea.” We have a whole webinar coming up related specifically to having ideas, tracking ideas, the organization thereof.

But in terms of matching an idea to a magazine, what takes people, what causes people to say that it takes them too long is almost always…I’ll just give you the answer right here because it’s so easy. It’s almost always a lack of knowledge. And that lack of knowledge is one of two things, and when I tell you you’ll be able to figure out for yourself. Now every time you feel like it’s taking you too long it’s always gonna be one of these two things. Either you’re not familiar enough with the magazine markets, so you just don’t know enough magazines to know what would be a match. Or you’re not familiar enough with what makes an idea salable.

So these play out in two ways. If you’re not familiar enough with the markets it means that you are trying to have an idea separately, as in you didn’t find a magazine and come up with an idea specifically for that magazine. So you have a wild idea. You have an idea that you caught in the wild that’s separate, and you’re now trying to find a home for it. And that’s an exhausting, grueling process because you’re not matching the idea. When it takes you a long time it’s because what you’re doing is you’re actually familiarizing yourself with magazines and seeing a lot of magazines for yourself that might work for other ideas but don’t work for the idea that you have at hand.

So in that case you need to see that prescription I said earlier, which is spend 15 minutes a day familiarizing yourself with magazines. Now in the second case this plays out in the real world as you think that you have an idea, and you think perhaps that you have a match for that idea, and you’re trying to write the pitch. Or maybe you’re trying to match it to a market, that could also be the case, and you keep flip flopping about what that story could be.

So what that means is sometimes, you know, you encountered something really great. I’ll use this alpaca farm that I keep using as an example. During the recent bootcamp we went to an alpaca farm. Interesting experience, lots of different story ideas. So at this alpaca farm there was a store that was just beautiful. It would look like a boutique that you would find here in New York City, but it’s like in the middle of this farm three hours outside of the city.

Is that store itself an idea? It can be maybe for the right magazine, for the right section, for the right editor. Maybe it actually needs to be a round up. Maybe it needs to be a profile on the people who own that store, but just the store, it’s not really salable.

And so if you feel like you are trying to write a pitch, or trying to make a match and you’re just not finding matches, even when you have magazines in front of you, it’s more an issue of familiarization with what is an idea than about knowing enough markets. So those are the two things that come down to time taking too long, things taking too long about finding ideas. So if you’re suffering from either of those things the answer is that you need to get to know the markets, or you need to spend more time figuring out what is an idea, what an article looks like. And that can be accomplished by reading articles, or taking Ideafest Program, of course. But reading articles specifically rather than just getting to know more magazines.

Now fact checking, fact checking for pitches and also fact checking for writing. This is a huge one that people take way too much time on, and I’ve got a great tip for this that comes courtesy of somebody who I know was on the call earlier. I know she was with us, somebody that I coach.

We have this great thing. So she really loves to deep dive on reading about things, and she has a lot of clients that she works for regularly that require a lot of research. And so she’s out there writing, and she does some Google searching and she comes up with some things that she’s reading in order to figure out what she’s gonna write in her posts. So what we realized, though, is that a lot of those tabs that she’s opening, a lot of the things that she’s reading might be interesting but don’t actually need to be read in order to accomplish the piece of writing that she was writing at this moment.

So what we did was we had her create a second browser window. So she’s working on her piece, she’s doing research. Every time she encounters something that seems interesting but maybe she doesn’t need to read it right now, she puts it in a second browser window. We call it the read later window.

Now what happened is I think she did this for one day and she came back to me and said, “Oh my God, I realize there was two or three hours of reading in that other window.” And we kept it there in case she really needed those things to put her pieces together. So they were there so she could come back to them.

And it didn’t sound like there was really anything in there that she needed to read, but she said that she could not believe how much reading time she would’ve spent without noticing. So if fact checking is a place that takes you a lot of time, I highly recommend a second browser window approach. So I think we’ve talked through most of this already but I just wanna take a quick tour through this and then also the time tracking solutions that I recommend.

So what should you be tracking? There’s been a couple questions about this. People asked, you know, “Should I be tracking email for this? How should I do recurring versus non-recurring?” Here are some things. You wanna be tracking at the client level. You wanna have the client names so that you can go back at the end of the month. Or if it’s a client that you worked for only one time you wanna be able to look at every hour you logged for that client, and communicating for that client, and researching for that client all those things and see was it worth it. Are there ways that I can make this worth it if it’s not worth it for me right now? And if not, get a new client next month, okay?

Projects. So we looked at how there’s a couple different types of projects, right? There’s projects like booking all your trips. There’s projects like emailing newsletters that you have to do all the time for your blog. There’s projects like a specific post, or a specific article that you’re writing for somebody. There’s lots of different types of projects.

Now there’s a difference, though, between tracking at a project level and a task level that I’ve kind of alluded to but I just wanna come out and say quite clearly. It doesn’t always make sense for you to be tracking something like pitch this magazine, like “EatingWell.” Say you’re writing a pitch for “EatingWell.” It doesn’t always make sense that that middle manager level, that project level that you’re tracking is gonna be pitched for “EatingWell Magazine.” It might make more sense that when you’re pitching you actually have five different middle manager levels.

You have five project levels. One is for reading about markets. One is for matching ideas to markets. One is for writing the first paragraph of the pitch, one is the second paragraph of the pitch, one is the third paragraph of the pitch. And maybe you have another one which is proofreading, fact checking your pitches. So you might have six middle managers, six projects that are around pitching, rather than one project for each pitch that you write. And we would do that because for you it doesn’t matter so much how much time you’ve spent on one pitch for a magazine. Because the time you’re spending on pitching, it’s about you, right? It’s not about, you know, that magazine, or that client, or what it’s like to work with them, or what it’s like to research for them.

You’re trying to optimize your time, your marketing time. And that’s why we would look at that from a task-based approach. So when I had my time tracker up you’ll notice that a lot of things that I do that are internal, like newsletters, email, communicating with my assistant, planning trips, you know, marketing activities, outreach. Those I track as a task, whereas things where I’m being paid a specific amount, those I’m gonna track by that item so I can check if the amount made sense.

Now what about recurring versus one-off? I recommend that with clients, especially if you’re new to time tracking or you’re new to that client, that you track granularly. You track per blog post, or per article, or per newsletter, or maybe per week of social media scheduling. You track on that unit level to begin with because you’re going to be changing your amount of time that you put into it quite rapidly, either as a new client as you learn the systems, or when you’re new to time tracking as you keep making adjustments now that you see how long things take.

And that way you can compare per unit. So the unit, like I said, it could be a blog post, it could be an article, it could be a week of social media scheduling. You can compare those units over time in addition to just on a monthly or weekly level how long does that category or that client take you. So again, that category level, sorry, or area of responsibility, that’s like the tier one. That’s that graph that I showed you where it’s like admin versus this magazine versus writing your book. Those are really big blocks. Then that middle manager or project level, that’s something that has tasks under it, but that you wanna know how much time you’re spending on that one thing. So that’s why I said that’s good for a blog post for a new client but not necessarily for a blog post that you write all the time for your own blog that you do quickly.

It’s good for an article. It’s good for putting together a proposal if putting together a proposal is new for you and it’s something that it’s gonna take a long time. You wanna use that middle manager project level for anything that has different tasks under it but that you need to know how long that whole thing takes you, okay? Now this goes into how do you make reporting manageable and usable, is that if you aren’t segmenting out those levels that that specific task of booking the hotels for that one destination on my multi-city itinerary. I don’t need to know how long that specific things take, but I do need to track that. So we wanna be able to look at the big picture, but we also wanna be able to see with enough detail how to optimize the time that we’re spending.

So like I said, this is a lifelong process that we’re talking about today. Don’t worry if today you feel like, “I’m thinking about so many things I don’t know where to start.” Start with your energy tracker and then start by setting up a time tracker and just tracking. Don’t worry about looking at it every day. Look at it at the end of the week. Look at it once a month. So let’s talk about trackers.

So there’s really a lot of them out there, and I seem to find new ones all the time. Some of them are attached to invoicing software. I found one for a client yesterday that I think is gonna be the answer to all her dreams but it’s quite advanced. She does a lot of content marketing work where she’s sending contracts to clients. She wants to be sending invoices and have a lot of reminders. She has problems with her clients paying on time. She wants to make sure that it’s super clear for them what’s in the contract. She has to refer back to that a lot.

So I gave her really advanced one that has lead tracking and funnel tracking, which is not something that most of you need. So I can tell you which ones I recommend across the board, but there might be other ones besides these two that you like. So people in the chat box are talking about Toggle, and I know actually one of my clients, I’m not sure if she’s still on the call right now, had used Toggle. And when we started doing her time tracking, yes, she is still here. When we started doing her time tracking she realized that she couldn’t get that level of reporting detail that we needed that we wanted to look at doing Toggle.

So Toggle is one that I had recommended for a long time because I know a lot of people use it, and it’s also got this start stop functionality, which OfficeTime does as well, which I’ll show you in a minute. But for reporting it might not have the level of depth that you would actually want. So Toggle has a phone app. Most of these trackers will also have a phone app. The one that I use, which is called OfficeTime. I’ve put that down here as my personal choice, OfficeTime, is currently undergoing a round of Kickstarter funding to do some updates on it and make it look more, I’d say Mac versus PC. Toggle looks like Mac, OfficeTime looks like PC.

So OfficeTime is currently undergoing a makeover to look a little more Mac. But let me just show you quickly in a full-screen view. Don’t freak out when you see how many things I have open on my computer. But let me show you a full-screen view so you can see this start stop functionality that a couple people had mentioned because I have it here on OfficeTime as well.

So now you’re gonna see this crazy mirror window effect for a second. Cover that up as best I can. So if you can follow me, all the way up here at the top of my screen…oh, that’s Dropbox. There’s this play button. So I previously was…that’s not our webinar.

I was previously tracking today’s webinar, which I’ve now lost. Freelance Time Webinar, great. So previously I was tracking our webinar, and you’ll see that when I hit play it turns green here at the top. Now I’ve got all this junk that my husband put on here so that I can have various things on my computer. But basically this play button should, as you’re seeing way, again, at the top of the screen, it’s way up here at the top of the screen. This play button should be green and it should be kind of near your clock so that as you’re working, if the play button isn’t green you notice. And then you go, “Oh, crap, I’m not tracking my time. Let me go turn on my tracker.”

So from here I can start and stop different things. See, I can pause this. Pause it and start, stop it. I can switch back to this other one that I started by accident. I can start different ones. I can do all of this from up here at the top. Now I notice Steph just said in the chat box that she has OfficeTime on her phone. Most of these do come on your phone. So like I was saying, if you are like me and you do a lot of email on your phone, then it’s very easy for you to start and stop when you do your email on your phone as well.

But I really like any of these trackers that have that play button type thing where you can very clearly see if you’re tracking or not. Because, you know, we all check the time periodically on our machine up at the top, and so that’s a really easy way when you’re getting used to hitting play to know if it’s going or not. After you’ve done it for about a month like any habit it becomes kind of ingrained, and I usually have my tracker running the vast majority of the time. It’s like I’ll forget here and there, but then usually I go out and do something else and I automatically go to start my tracker. I realize I haven’t tracked a coaching call with so and so, and I can just check my phone and see when our call started and I can put that into the tracker. So Toggle and OfficeTime are two big ones that a lot of people like.

So I think we’ve gone quite long. Thank you guys so much for bearing with me, and I’m sorry for that weird mic issue. I’m still on the same mic. I don’t know why it stopped working, but I don’t wanna keep you any longer because I’m sure that this has been a lot of information.

So as I mentioned, we’re gonna be talking next week about goals, and one of the things about goals is that until you really know how you’re spending your time, how much you can possibly accomplish with your time? Until you have this time data it can be really difficult to track, and set, and maintain, and achieve a lot of your goals. Because it’s very easy to just say every month, “Oh, well, I didn’t get to it,” or, “Oh, well, I started it and it just took forever.”

So that’s really one of the reasons why I wanted to do this time tracking today before we get into talking about goals. Because they help you know what is achievable. They help you see where you can make adjustments so that you are actually earning more with the same time that you’re already working. And then after that, as I mentioned, we’re gonna talk specifically about pitch tracking. I’ve gotten a lot of requests in the past about pitch tracking. I’m gonna talk about a couple different ways to do that, a couple organization methods.

And thank you so much for chatting time tracking with me. Obviously you can see it’s a big passion for me because I see that it really makes a huge, huge difference for people being able to take on more and new work and not feel stressed about it, and be able to fit it in and be able to expand their work and their income to reach their goals. So thank you guys so much for sticking around to hear me go on and on about this, and I look forward to talking about goals with you next week. Cheers, guys.